Yamaha 01V_E 01V Owner's Manual 01VE

User Manual: Yamaha 01V Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 303 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

PHANTOM +48V
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVEL
GAIN
13/14 15/16
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
7
26dB
8 9 10 11
26dB
12
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
1 RETURN 2
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
SE
L
SOLO
SO
ONON
15/16
SEL
SOLO
13/14
SEL
SOLO
12
SEL
SOLO
11
SEL
10
S
EL
9
8
26dB
26dB
26dB
26dB
+10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100 100
GAIN –20
+10
GAIN
+10 –60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
–10dBV (UNBAL)
–34
+10 –60–16 GAIN
+10 –60
–16 GAIN
+10 –60–16 GAIN –34
0
–60
GAIN –34 –34 –34
E
Owner’s ManualOwner’s Manual
NEDERLAND
●Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen
back-up.
●Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de
batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde
van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service
Afdeiing:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing
Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel. 030-2828425
●Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
THE NETHERLANDS
●This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory
back-up.
●For the removal of the battery at the moment of the
disposal at the end of the service life please consult your
retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center
Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL
UTRECHT
Tel: 030-2828425
●Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small
chemical waste.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with
the following code:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not
correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your
plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to
the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth
symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which
is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE
MUSIC (U.K.) LTD.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte
batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti
asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä
käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha
may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may
cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all
installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
i
01V—Owner’s Manual
Important Information
Read the Following Before Operating the 01V
Warnings
• Do not locate the 01V in a place subject to excessive heat or in direct sunlight. This
could be a fire hazard.
• Do not place the 01V in a place subject to excessive humidity or dust. This could be
a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Connect the 01V power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this
Owner’s
Manual
or as marked on the 01V. Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Do not plug several devices into the same AC outlet. This can overload the AC outlet,
and can be a fire and electrical shock hazard. It may also affect the performance of
some devices.
• Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. A damaged power cord is a potential
fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid
or metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• If the power cord is damaged (i.e., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for
a replacement. Using the 01V in this condition is a fire and shock hazard.
• Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting from an AC outlet. Never pull the
cord. Damaging the power cord in this way is a potential fire and electrical shock
hazard.
• Do not place small metal objects on top of the 01V. Metal objects inside the 01V are
a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Do not block the 01V ventilation slots. The 01V has ventilation slots on the top and
rear to prevent the internal temperature from rising. Blocked ventilation slots are a
fire hazard.
• Do not try to modify the 01V. This could be a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• The 01V operating temperature is between 5˚C and 35˚C (41˚F and 95˚F).
• If lightning begins to occur, turn off the power switch of the unit as soon as possible,
and unplug the power cable plug from the electrical outlet.
• If there is a possibility of lightning, do not touch the power cable plug if it is still con-
nected. Doing so may be an electrical shock hazard.
• If you notice any abnormality—such as smoke, odor, or noise—turn off the 01V
immediately. Remove the power cord from the AC outlet. Confirm that the abnor-
mality is no longer present. Consult your dealer for repair. Using the 01V in this con-
dition is a fire and shock hazard.
Cautions
• Turn off all audio devices and speakers when connecting to the 01V. Refer to the
owner’s manual for each device. Use the correct cables and connect as specified.
• If a foreign object or water gets inside the 01V, turn it off immediately. Remove the
power cord from the AC outlet. Consult your dealer for repair. Using the 01V in this
condition is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
ii
01V—Owner’s Manual
• If you plan not to use the 01V for a long period of time, remove the power cord from
the AC outlet. Leaving the 01V connected is a fire hazard.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning detergent, or a chemical cloth to clean the 01V.
Use only a soft, dry cloth.
• The 01V is a heavy piece of equipment. Always grip the underneath, not the side pan-
els, when lifting.
Interference
01V uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radios and tele-
visions placed close to it. If interference does occur, relocate the affected equipment.
Copyright
© 1998 Yamaha Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of the 01V software or this
Owner’s Manual
may be reproduced or distributed
in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Cor-
poration.
Trademarks
ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are
registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Macintosh is a registered trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc. Pro Tools is a registered trademark of Digidesign or Avid Tech-
nology, Inc. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and TEAC are regis-
tered trademarks of TEAC Corporation. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby
acknowledged.
Package Contents
The 01V package should contain the following items. Make sure that you have them all.
• 01V Digital Mixing Console
• Owner’s Manual
Contact your Yamaha dealer if anything is missing.
Keep this manual for future reference!
Contents
iii
01V—Owner’s Manual
Contents
1 Welcome to the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Welcome to the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
About this Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
01V Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
01V Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Key Feature Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
01V System Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Important Wordclock Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Turning On the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Turning Off the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3 Touring the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Top Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4 Getting Around the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
About the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cursor Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PARAMETER Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
–1/DEC & +1/INC Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ENTER Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Title Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5 Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Input Channel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Phantom Powering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Pad Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setting Input Channel Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Metering Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Changing the Input Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Attenuating Input Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Applying EQ to Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Input Channels Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Delaying Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Muting Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting Input Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Panning Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Routing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Monitoring Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Input Channels & Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
iv
Contents
01V—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels & the Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Input Channels & the Option I/O Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Swapping Inputs 1–8 & 17–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Grouping Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Grouping Mutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Viewing Input Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copying & Swapping Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Input Channel Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6 EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
About the 01V EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Adjusting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
EQ Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Bypassing the EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Resetting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Preset EQ Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Storing EQ Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recalling EQ Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Editing EQ Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Preset EQ Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7 Solo, Monitors & Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
About Monitor & Solo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Monitor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Two-track Input (2TR IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Monitor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Monitor Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Solo Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using Solo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Solo Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Metering Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Main Stereo Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Peak Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting the Metering Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Option I/O Meters (input channels 17–24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Effects Send Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8 Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
About the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Analog Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2TR Out & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Coaxial Digital Out & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Option I/O & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Omni Outs & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Solo & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Monitoring the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Contents
v
01V—Owner’s Manual
Metering the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Routing Signals to the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Viewing Stereo Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Setting the Stereo Output Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Muting the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Balancing the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Applying EQ to the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Stereo Output Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Stereo Output Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Stereo Output Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9 Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
About the Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Option I/O & the Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Omni Outs & the Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Monitoring Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Metering Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sending Channel Signals to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Pre-fader/Post-fader Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Viewing Aux Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting Aux Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Muting Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Applying EQ to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Aux Send Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pairing Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Aux Send Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Stereo Pair Aux Send Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
10 Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
About the Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Option I/O & the Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Omni Outs & the Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Monitoring Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Metering Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Routing Signals to the Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Setting Bus Out Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Muting Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Routing Bus Signals to the Stereo Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Pairing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Bus Out Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Stereo Pair Bus Out Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
11 Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
About the Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Assigning Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Omni Out Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Omni Out Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
vi
Contents
01V—Owner’s Manual
12 Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
About the Onboard Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preset Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using the Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pre-fader/Post-fader Effects Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Viewing Effects Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Metering Effects Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Setting Effects Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Muting Effects Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Viewing Effects Returns Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Metering Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Applying EQ to Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Muting Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting Effects Returns Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Panning Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Routing Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Monitoring Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Effects Returns & Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Storing Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Recalling Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Editing Effects Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Setting Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Effects Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13 Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
About the Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Preset Dynamics Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using the Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Editing the Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Processor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dynamics Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Storing Dynamics Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Recalling Dynamics Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Editing Dynamics Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Preset Dynamics Program Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
14 Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
What’s Stored in Scene Memories? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
About the Edit Buffer & Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Scene Memory 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Scene Memory Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Storing Mix Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Recalling Mix Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages . . . . . . 188
Undoing Mix Scene Recalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Protecting Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Contents
vii
01V—Owner’s Manual
Editing Scene Memory Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Renumbering Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Setting a Fade Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Recalling Scene Data Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
15 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Assigning Faders & On Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting 01V Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Initializing the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Calibrating the Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
16 Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . 205
About Wordclocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Setting the Wordclock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Digital Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Output Dither . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Digital Stereo In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Cascading 01Vs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
About Option I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Installing Option I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Option I/O Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
17 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
MIDI & the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
MIDI Receive Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
MIDI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Program Change Scene Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Control Change Parameter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
System Exclusive Parameter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Local Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
MIDI Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
User Defined MIDI Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Linking 01Vs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
18 System Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
01V & ADAT-Interface Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Two 01Vs & two ADAT-Interface Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
01V & Tascam-Interface Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Two 01Vs & two Tascam-Interface Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
01V & Pro Tools (AES/EBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Appendix A: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
01V Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
viii
Contents
01V—Owner’s Manual
Security Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Rack-mounting Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Input Channels 1–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Option I/O Inputs 17–24 (need optional card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Digital Stereo In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Return 1, 2 (Internal Effect 1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Bus 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Aux 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Omni Out 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Monitor Out (Solo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Digital Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Option I/O Output (need optional card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Memories & Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Digital Audio Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Digital Audio Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Option I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Control I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
01V Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Appendix C: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Scene Memory to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
01V Parameter to Control Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
03D & Programmable Mixer 01 Parameter to Control Change Table 277
MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Appendix D: Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Yamaha Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Welcome to the 01V
1
01V—Owner’s Manual
Welcome to the 01V
1
In this chapter...
Welcome to the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
About this Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
01V Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
01V Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Key Feature Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2
Chapter 1—Welcome to the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
Welcome to the 01V
Thank you for choosing the Yamaha 01V Digital Mixing Console. Based on the highly
successful Yamaha digital mixer series, the Yamaha 01V has been designed with MIDI
musicians and small sound reinforcement applications in mind, although its versatility,
compactness, and ease-of-use will appeal to both professional and semiprofessional
users.
About this Owner’s Manual
This Owner’s Manual contains all the information you’ll need in order to operate your
01V Digital Mixing Console. Use the table of contents to find general information and
familiarize yourself with the organization of this manual, and use the index to locate
specific items. A glossary of 01V-related jargon is provided on page 293.
Each chapter covers a specific section of the 01V. The Input Channels Chapter, for
example, explains all about input channels, while the Scene Memories Chapter deals
with scene memories. The content of each chapter should be fairly obvious from its
title. Items such as EQ and dynamics, which are available on input channels, aux sends,
and the stereo output, are explained in their own chapters.
Where possible, the individual sections of a chapter are organized in order of signal
flow. The Input Channel Chapter, for example, starts with the input connectors and
works through each input channel function, finishing up at the buses.
01V Installation
Site the 01V on a stable surface, somewhere that complies with the important informa-
tion at the front of this manual. The 01V can be rack-mounted using an optional
rack-mount kit.
01V Features
3
01V—Owner’s Manual
01V Features
01V Sonic Specs
• Linear 20-bit 128-times oversampling A/D converters
• Linear 20-bit 8-times oversampling D/A converters (STEREO OUT)
• 105 dB typical dynamic range (CH INPUT to STEREO OUT)
• 20 Hz–20 kHz (+1, –3 dB) frequency response
• 32-bit internal digital audio processing
• 44-bit digital EQ processing
01V Features
• 24 inputs (including 8 digital inputs)
• 14 outputs (STEREO OUT, OMNI OUTs, 8 assignable digital outputs)
• Continuously variable gain controls
• Balanced XLRs with +48 V phantom powering (input channels 1 through 12)
• 26 dB pad (input channels 1 through 12)
• Balanced phone jack inputs (input channels 1 through 16)
• Four configurable analog Omni outs (AUX, BUS, CH DIRECT, STEREO)
• Option I/O slot for digital interface with 8-track digital multitrack recorders
• 8 assignable digital outputs from an Option I/O card (Tascam, ADAT, AES/EBU)
• Coaxial-type digital input and output
• Versatile solo modes for comprehensive monitoring
• 3 fader groups for multiple fader control
• 3 mute groups for multiple mute control
• 250 ms input delay (1–16) and 300 ms output delay (STEREO OUT, OMNI OUTs)
• Channel Copy function
• Stereo-pair operation for input channels, aux sends, and bus outs
• 100 scene memories for storing mix snapshots
• Four-band parametric EQ (2-band on Option I/O input channels)
• Powerful EQ library with 40 preset programs and 40 user programs
• Dedicated controls for EQ and pan
• Two stereo multi-effects processors onboard
• Powerful effects library with 42 preset programs and 57 user programs
• The equivalent of 22 dynamics processors onboard (compressor, gate, ducking,
expander, compander)
• Powerful dynamics library with 40 preset programs and 40 user programs
• 320 x 80 dot LCD display
• Comprehensive MIDI implementation (remote control, MMC, Bulk)
• Built-in MIDI interface and TO HOST port for quick and simple connection to a
personal computer
• 15 motorized 60 mm faders
4
Chapter 1—Welcome to the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
Key Feature Discussion
Configuration
The 01V provides a total of 24 inputs: 12 mono input channels (1 through 12), 2 stereo
input channels (13/14 and 15/16), and 8 digital inputs (17 through 24) by means of an
Option I/O card. The stereo output signal is available from the analog STEREO OUT,
coaxial DIGITAL STEREO OUT, and can be assigned to the analog OMNI OUTs and
Option I/O digital outputs. The four bus outputs and four aux sends can be assigned to
the analog OMNI OUTs and Option I/O digital outputs. The Effect 1 and Effect 2 buses
feed the onboard stereo multi-effects processors, whose signals are returned via effects
returns 1 and 2, which feature four-band parametric EQ. Input channels 1 through 12
feature balanced XLR and phone jack connections, with switchable phantom powering.
Input channels 13 through 16 feature phone jack connections. Input channels 17
through 24 are accessed via an Option I/O card.
Full-feature input channels 1 through 16 feature an attenuator, four-band parametric
EQ, dynamics processor, delay, and can be assigned to aux sends 1 through 4 and effects
sends 1 and 2. Simplified input channels 17 through 24 feature an attenuator, two-band
parametric EQ, and can be assigned to aux sends 1 and 2 and effects sends 1 and 2.
Input channels 1 through 8 and 17 through 24 can be swapped, so that Option I/O dig-
ital input signals appear on full-feature channels 1 through 8. Input delays can be used
for microphone-placement compensation, while output delays can be used for
delay-compensation in multi-speaker systems. The number of input channels can be
increased by digitally cascading two 01Vs together. Option I/O digital outputs can be
configured as bus outs, aux sends, input channel direct outs, or stereo outs. So although
the 01V is a four-bus mixer, assigning the four buses and four aux sends, or the channel
direct outs to the Option I/O eight outputs allows eight-track simultaneous recording.
Benefits of a Digital Mixer
You’re probably already familiar with the many benefits offered by digital audio, but
what exactly are the benefits for digital audio mixing? Well, an audio mixer has the job
of combining audio signals from various sources, at differing levels and impedances,
usually into a stereo mix. And it must do this without introducing any new distortions
and noise. Analog mixers do a pretty good job, but even with the best designs, non-lin-
ear effects caused by circuit components are unavoidable.
In the digital realm, audio mixing consists of adding and multiplying binary numbers
that represent audio signals. The DSP (Digital Signal Processor) chips used for these
calculations never get their sums wrong, so once past the initial A/D conversion, audio
signals are immune from signal degradation. With the 01V, noise, distortion, and
crosstalk are virtually eliminated, and you’ll hear a new clarity in your mixes.
Once in the digital domain, it makes sense to keep audio data digital, as multiple
AD/DA conversions can degrade signal quality. With an Option I/O interface card, the
01V can be connected directly to a modular digital multitrack recorder, thereby keeping
audio data in the digital domain for both recording and mixing. The final stereo mix
can be transferred to a two-track digital recorder using the 01V’s Coaxial STEREO
OUT.
Onboard stereo multi-effects processors and dynamics processors mean that signals
remain in the digital domain, eliminating unnecessary AD/DA conversions. Digital sig-
nal processing is performed using third-generation Yamaha DSPs, as used in the
Yamaha ProR3 Digital Reverberator.
Key Feature Discussion
5
01V—Owner’s Manual
01V Sonic Performance
The 01V’s linear 20-bit 128-times oversampling A/D converters provide a typical
dynamic range of 105 dB. The STEREO OUT features 20-bit 8-times oversampling
D/A converters, while the MONITOR OUT and OMNI OUTs feature 18-bit 8-times
oversampling D/A converters. Oversampling techniques effectively increase the inter-
nal sampling rate, so side effects caused by steep low-pass filters, used to filter out sam-
pling frequency components during D/A conversion, are virtually eliminated.
Consequently, audio signal integrity is maintained from input through to output.
The 01V can generate the industry standard sampling rate of 44.1 kHz, or synchronize
to an external wordclock source from 44.1 kHz –10% to 48 kHz +6%.
Four-band Parametric EQ & Library
Input channels 1 through 16, the stereo output, aux sends, and effects returns all feature
four-band fully parametric EQ, with variable gain, frequency, Q, and bypass. Input
channels 17 through 24 feature a simplified two-band parametric EQ. High and low EQ
bands can be used as shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF, respectively. See “EQ” on page
61 for more information.
EQ settings can be stored in the EQ library as programs, or with all mix settings in mix
scenes. The EQ library consists of 40 preset programs and 40 user programs. User pro-
grams allow you to store frequently used EQ settings, which can be titled for easy iden-
tification. The unique collection of preset EQ programs are designed for specific
applications and instruments, and provide a good reference and starting point when
making EQ adjustments. See “EQ Library” on page 67 for more information.
Motorized Faders
The 01V features 15 motorized 60 mm faders that move automatically when a mix
scene is recalled, providing a clear and visual indication of fader levels. A fade time of
up to 25 seconds can be set for each mix scene individually. Faders can be grouped
together in one of three fader groups for multiple fader control. See “Grouping Faders”
on page 55 for more information. Faders on paired channels move simultaneously. See
“Pairing Input Channels” on page 52 for more information.
01V Faders are multifunction controls, and their exact operation depends on the
selected Fader mode. Input channel faders may be used as channel faders or aux or
effects send controls. The STEREO fader may be used as the stereo output fader or aux
or effects send master level faders. See “Fader Modes” on page 32 for more information.
Faders 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal parameters on
REMOTE page 1, or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3. See “Assigning Fad-
ers & On Buttons” on page 194 and “User Defined MIDI Controllers” on page 238 for
more information.
6
Chapter 1—Welcome to the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
Onboard Effects Processors
The 01V has two stereo multi-effects processors onboard: Effect 1 and Effect 2. These
processors provide a wide range of quality effects, including reverb, delay, chorus,
flange, amp simulator, and more. There are 34 different effects types available. The
effects processors are fed by the Effect 1 and Effect 2 buses, and the processed signals are
returned through the effects return channels. Effects can be applied to input channels
1 through 24. Effects return 1 can be fed to Effect 2, and Effects return 2 can be fed to
Effect 1.
Effects settings can be stored in the effects library as programs, or with all mix settings
in mix scenes. The effect library consists of 42 preset programs and 57 user programs.
User programs allow you to store your own effects programs, which can be titled for
easy identification. See “Effects Library” on page 132 for more information.
External effects processors can be patched into the 01V using the aux sends.
Onboard Dynamics Processors
Dynamics processors, providing compressor, gate, ducking, expander, and compander,
are available on input channels 1 through 16, the stereo output, and the aux sends.
That’s equivalent to 22 dynamics processors! Dynamics processors can be self triggering
(i.e., the signal being processed is used as the trigger signal), or triggered by a signal
from another channel.
Dynamics settings can be stored in the dynamics library as programs, or with all mix
settings in mix scenes. The dynamics library consists of 40 preset programs and 40 user
programs. User programs allow you to store your own dynamics programs, which can
be titled for easy identification. See “Dynamics Library” on page 173 for more informa-
tion.
Option I/O & Digital I/O
The 01V features a single slot for an optional Option I/O card, providing eight digital
inputs (input channels 17 through 24) and eight assignable digital outputs. Option I/O
provides a direct digital connection to modular digital multitrack recorders, with cards
for the following formats: ADAT, Tascam, and AES/EBU. An Option I/O card offering
four analog outputs is also available. See “About Option I/O Cards” on page 216 for
more information. 01V Option I/O cards are not interchangeable with the YGDAI
cards used by the Yamaha 02R and 03D Digital Recording Consoles, such as the
CD8-AT.
The Coaxial DIGITAL STEREO IN and OUT allow direct connection to stereo digital
recorders and other digital equipment. Digital stereo signals can be routed to the Stereo
bus for cascade operation, or to input channels 13/14 for mixing and processing. See
“Digital Stereo In” on page 213 for more information.
Easy-to-Learn GUI Interface
01V operation is both logical and intuitive. The 320 x 80 dot LCD display uses graphical
icons to represent rotary controls, switches, and faders, and provides a clear indication
of the current mix settings and EQ curves. Dedicated controls allow for quick EQ and
pan adjustments. Mixing functions and configuration settings are organized into dis-
play pages. Parameter selection and editing is performed using the [CURSOR],
[ENTER], [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons, and PARAMETER wheel.
Key Feature Discussion
7
01V—Owner’s Manual
Scene Memories
On many mixers, the only way to store mix settings is with marker pen and masking
tape. With the 01V, however, virtually every mix setting can be stored in a mix scene
using the 01V’s 99 scene memories. Mix scenes can be recalled instantly with just one
button press, or remotely using MIDI Program Change commands. If you work on sev-
eral projects at a time, you can store the current mix scene so when you return to that
project, you can start again right where you left off. Scene memories also make light
work of night-after-night sound checks. Simply press recall to return to the previous
night’s mix settings. For theater work, scene memories allow accurate and repeatable
sound changes between scenes.
MIDI
In addition to regular MIDI ports, the 01V features a TO HOST port that allows the
01V to be connected directly to a personal computer without a MIDI interface.
MIDI Program Change messages can be used to recall mix scenes, and mix parameters
can be assigned to MIDI Control Change messages for real-time remote control. Mix
parameters that can be stored in mix scenes can be controlled remotely using MIDI Sys-
tem Exclusive messages. Scene memory, library, and setup data can be transferred to a
MIDI data filer, computer, or another 01V for backup and archive using MIDI Bulk
Dump. See “MIDI” on page 221 for more information.
When REMOTE page 2 is displayed, the 01V’s [SEL] and [ON] buttons can be used to
control recorders that support MMC (MIDI Machine Control) commands (stop, play,
rewind, forward, and record). When REMOTE page 3 is displayed, faders, [SOLO] &
[ON] buttons function as assignable MIDI Controllers.
Getting Started
9
01V—Owner’s Manual
Getting Started
2
In this chapter...
01V System Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Important Wordclock Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Turning On the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Turning Off the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
10 Chapter 2—Getting Started
01V—Owner’s Manual
01V System Example
This example shows the kind of system possible with the 01V.
PHANTOM +48V
OFF ON
PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN
–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
8-TRACK DIGITAL
Digital in
OPTION I/O
Digital out
Digital multitrack
Monitors
Personal computer
running MIDI software
Drum machine
Headphones
PHONES
MONITOR OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIC/LINE inputs 1–16
Serial port
Vocals Drums
MIDI keyboard
Tone generator
Guitar processor
Bass processor
Power Amp
DAT
00.00.00.00
OUT
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
IN
Digital in
Digital out
DAT recorder
MIDI
interface
Important Wordclock Information 11
01V—Owner’s Manual
Important Wordclock Information
Unlike analog audio equipment, digital audio equipment must be wordclock synchro-
nized when digital audio is transferred from one device to another. See “About Word-
clocks” on page 206 for more information.
If the 01V is the only digital audio device in your system, no special wordclock settings
are required, and the 01V synchronizes to its own internal wordclock. Add a DAT
recorder or digital multitrack recorder, however, and the system must be configured so
that digital audio equipment synchronizes to a common wordclock source. The “Sys-
tem Examples” on page 241 show how to configure wordclock settings with a variety of
digital audio equipment.
Connecting the Power Cord
Connect the 01V power cord to a suitable AC wall outlet, one that conforms to the
power supply requirements stated on the rear panel of the 01V.
Turning On the 01V
Always turn on your audio equipment in the following order:
1. Sound sources
2. 01V
3. Monitor amplifier
To turn on the 01V, press the 01V POWER switch located on the rear panel.
When turned on, the 01V startup screen appears for a few seconds, and then the display
page selected when the 01V was last turned off appears.
Turning Off the 01V
Always turn off your audio equipment in the following order:
1. Monitor amplifier
2. 01V
3. Sound sources
To turn off the 01V, press the 01V POWER switch located on the rear panel.
All parameter settings, scene memories, and library programs are stored when the 01V
is turned off.
Warning: Turn off all equipment before making any connections.
POWER
ON/ OFF
Touring the 01V 13
01V—Owner’s Manual
Touring the 01V
3
In this chapter...
Top Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
14 Chapter 3—Touring the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
Top Panel Controls
The individual sections of the 01V are explained on the following pages.
PHANTOM +48V
OFF ON
PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN
–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
Top Panel Controls 15
01V—Owner’s Manual
Analog Control Section
APAD switches
These switches are used to turn on and off the 26 dB input pads. See “Pad Switches” on
page 41 for more information.
B15/16–2TR IN Switch
This switch is used to select the signal source for input channels 15 and 16: phone jacks
15 and 16 (15/16) or the 2TR IN phono jacks (2TR IN).
CMONITOR–2TR IN Switch
This switch is used to select the signal source for the monitor out and phones: Monitor
bus (MONITOR) or 2TR IN phono jacks (2TR IN).
DGAIN controls
These controls are used to adjust the gain of the input preamps. See “Setting Input
Channel Gain” on page 41 for more information.
EMONITOR OUT LEVEL control
This control is used to adjust the monitor out level.
FPHONES LEVEL control
This control is used to adjust the phones level.
1 2 3
4 5 6
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 –20+10 –20+10
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
16 Chapter 3—Touring the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
Display, Selected Channel Controls & Meters
ADisplay
This 320 x 80 dot LCD display provides clear indication of mix settings and operating
status. As well as showing parameter values numerically, faders and rotary controls are
represented graphically, so you can actually see pan and fader positions. The display
also shows EQ curves and signal level meters. See “Display” on page 28 for more infor-
mation.
BSELECTED CHANNEL Controls
These controls are used to adjust the pan and EQ of the selected channel. Dedicated
rotary controls for PAN, EQ frequency (F) and EQ gain (G), and EQ [HIGH],
[HI-MID], [LO-MID], and [LOW] buttons make for quick operation. When the EQ
AUTO SCREEN option is turned on, and an EQ control is adjusted, the EQ page
appears automatically. Likewise, for the PANPOT AUTO SCREEN option and PAN
control. See “Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203 for more information.
CContrast
This control is used to adjust the display contrast. Adjust it so that the display is clear
and easy-to-read from your viewing position. You may need to readjust it when viewing
the display from a different height or angle.
DStereo Output Meters
These 12-segment LED bar-type meters display the stereo output signal levels.
Parameter Wheel, Cursors & Enter
These controls are used to navigate around the display pages and edit parameters. See
“Getting Around the User Interface” on page 27 for more information.
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
1
2 3
4
PARAMETER
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
Top Panel Controls 17
01V—Owner’s Manual
Function Buttons
Function buttons are used to access the following function pages. Related pages are
grouped together and can be selected by repeatedly pressing a button. The name of the
selected function and its page number appear in the top-left corner of the display.
Fader Mode Buttons
Fader mode buttons are used to select the following fader modes and display pages.
Pressing buttons repeatedly selects the various pages that are available for a mode. The
name of the selected function and its page number appear in the top-left corner of the
display.
Button Pages
UTILITY Oscillator, Preferences-1, Preferences-2
MIDI MIDI Setup, Program Change, Control Change, Bulk, Local Control
SETUP Word Clock Select, Monitor/Solo Setup, Group, Pair, Dither
VIEW Channel View, Fader View, CH Copy
DYNAMICS Dynamics Edit, Dynamics Library
EQ/ATT EQ Edit, EQ Library
ø/DELAY Phase, Input Delay 1–8, Input Delay 9–16, Output Delay
PAN/ROUTING Panpot, Routing, Bus Master, Omni Out Select
MEMORY Memory, Fade Time, Memory Sort, Recall Safe
Button Pages
EFFECT 1 Effect1 Edit, Effect1 Library, Effect1 Pre/Post
EFFECT 2 Effect2 Edit, Effect2 Library, Effect2 Pre/Post
OPTION I/O Option In Meter, Channel Control, Option Out Meter, Option Out
Select, Input Swap
REMOTE Internal Parameter, MMC Control, User Define
AUX 1 Pre/Post, Aux 1-2 Pan
AUX 2 Pre/Post, Aux 1-2 Pan
AUX 3 Pre/Post, Aux 3-4 Pan
AUX 4 Pre/Post, Aux 3-4 Pan
HOME Input Meter, Rtn/Output Meter, Omni Out Meter, St Out Meter,
Metering Point
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
MEMORY
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
FADER MODE
18 Chapter 3—Touring the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
SEL, SOLO, ON buttons & Faders
ASEL buttons
The [SEL] buttons are used to select channels for parameter editing: input channels 1
through 24, effects returns 1 and 2, aux sends 1 through 4, effects sends 1 and 2, and the
stereo output. Press [SEL] button 13/14 or 15/16 repeatedly to select input channels 13
and 14 or 15 and 16, respectively. Since most functions on input channels 13 and 14
(likewise 15 and 16) are linked together, the only time you’ll need to select either chan-
nel 13 or channel 14 (likewise 15 or 16) is to set the Phase or Pan for a channel individ-
ually. The number of the selected channel appears in the lower-right corner of the
display. See “Display” on page 28 for more information.
Normally, [SEL] buttons 1 through 8 select channels 1 through 8. When the [OPTION
I/O] button is pressed, however, they select input channels 17 through 24, which are
only available when an Option I/O card is installed. See “SEL Buttons” on page 32 for
more information. The [SEL] buttons 1 through 6 are also used to transmit MMC
(MIDI Machine Control) Locate commands when REMOTE page 2 is displayed.
Finally, [SEL] buttons are also used to make and break channel pairs (“Pairing Input
Channels” on page 52) and fader and mute groups (“Grouping Faders” on page 55 and
“Grouping Mutes” on page 56).
BSOLO buttons
The [SOLO] buttons are used to solo channels: input channels 1 through 16 and effects
returns 1 and 2. Normally, [SOLO] buttons 1 through 8 select channels 1 through 8.
When the [OPTION I/O] button is pressed, however, they select input channels 17
through 24, which are only available when an Option I/O card is installed. See “Solo
Buttons” on page 33 for more information.
The [SOLO] buttons 1 through 16 can also be used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE
page 3. See “User Defined MIDI Controllers” on page 238 for more information.
CON buttons
The [ON] buttons are used to turn channels on and off: input channels 1 through 24,
effects returns 1 and 2, aux sends 1 through 4, effects sends 1 and 2, and the stereo out-
1
5
6
2
3
4
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO
ON ON
SEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
24
Top Panel Controls 19
01V—Owner’s Manual
put. Normally, [ON] buttons 1 through 8 select channels 1 through 8. When the
[OPTION I/O] button is pressed, however, they select input channels 17 through 24,
which are only available when an Option I/O card is installed. See “ON Buttons” on
page 34 for more information.
The [ON] buttons 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal param-
eters on REMOTE page 1, or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3. See
“Assigning Faders & On Buttons” on page 194 and “User Defined MIDI Controllers”
on page 238 for more information.
DFaders
Depending on the selected fader mode, the 01V’s 60 mm motorized faders are used to
control channel levels, aux send levels, or effects sends levels. Normally, faders 1
through 8 control channels 1 through 8. When the [OPTION I/O] button is pressed,
however, they control input channels 17 through 24, which are only available when an
Option I/O card is installed. See “Faders (plus Return Rotary Controls)” on page 35 for
more information.
Faders 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal parameters on
REMOTE page 1, or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3. See “Assigning Fad-
ers & On Buttons” on page 194 and “User Defined MIDI Controllers” on page 238 for
more information.
ERETURN Controls
The RETURN controls are used to adjust the effects return levels, and their positions
are displayed in the lower-left corner of the display.
FSOLO Status Indicator
The SOLO status indicator lights up when a channel is soloed.
20 Chapter 3—Touring the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
Inputs & Outputs
Input and output connectors are located on the top and rear panels.
Top Panel
AINPUT (BAL) 1–12
Input channels 1 through 12 feature balanced XLR-3-31-type and balanced phone jack
connectors, both with a nominal input range of –60 dB to +10 dB. Phantom powering
(+48 V) is supplied to the XLR connectors, with master on/off switches for connectors
1 through 6 and 7 through 12. Phone jacks, which can also be used with unbalanced
phone plugs, have priority over the XLR-type connectors, so when a phone plug is
inserted, the XLR-type connector is disconnected. With their high sensitivity and 26 dB
PAD switches, these inputs can handle a wide range of signals, from condenser micro-
phones to “hot” line levels.
BINPUT (BAL) 13–16
Input channels 13 through 16 feature bal-
anced phone jack connectors, with a
nominal input range of –20 dB to +10 dB.
These inputs are designed for use with
line-level sources, and can also be used
with unbalanced phone plugs. The stereo
outputs of an external effects processor or
other stereo device can be connected here.
53 4
1 2
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN OUT
13
14
15
16
OFF ON
–10dBV (UNBAL)
Male XLR plug 1 (ground)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
1/4" TRS phone plug
Tip (hot)
Ring (cold)
Sleeve (ground)
1/4" TRS phone plug
Tip (hot)
Ring (cold)
Sleeve (ground)
Inputs & Outputs 21
01V—Owner’s Manual
C2TR IN
These are phono jacks with a –10 dBV nominal input level.
Signals input here can be monitored via the monitor out and
phones when the MONITOR–2TR IN switch is set to
2TR IN. The stereo outputs of a master recorder can be con-
nected here for confidence monitoring and master playback.
By setting the 15/16–2TR IN switch to 2TR IN, 2TR IN sig-
nals can be fed to input channels 15 and 16 for mixing with
other signals.
D2TR OUT
These are phono jacks with a –10 dBV nominal output level.
The 2TR OUT signal is the same as the stereo out signal. A
cassette deck, DAT, or MiniDisc deck connected here can be
used to record the stereo mix.
EPHONES
This is a stereo (TRS) phone jack, to
which a pair of stereo headphones can be
connected for monitoring. The phones
signal is the same as the monitor out sig-
nal, and the level is set using the phones
level control.
Phono plug Tip
Sleeve
Phono plug Tip
Sleeve
1/4" TRS phone plug
Tip (left)
Ring (right)
Sleeve (ground)
22 Chapter 3—Touring the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
Rear Panel
AMONITOR OUT
These are balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks
with a +4 dB nominal output level. Bal-
anced or unbalanced phone plugs can be
connected. They output the monitor sig-
nals and should be connected to the inputs
on a monitor amplifier. The monitor signal
source is set using the MONITOR–2TR IN
switch and SETUP page 2, and the output
level is set using the MONITOR LEVEL
control.
BPHANTOM +48V ON–OFF Switches
The CH 1–6 and CH 7–12 PHANTOM +48V ON–OFF switches are used to turn on
and off the +48 V phantom power for XLR inputs 1 through 6 and 7 through 12,
respectively.
COMNI OUTs
These are balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks
with a +4 dB nominal output level. Bal-
anced or unbalanced phone plugs can be
connected. These outputs can be config-
ured individually as analog bus outs, aux
sends, stereo outs, or direct outs for input
channels 1 through 16. Bus outputs are typ-
ically connected to multitrack recorders,
while aux sends are typically used to feed
external effects processors, foldback ampli-
fiers, and so on.
OPTION I/O
TO HOSTMIDIDIGITAL STEREO
STEREO OUT
PHANTOM +48V
OMNI OUT
POWER
MONITOR OUT
CH 7-12
+4dB (BAL)
RL THRU OUT IN
COAXIAL
OUT IN
+4dB (BAL)+4dB (BAL)
34LR21
ON
CH 1-6
ON/ OFF
OFF ON OFF
1 2 3 4 2 65 7 8
9 J
1/4" TRS phone plug
Tip (hot)
Ring (cold)
Sleeve (ground)
1/4" TRS phone plug
Tip (hot)
Ring (cold)
Sleeve (ground)
Inputs & Outputs 23
01V—Owner’s Manual
DSTEREO OUT
These are balanced XLR-3-32-type
connectors with a +4 dB nominal
output level. They are wired pin
1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin
3–cold (–). They output the main ste-
reo mix.
If you need to connect the balanced ST OUT to an unbalanced phone jack input, use a
cable with the following wiring scheme (i.e., XLR pins 3 and 1 linked).
EDIGITAL STEREO OUT
This phono jack outputs the main stereo mix as Coaxial format 24-bit digital audio,
allowing digital transfer to a DAT, MiniDisc deck, or other digital recorder.
FDIGITAL STEREO IN
This phono jack accepts 24-bit Coaxial format digital audio. Signals input here can be
fed directly to the Stereo bus for stereo cascade operation (i.e., two mixers working
together), or to input channels 13 and 14.
GMIDI IN, OUT, THRU
These are standard MIDI IN, OUT, and THRU ports and are used to connect the 01V
to other MIDI equipment for remote control and data backup. The MIDI IN port
receives MIDI messages, while the MIDI OUT port transmits them. The MIDI THRU
port transmits all MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port.
HTO HOST
This 8-pin mini DIN port is used to connect the 01V to a personal computer for use
with MIDI software. It eliminates the need for a computer MIDI interface, and together
with the MIDI ports allows the 01V to be used as a MIDI interface for other MIDI
equipment.
IPOWER switch
This switch is used to turn on and off the 01V. It’s recessed to prevent accidental oper-
ation.
JOPTION I/O slot
An Option I/O card can be installed here, providing access to the 01V’s eight digital
inputs and outputs. See “About Option I/O Cards” on page 216.
Female XLR plug
1 (ground)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
Female XLR plug
1 (ground)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
1/4" phone plug
Tip (hot)
Sleeve (ground)
24 Chapter 3—Touring the 01V
01V—Owner’s Manual
Block Diagram
to
MONITOR
LR
MONI
STEREO OUT
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
1-4
1-4
AUX
BUS
Meter
Same as INPUT 14
Same as INPUT 13
16
15 AD
HA
GAIN
AD
HA
INPUT
(BAL) ON
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
1-4
TO ST
2TR OUT
Meter BUS
master fader
AUX
master fader
Meter
ON
1-4
to SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
INPUT
(BAL)
1-12
14
13
7-12
1-6,
to
(BAL)
INPUT
to SELECT
OUTPUT
PAN*
*PAN: INDIVIDUAL/GANG/INV. GANG
ATT
ATT
Meter
Meter
ST CASCADE IN
ON/OFF
FLIP
ON
ON
ON
ON
CH Fader
CH Fader
AUX1
AUX1
EFF1
EFF2
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
EFF1
EFF2
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
BALANCE
to INTERNAL
EFFECT 1, 2
+48V
DIGITAL
STEREO
IN DIGITAL
STEREO
IN
L
R
R
L
Dither
RL
ST
DA
Dynamics Delay
Dynamics
Dynamics
Delay
DA
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
Meter
PAN
from 2TR IN
EFF
De-emphasis
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
HA AD
GAIN
HA AD
AUX
121234
BUS
Dynamics
PEQ
4-Band Delay
Dynamics Delay
Dynamics Delay
AD
26dB
Pad
PHANTOM 4321
PAN
HA
GAIN
OUT
STEREO
15/16
2TR IN ATT
Meter
Meter
to MONI
to MONI
Effect send 1/2
master fader
from
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
DIGITAL
STEREO
OUT
Block Diagram 25
01V—Owner’s Manual
from
MONI
from OMNI
1-4 OUT
DA
Delay
BUS 1
BUS 4
AUX 1
AUX 4
CH 1
CH 2
CH 15
STEREO L
STEREO R
CH 16
from
BUS 1
BUS 4
AUX 1
AUX 4
CH 1
CH 2
CH 15
STEREO L
STEREO R
CH 16
OMNI OUT
Select
MONITOR
LEVEL
LEVEL
OSC
Meter
PAN*
*PAN: INDIVIDUAL/GANG/INV. GANG
MONI
TRIM MONO
Same as Effect 1
Waveform
ON
ON
EFF RTN
Rotary
CH Fader
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
EFF2
EFF1
AUX2
EFF1
EFF2
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
to INPUT 15, 16
2TR IN
R
L
DA
DA
LEVEL
from EFF2
from EFF1
Internal
Effect 1
Internal
Effect 2
Meter
Meter 4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
PHONES
R
L
RL
STEFFAUX
121234
BUS
4321
10kHz
1kHz
100Hz
BURST
PINK
Option I/O
OUT
Option I/O
IN Option
I/O
Dither
Meter
Meter
Meter
Option I/O
Output
Select
Meter
1-8
PAN
2-Band
PEQ
ATT
De-emphasis
or DC Cut
17-24
1-8 Unchanged
Meter
ON
Meter
SWAP
INPUT
(BAL) Unchanged
This section is available only when
an optional Option I/O card is installed.
Getting Around the User Interface 27
01V—Owner’s Manual
Getting Around the User Interface
4
In this chapter...
About the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cursor Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PARAMETER Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
–1/DEC & +1/INC Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ENTER Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Title Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
28 Chapter 4—Getting Around the User Interface
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the User Interface
Thanks to a user-friendly interface, 01V operation is both logical and intuitive. The 320
x 80 dot LCD display provides clear indication of mix settings and operating status,
while dedicated SELECTED CHANNEL controls allow for quick EQ and pan adjust-
ments. Operation of the multifunction faders depends on the selected Fader mode.
Mixing functions and configuration settings are organized into display pages, with up
to five related pages being grouped together. For example, the MIDI Setup and Program
Change pages are grouped together under MIDI. Parameter selection and editing is car-
ried out using the [CURSOR], [ENTER], [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons, and
PARAMETER wheel, which is detented for precise and accurate editing.
Display
The 320 x 80 dot LCD display provides clear indication of mix settings and operating
status. As well as showing parameter values numerically, faders and rotary controls are
represented graphically, so you can actually see pan and fader positions. The display
also shows EQ curves and signal level meters. The various sections of the display are
explained below.
Function—This area of the display shows the name of the function
selected using the Function and Fader mode buttons. Functions are
divided into pages, which are identified by numbered tabs, as shown
here. In this example, page 1 of the VIEW function is selected. The fol-
lowing functions can be selected.
Function Buttons Fader Mode Buttons
UTILITY EFFECT 1
MIDI EFFECT 2
SETUP OPTION I/O
VIEW REMOTE
DYNAMICS AUX 1
EQ/ATT AUX 2
ø/DELAY AUX 3
PAN/ROUTING AUX 4
MEMORY HOME
Function
Selected channel
Memory
Effects
Returns
Page area
Display 29
01V—Owner’s Manual
Memory—This area of the display shows the number and title of the
selected scene memory, whether that scene memory is read only or write
protected (indicated by the closed padlock icon), and whether or not the
contents of the Edit Buffer have been edited. See “Scene Memory Dis-
play Area” on page 185 for more information. Also in the Memory area
are the MIDI and HOST indicators, which appear when MIDI data is
received at the MIDI IN or TO HOST port, respectively. See “MIDI
Receive Indicators” on page 224 for more information.
Effects Returns—This area of the display shows two control icons,
which indicate the positions of the RETURN level controls, and the type
of effects selected for the two onboard effects processors: Effect 1 and
Effect 2. When the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 Fader mode is selected, the
corresponding control icon is highlighted.
Selected channel—This area of the display shows three control icons:
Pan, EQ frequency (F), and EQ gain (G), which indicate the pan, EQ fre-
quency, and EQ gain of the selected channel. Below these is the selected
channel indicator, showing which channel is currently selected. The fol-
lowing channels can be selected.
•CH1 through CH24—Input channels 1 through 24
•ST—Stereo output
•RTN1, RTN2—Effects returns 1 and 2
•AUX1 through AUX4—Aux sends 1 through 4
•EFF1, EFF2—Effects sends 1 and 2
•1–16, MAS—Remote function channels
When channels 13 through 16, the effects return channels, or paired input
channels from 1 through 12 are selected, dotted lines appear to the right
of these control icons when an odd or left channel is selected. Similarly,
dotted lines appear to the left, as shown here, when an even or right chan-
nel is selected.
Page area—This area of the display is where the various setup, utility, and mixing
function pages appear. As well as showing parameter values numerically, faders and
rotary controls are represented graphically, so you can actually see pan and fader posi-
tions. See “Display Elements” on page 30 for more information. An example page is
shown below.
30 Chapter 4—Getting Around the User Interface
01V—Owner’s Manual
Display Elements
This section explains the various control elements that appear on display pages.
Switches
Switches appear as boxes with a shadowed outline (i.e., a thicker out-
line on the right side and bottom).
Simple on/off-type switches are highlighted when they are turned
on. In this example, the [ST] switch is on.
The labels inside some switches change when they turned on and
off, as these phase switches show.
For option-type switches, only one switch can be on at a time. In this
example, the monitor source can be set to either stereo out or ST
CASCADE IN, but not both.
To operate a switch, use the cursor buttons to select it, and the [ENTER] button or
[–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to turn it on or off.
Rotary Controls
Some parameters appear as rotary controls, as this example from
the PANPOT page shows. To adjust a rotary control, use the cursor
buttons to select it and use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC]
and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust it.
Parameter Boxes
Some parameters appear in parameter boxes
(i.e., dotted-line boxes), as this example from
the EFFECT1 EDIT page shows. To adjust a
parameter box parameter, use the cursor but-
tons to select it, and the PARAMETER wheel or
[–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set it.
Parameter boxes that require you to confirm
new settings flash until you press the [ENTER]
button.
Faders
Pages such as VIEW and BUS MASTER display faders graphi-
cally. To adjust a fader, use the cursor buttons to select it, and the
PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set
it. Fader knobs appear highlighted when set to the nominal posi-
tion.
Nominal
Cursor Buttons 31
01V—Owner’s Manual
Cursor Buttons
The cursor buttons are used to move the cursor
around the display pages, selecting parameters and
options. The cursor appears as a flashing box, making
it easy to see which parameter or option is currently
selected. Holding down a cursor button moves the
cursor continuously in the respective direction.
PARAMETER Wheel
The PARAMETER wheel is used to adjust parameter values, scroll
through scene memory and library programs, and position the
cursor when titling scene memories, effects programs, and so on.
Its detented action gives it a positive feel, allowing quick and accu-
rate parameter editing. Turning it clockwise increases parameter
values; turning it counterclockwise decreases them.
–1/DEC & +1/INC Buttons
Like the PARAMETER wheel, the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC]
buttons are used to adjust parameter values, scroll through
scene memory and library programs, and position the cur-
sor when titling scene memories, effects programs, and so
on. The [–1/DEC] button is used to decrement values, while the [+1/INC] button is
used to increment them. Holding down the [–1/DEC] or [+1/INC] button sweeps
through a parameter’s adjustable range. When titling memories or programs, the
[–1/DEC] button is used to toggle between uppercase, lowercase, and numerals, while
the [+1/INC] button is used to insert spaces.
ENTER Button
The [ENTER] button is used to activate parameter settings selected using
the [CURSOR] buttons, and set on/off-type parameters, such as EQ
ON/OFF. It’s also used to confirm settings and enter characters when titling
scene memories, effects programs, and so on. On the EQ page, the [ENTER] button is
used solely to turn the EQ on and off.
CURSOR
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
–1/DEC +1/INC
ENTER
32 Chapter 4—Getting Around the User Interface
01V—Owner’s Manual
Fader Modes
The 01V [SEL], [SOLO], and [ON] buttons, channel faders, and STEREO (MASTER)
fader are multifunction controls, and their exact operation depends on the selected
Fader mode. Operation of these controls is shown in the following tables.
SEL Buttons
The [SEL] buttons are used to select channels for EQ, Pan, Dynamics, and Routing
operations. The following channels can be selected:
•CH1 through CH24—Input channels 1 through 24
•ST—Stereo output
•RTN1, RTN2—Effects returns 1 and 2
•AUX1 through AUX4—Aux sends 1 through 4
•EFF1, EFF2—Effects sends 1 and 2
•1–16, MAS—Remote function channels
The [SEL] buttons are also used to make and release channel pairs and fader and mute
groups (“Grouping Faders” on page 55 and “Grouping Mutes” on page 56).
Input Channel [SEL] button Examples
To select the EQ function for input channel 3, press the [HOME] button, and then press
[SEL] button 3 (CH3 appears in the bottom right corner of the display). Use the
SELECTED CHANNEL F and G controls to adjust the EQ. (If a fader mode other than
Option I/O or Remote is selected, it’s not necessary to press the [HOME] button.)
To select the Pan function for input channel 13, press the [HOME] button, and then
press [SEL] button 13/14 repeatedly until CH13 appears on the display. Use the
SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control to adjust the pan. Since most functions on input
channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are linked, the only time you’ll need to select
these channels individually is to set the Phase or Pan. (If a fader mode other than
Fader Mode
SEL button
1–8
[17–24]
9–12 13/14
15/16
STEREO
[MASTER]
RETURN 1/2
HOME
CH 1–16 select
STEREO OUT
select
RETURN 1/2
select
AUX 1 AUX 1
master select
AUX 2 AUX 2
master select
AUX 3 AUX 3
master select
AUX 4 AUX 4
master select
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 1
master select
EFFECT 2 EFFECT 2
master select
OPTION I/O CH 17–24
select ——STEREO select
REMOTE 1 Internal parameter assign select —
REMOTE 2 MMC (1–6) —
REMOTE 3 User defined MIDI controller select —
Fader Modes 33
01V—Owner’s Manual
Option I/O or Remote is selected, it’s not necessary to press the [HOME] button.)
To select the EQ function for input channel 20, press the [OPTION I/O] button, and
then press [SEL] button 20 (CH20 appears on the display). Use the F and G controls to
adjust the EQ.
Master [SEL] Button Examples
To select the stereo output, press the [HOME] button, and then press the MASTER
[SEL] button (ST appears in the bottom right corner of the display).
To select the AUX 1 master, press the [AUX 1] button, and then press the MASTER
[SEL] button (AUX1 appears on the display).
To select the EFFECT 1 master, press the [EFFECT 1] button, and then press the MAS-
TER [SEL] button (EFF1 appears on the display).
Solo Buttons
The [SOLO] buttons are used to solo channels for monitoring. See “Solo Setup” on
page 80 for more information. The following channels can be soloed:
•CH1 through CH24—Input channels 1 through 24
•RTN1, RTN2—Effects returns 1 and 2
The [SOLO] buttons 1 through 16 can be used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page
3. See “User Defined MIDI Controllers” on page 238 for more information.
Usage Examples
To solo input channel 3, press the [HOME] button, and then press [SOLO] button 3.
(If a fader mode other than Option I/O or Remote is selected, it’s not necessary to press
the [HOME] button.)
To solo input channels 13/14, press the [HOME] button, and then press [SOLO] button
13/14. (If a fader mode other than Option I/O or Remote is selected, it’s not necessary
to press the [HOME] button.)
To solo input channel 20, press the [OPTION I/O] button, and then press [SOLO] but-
ton 20.
Fader Mode
SOLO button
1–8
[17–24]
9–12 13/14
15/16
RETURN 1/2
HOME
CH 1–16 solo RETURN 1/2
solo
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
OPTION I/O CH 17–24
solo ———
REMOTE 1 —
REMOTE 2 —
REMOTE 3 User defined MIDI controller —
34 Chapter 4—Getting Around the User Interface
01V—Owner’s Manual
ON Buttons
The [ON] buttons are used to turn channels on or off. They work with the following
channels:
•CH1 through CH24—Input channels 1 through 24
•ST—Stereo output
•RTN1, RTN2—Effects returns 1 and 2
•AUX1 through AUX4—Aux sends 1 through 4
•EFF1, EFF2—Effects sends 1 and 2
The bus outs can be turned on or off on PAN/ROUT page 4.
On buttons 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal parameters on
REMOTE page 1, or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3. See “Assigning Fad-
ers & On Buttons” on page 194 and “User Defined MIDI Controllers” on page 238 for
more information.
Input Channel [ON] button Examples
To turn on or off input channel 3, press the [HOME] button, and then press [ON] but-
ton 3. (If a fader mode other than Option I/O or Remote is selected, it’s not necessary
to press the [HOME] button.)
To turn on or off input channels 13/14, press the [HOME] button, and then press [ON]
button 13/14. (If a fader mode other than Option I/O or Remote is selected, it’s not nec-
essary to press the [HOME] button.)
To turn on or off input channel 20, press the [OPTION I/O] button, and then press
[ON] button 20.
Master [ON] Button Examples
To turn on or off the stereo output, press the [HOME] button, and then use the MAS-
TER [ON] button.
To turn on or off the AUX 1 send master, press the [AUX 1] button, and then use the
Fader Mode
ON button
1–8
[17–24]
9–12 13/14
15/16
STEREO
[MASTER]
RETURN 1/2
HOME
CH 1–16 On/Off
STEREO OUT
On/Off
RETURN 1/2
On/Off
AUX 1 AUX 1
master On/Off
AUX 2 AUX 2
master On/Off
AUX 3 AUX 3
master On/Off
AUX 4 AUX 4
master On/Off
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 1
master On/Off
EFFECT 2 EFFECT 2
master On/Off
OPTION I/O CH 17–24
On/Off ——
STEREO OUT
On/Off
REMOTE 1 Assigned internal parameters —
REMOTE 2 MMC (1–6) —
REMOTE 3 User defined MIDI controllers —
Fader Modes 35
01V—Owner’s Manual
MASTER [ON] button.
To turn on or off the EFFECT 1 send master, press the [EFFECT 1] button, and then
use the MASTER [ON] button.
Faders (plus Return Rotary Controls)
The faders are used to adjust channel levels.
Faders 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal parameters on
REMOTE page 1, or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3. See “Assigning Fad-
ers & On Buttons” on page 194 and “User Defined MIDI Controllers” on page 238 for
more information.
Input Channel Level Examples
To adjust the level of input channel 3, press the [HOME] button, and then operate fader
3.
To adjust the level of input channel 13/14, press the [HOME] button, and then operate
fader 13/14.
To adjust the level of input channel 20, press the [OPTION I/O] button, and then oper-
ate fader 20.
Input Channel Aux Send Examples
To adjust the aux 1 send level of input channel 3, press the [AUX 1] button, and then
operate fader 3.
To adjust the aux 1 send level of input channel 13/14, press the [AUX 1] button, and
then operate fader 13/14.
1. Effects return 1 cannot be fed to effect send 1
2. Effects return 2 cannot be fed to effect send 2
Fader Mode
Fader Rotary Control
1–8
[17–24]
9–12 13/14
15/16
STEREO
[MASTER]
RETURN 1/2
HOME CH 1–16 level STEREO
master level RETURN 1/2 levels
AUX 1 CH 1–16 AUX 1 send level AUX 1
master level
RETURN 1/2 AUX
1 send levels
AUX 2 CH 1–16 AUX 2 send level AUX 2
master level
RETURN 1/2 AUX
2 send levels
AUX 3 CH 1–16 AUX 3 send level AUX 3
master level
RETURN 1/2 AUX
3 send levels
AUX 4 CH 1–16 AUX 4 send level AUX 4
master level
RETURN 1/2 AUX
4 send levels
EFFECT 1 CH 1–16 EFFECT 1 send level EFFECT 1
master level
RETURN 1 level
1RETURN 2 EFFECT
1 send level
EFFECT 2 CH 1–16 EFFECT 2 send level EFFECT 2
master level
2RETURN 1 EFFECT
2 send level
RETURN 2 level
OPTION I/O CH 17–24
level ——
STEREO
master level RETURN 1/2 levels
REMOTE 1 Assigned internal parameters —
REMOTE 2 —
REMOTE 3 User defined MIDI controllers —
36 Chapter 4—Getting Around the User Interface
01V—Owner’s Manual
To adjust the aux 1 send level of input channel 20, use the [OPTION I/O] button to
locate OPTION page 2, press [SEL] button 20, use the cursor buttons to select the
AUX 1 fader, and then adjust it using the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and
[+1/INC] buttons.
Input Channel Effects Send Examples
To adjust the Effect 1 send level of input channel 3, press the [EFFECT 1] button, and
then operate fader 3.
To adjust the Effect 1 send level of input channel 13/14, press the [EFFECT 1] button,
and then operate fader 13/14.
To adjust the Effect 1 send level of input channel 20, use the [OPTION I/O] button to
locate OPTION page 2, press [SEL] button 20, use the cursor buttons to select the
EFFECT 1 fader, and then adjust it using the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and
[+1/INC] buttons.
Master Level Examples
To adjust the level of stereo out, press the [HOME] button, and then operate the MAS-
TER fader.
To adjust the AUX 1 master send level, press the [AUX 1] button, and then operate the
MASTER fader.
To adjust the EFFECT 1 master send level, press the [EFFECT 1] button, and then
operate the MASTER fader.
To adjust the BUS OUT 1 master send level, use the [PAN/ROUT] button to locate
PAN/ROUT page 3, use the cursor buttons to select the BUS 1 fader, and then adjust it
using the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons.
Note: Aux send levels for input channels 17 through 24 can only be set using the virtual
faders on OPTION page 2.
Note: Effects send levels for input channels 17 through 24 can only be set using the
virtual faders on OPTION page 2.
Note: Bus out master levels can only be set using the virtual faders on PAN/ROUT
page 3.
Title Edit Dialog Box 37
01V—Owner’s Manual
Title Edit Dialog Box
The Title Edit dialog box is used to title mix scenes, EQ programs, dynamics programs,
and effects programs. Program titles can be up to 12 characters, scene memory titles up
to 8 characters.
1. Use the cursor buttons to position the cursor in the title window.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel to select characters.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the following switches, and press the
[ENTER] button to execute their functions.
INS—Insert a space at the cursor position and moves subsequent characters to the
right. Characters moved beyond the right edge of the title window are lost.
DEL—Delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to
the left.
4. Use the [+1/INC] button to enter a space at the cursor position.
5. Use the [–1/DEC] button to toggle the character at the cursor position
between uppercase, lowercase, and numerals.
6. Press the [ENTER] button to store.
Input Channels 39
01V—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels
5
In this chapter...
Input Channel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Phantom Powering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Pad Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setting Input Channel Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Metering Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Changing the Input Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Attenuating Input Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Applying EQ to Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Input Channels Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Delaying Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Muting Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting Input Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Panning Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Routing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Monitoring Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Input Channels & Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Input Channels & the Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Input Channels & the Option I/O Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Swapping Inputs 1–8 & 17–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Grouping Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Grouping Mutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Viewing Input Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copying & Swapping Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Input Channel Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
40 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Input Channel Overview
This section provides an overview of 01V input channels.
Input Channels 1–12
Input channels 1 through 12 feature balanced
XLR-3-31-type and balanced phone jack connectors, both
with a nominal input range of –60 dB to +10 dB. Phantom
powering (+48 V) is supplied to the XLR connectors, with
master on/off switches for connectors 1 through 6 and 7
through 12. Phone jacks, which can also be used with
unbalanced phone plugs, have priority over the XLR-type
connectors, so when a phone plug is inserted, the XLR-type
connector is disconnected. Inputs 1 through 8 can be
swapped with inputs 17 through 24. See “Swapping Inputs
1–8 & 17–24” on page 51 for more information.
Input Channels 13–16
Apart from being stereo, input channels 13/14 and 15/16
offer the same features as input channels 1 through 12. Nor-
mally, the input signals for input channels 13 and 14 are
derived from phone jack inputs 13 and 14. By using the
CH13-14 FLIP function on PAN/ROUT page 4, however,
the DIGITAL STEREO IN signals can be fed to input chan-
nels 13 and 14. See “Digital Stereo In” on page 213 for more
information. Similarly, the input signals for input channels
15 and 16 are normally derived from phone jack inputs 15
and 16. By using the 15/16–2TR IN switch, however, the
2TR IN signals can be fed to input channels 15 and 16. See
“Two-track Input (2TR IN)” on page 77 for more informa-
tion.
Input Channels 17–24
Input channels 17 through 24 do not have analog input
connectors, a pad switch, gain control, or direct out. They
are somewhat simpler than input channels 1 through 16 in
that they feature only an attenuator, two-band parametric
EQ, and can be assigned to aux sends 1 and 2, but not aux
sends 3 and 4. Input channels 17 through 24 are accessed
through the digital inputs of the Option I/O slot. See “About
Option I/O Cards” on page 216 for more information.
Inputs 17 through 24 can be swapped with inputs 1 through
8. See “Swapping Inputs 1–8 & 17–24” on page 51 for more
information.
1
3
2XLR INPUT
(balanced)
Phone jack INPUT
(balanced)
Phone jacks INPUT
(balanced)
13
14
15
16
OPTION I/O
Phantom Powering 41
01V—Owner’s Manual
Phantom Powering
Input channels 1 through 12 feature +48 V phantom powering for use with
condenser-type microphones. Phantom powering is supplied to the bal-
anced XLR-3-31-type connector, and can be switched for inputs 1 through 6
and inputs 7 through 12. Phantom powering should be turned on only when
a condenser-type microphone is connected.
Pad Switches
Input channels 1 through 12 feature 26 dB pad switches. Input pads attenu-
ate the input signal by 26 dB, allowing the input preamp to work with
high-level signals. You may need to use a pad with “hot” signals from bass or
snare drum microphones, or “hot” line-level signals. PAD switch settings are
not stored in scene memories.
Setting Input Channel Gain
GAIN controls adjust the gain of the input channel preamps. They’re used to optimize
the input signal level for the best signal-to-noise performance, and should be set in con-
junction with the level meters on the HOME pages. Ideally, the GAIN control should
be set so that the signal level is relatively high, and it’s okay for it to reach CLIP occa-
sionally. If CLIP is reached often, however, back off the GAIN control a little, otherwise,
signal distortion may occur. The GAIN control should be set with care. If it’s set too low,
the signal-to-noise performance will suffer. If it’s set too high, unpleasant signal clip-
ping and distortion may occur.
The GAIN controls on input channels 1 through 12 are designed for use
with microphone signals, and have an input sensitivity of –16 dB to
–60 dB. Used in conjunction with the 26 dB PAD switches, however,
these channels can also be used with line-level signals and “hot” micro-
phone signals. With the pad switch on, input sensitivity is +10 to –34 dB.
A detented action allows for accurate repeat setting.
The GAIN controls on input channels 13 through 16 are designed for use
with line-level signals, and have a gain range of –10 dB to 20 dB.
GAIN control settings are not stored in scene memories.
Metering Input Channels
Signal levels can be metered on the HOME pages. See “Metering Signal Levels” on page
83 for more information.
Warning: Make sure that phantom powering is turned off when connecting an unbal-
anced source to an XLR input.
CH 7-12
ON OFF
CH 1-6
ON OFF
26dB
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
GAIN –20+10
42 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Changing the Input Phase
The Phase switches, available on input channels 1 through 16, reverse the phase of input
signals by 180 degrees. This can be used to compensate for incorrectly wired balanced
cables and microphones. Also, when a snare drum is miked top and bottom, the chan-
nel connected to the bottom microphone can be phase reversed to prevent signal can-
cellation.
1. Use the [∅/DELAY] button to locate DELAY page 1, as shown below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 to select channels.
Phase switches can also be selected using the cursor buttons.
3. Use the [ENTER] button, or the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set the
phase of the selected channel to normal or reversed.
Normal phase
Reversed phase
The Phase switches on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are not linked, and
can be set independently. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input
Channels” on page 52), their Phase switches continue to work independently.
Input channels 17 through 24 do not have Phase switches.
Attenuating Input Channel Signals 43
01V—Owner’s Manual
Attenuating Input Channel Signals
Input channels 1 through 24 are fitted with digital attenuators, which can be used to
attenuate input signals from 0 dB to –96 dB in 1 dB steps.
For Input Channels 1–16
1. Use the [EQ/ATT] button to locate EQ page 1, as shown below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the ATT control, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust it.
The Attenuation functions on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are per-
manently linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Chan-
nels” on page 52), their attenuators are linked, so adjustments can be made with either
channel selected.
The Attenuation function can be used to compensate for signal level increases caused
by EQ boosting or dynamics processing. Although such signals can be reduced using
the GAIN controls, doing so would adversely affect the performance of the A/D con-
verters, which need a reasonable signal level in order to maximize signal-to-noise per-
formance. Since the digital attenuators are located after A/D conversion, they can be
used to attenuate signals without affecting performance.
For Input Channels 17–24
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 2.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the ATT control, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to adjust it.
44 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Applying EQ to Input Channels
Input channels 1 through 16 feature four-band parametric EQ, while input channels 17
through 24 feature two-band parametric EQ. See “EQ” on page 61 for more informa-
tion. EQ can be turned on or off and the EQ curve viewed on the EQ page and VIEW
page. See “Viewing Input Channel Settings” on page 57 for more information.
Input Channels Dynamics Processors
Input channels 1 through 16 feature a dynamics processor. See “Dynamics Processors”
on page 161 for more information. The dynamics can be turned on or off and the
dynamics curve viewed on the Dynamics page and VIEW page. See “Viewing Input
Channel Settings” on page 57 for more information.
Delaying Channel Signals 45
01V—Owner’s Manual
Delaying Channel Signals
The Channel Delays, available on input channels 1 through 16, can be used to compen-
sate for microphone placement, or simply as delay effects. The delay parameters for
input channels 1 through 8 are on DELAY page 2, while those for input channels 9
though 16 are on DELAY page 3. Both pages are shown below.
1. Use the [∅/DELAY] button to locate DELAY page 2 or 3, as shown below.
2. Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the delay parameters and the [ENTER]
button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set
them.
The Channel Delays on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are permanently
linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Channels” on
page 52), their Channel Delays are linked, so adjustments can be made with either
channel selected.
Parameter Range Description
ON/OFF ON/OFF These switches are used to turn on and off the delays.
DELAY 0–250 ms
Delay can be specified in milliseconds, meters, or samples
(“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203). The maximum
delay in samples is fixed at 11025. The maximum delay in
milliseconds and meters depends on the sampling rate. At
44.1 kHz, for example, it is 250 milliseconds and 85.2
meters, respectively.
MIX –100 to +100
This parameter determines the level of delayed signal. 0 is
no delay. +50 is a 50/50 mix of delayed and dry signals.
+100 is all delay, no dry. Negative values are the same
except the delayed signal is phase reversed.
FB. GAIN –99 to +99
This parameter determines how much of the delayed sig-
nal is fed back into the delay. 0 is no feedback. +99 is
maximum feedback. Negative values are the same except
the feedback signal is phase reversed.
46 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Muting Input Channels
Input channels can be turned on and off (i.e., muted) using the [ON] buttons.
When a channel is on, its [ON] button lights up.
To turn on or off an input channel from 1 through 16, select a fader mode
other than Option I/O or Remote, and then press an [ON] button from 1
through 16.
To turn on or off an input channel from 17 through 24, press the [OPTION
I/O] button, and then press an [ON] button from 17 through 24.
The [ON] buttons on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are per-
manently linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing
Input Channels” on page 52), their [ON] buttons are linked.
ON buttons can be grouped together for multi-channel muting using a single
[ON] button. See “Grouping Mutes” on page 56 for more information.
Setting Input Channel Levels
Input channel levels are controlled using the motorized 60 mm faders.
To adjust the level of an input channel from 1 through 16, press the [HOME]
button, and then operate a fader from 1 through 16.
To adjust the level of an input channel from 17 through 24, press the
[OPTION I/O] button, and then operate a fader from 17 through 24.
Faders operation depends on the selected Fader mode. See “Faders (plus
Return Rotary Controls)” on page 35 for more information. The selected
fader mode is shown on the display. See “Display” on page 28 for more infor-
mation.
The faders on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are permanently
linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Chan-
nels” on page 52), their faders are linked.
Faders can be grouped together for multi-channel control using a single
fader. See “Grouping Faders” on page 55 for more information.
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
Panning Input Channels 47
01V—Owner’s Manual
Panning Input Channels
The Panpots, available on input channels 1 through 24 (and the effects returns), are
used to pan signals between the left and right channels of the stereo out, and the odd
and even bus outs. Panpots can be adjusted using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN
control, the quickest method, or the panpot pages in conjunction with the cursor but-
tons, [–/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons, and PARAMETER wheel.
For Input Channels 1–16 & the Effects Returns
1. Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
To select input channel 13 or 14 (likewise 15 or 16), press [SEL] button 13/14 (15/16)
repeatedly. The number of the currently selected channel appears on the display. To
select the left or right channel of effects return 1 (likewise effects return 2), press [SEL]
button RETURN 1 (RETURN 2) repeatedly. As these channels are selected, the letter
“R” or “L” appears on the display next to the panpot icon.
2. Use the PAN control to pan the selected channel.
If the PANPOT AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting 01V
Preferences” on page 203), the PAN/ROUT page shown below appears, and the Home
fader mode is selected. This page can also be located using the [PAN/ROUTING] but-
ton.
Panpots can be adjusted on this page by using the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC]
and [+1/INC] buttons. In addition to the [SEL] buttons, panpots on the PAN/ROUT
page can be selected using the cursor buttons.
For Input Channels 17–24
1. Press the [OPTION I/O] button.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Use the PAN control to pan the selected channel.
If the PANPOT AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting 01V
Preferences” on page 203), the OPTION page shown below appears. This page can also
EQ HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
For quick panning, select
a channel and use the
PAN control.
48 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
be located using the [OPTION I/O] button.
Panpots can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select the PAN
control and the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set it.
Including center, there are 33 pan positions.
Input channels 1 through 12 and 17 through 24 feature a single panpot, as
shown here.
Input channels 13/14 and 15/16 (and the effects returns) feature dual pan-
pots, with the inner panpots being odd-numbered channel pans 13 and 15
(effects returns left), and the outer panpots being even-numbered channel
pans 14 and 16 (effects returns right). When working with stereo signals,
these dual panpots can be used to adjust the width of stereo signals, as
shown below.
With the inner control set at L16 and the outer control set at R16, as shown
here, the width of a stereo signal is 100%.
With both controls set at CENTER, as shown here, the width of the stereo
signal is zero (i.e., mono).
Setting the controls to positions in between these two extremes allows you
to set the width of the stereo signal. To maintain a central balance, however,
you must set both controls to corresponding values. For example, L8 and
R8, or L10 and R10.
Pan Modes
The three Pan modes, INDIVIDUAL, GANG, and INV. GANG, determine how the
panpots operate on input channels 13/14, 15/16 (and the effects returns), and paired
input channels 1 through 12. Since input channels 17 through 24 cannot be paired, they
are not affected by the Pan modes.
1. Use the cursor buttons to select the MODE parameter, and the PARAM-
ETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a mode.
INDIVIDUAL—In this mode, panpots function independently.
GANG—In this mode, panpots are ganged (i.e., linked) together.
INV. GANG—In this mode, panpots are ganged together but operation is
inverted (i.e., panpots move in opposite directions).
L16←···←L3←L2←L1←CENTER→R1→R2→R3→···→R16
Hard left Center Hard right
Routing Input Channels 49
01V—Owner’s Manual
Routing Input Channels
The Routing switches, available on input channels 1 through 24 (and the effects
returns), are used to route signals to the four bus outs, stereo out, and direct outs.
For Input Channels 1–16 & the Effects Returns
1. Use the [PAN/ROUTING] button to locate PAN/ROUT page 2, as shown
below.
2. Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the Routing switches and the [ENTER]
button to set them.
For Input Channels 17–24
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 2, as shown below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the Routing switches and the [ENTER]
button to set them.
A highlighted Routing switch indicates that a channel has been routed.
Input channels 1 through 12 have four bus out routing switches (1, 2, 3, 4), a
stereo out routing switch (ST), and a direct out routing switch (D). The latter
switch is turned on automatically when an input channel is selected as the
source for an Option I/O out on OPTION page 4. Likewise, when an input
channel is selected as the source for an Option I/O out on OPTION page 4, the
corresponding D switch on the PAN/ROUT page is turned on. See “Assigning
Option I/O Digital Outputs” on page 219 for more information.
Input channels 13 through 24 (and the effects returns) have four bus out rout-
ing switches (1, 2, 3, 4) and a stereo out routing switch (ST).
Routing switches work in conjunction with Panpots to feed signals through to the left
and right channels of the stereo out and the odd and even bus outs. The following table
50 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
shows how it works.
The Routing switches on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are perma-
nently linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Channels”
on page 52), their Routing switches are not linked.
Monitoring Input Channels
Input channels can be monitored using the monitor out or phones. See “Monitor
Setup” on page 78 for more information.
Input Channels & Aux Sends
Signals from input channels 1 through 16 can be sent to aux sends 1 through 4, while
those from input channels 17 through 24 can be sent to aux sends 1 and 2. Input chan-
nel sends can be configured as either pre-fader or post-fader sends. When aux sends are
paired, aux send panpots become available on each input channel. See “Aux Sends” on
page 93 for more information.
Input Channels & the Omni Outs
Direct signals from input channels 1 through 16 can be selected for the omni outs. See
“Omni Outs” on page 115 for more information. Note that OMNI OUTs are not
affected by the D switches on the PAN/ROUT page 2.
Input Channels & the Option I/O Outs
Input channels 1 through 16 can be selected as sources for the Option I/O outs. See
“Routing Input Channels” on page 49 and “About Option I/O Cards” on page 216 for
more information.
Routing Pan Signal Destination
Signals are fed equally to bus outs 1 and 2 and the left and right
channels of the stereo out.
Signals are fed to bus out 1 and the left channel of the stereo
out.
Signals are fed to bus out 2 and the right channel of the stereo
out.
Swapping Inputs 1–8 & 17–24 51
01V—Owner’s Manual
Swapping Inputs 1–8 & 17–24
The inputs to channels 1 through 8 can be swapped with those of input channels 17
through 24 either individually or altogether. This allows signals from the Option I/O
digital inputs to make use of the 4-band EQ, dynamics processors, and other functions
of full-feature input channels 1 through 8.
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 5, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the GLOBAL or individual SWAP switches,
and the [ENTER] button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC]
buttons to set them.
Swap switches appear highlighted when channels are swapped.
When channels are swapped, their meter numbers appear highlighted on HOME page
1 and OPTION page 1, as shown below. When a swapped channel is selected, the
selected channel area of the display alternately shows the channel number and “SWAP”,
also shown below.
52 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Pairing Input Channels
Input channels 1 through 12 can be paired together for stereo signal processing. Adja-
cent odd and even input channels can be paired together (i.e., 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, not 2/3 or
4/5). The following parameters are linked when channels are paired: attenuators, EQ,
dynamics, delays, [ON], and [SEL] buttons, faders, aux sends, effects sends, and
pre/post settings. Routing switches, [SOLO] buttons, phase, panpots, aux panpots, and
fade time on/off are not linked. Panpot operation depends on the selected Pan mode.
See “Pan Modes” on page 48 for more information.
Making Input Channel Pairs
1. Press the [SEL] button of both input channels simultaneously.
OR
Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 4, as shown below, and use
the cursor buttons to select channel pairs, and then press the [ENTER]
button.
The following dialog box appears.
CH 1 –> 2—Copy the settings of input channel 1 to input channel 2.
CH 2 –> 1—Copy the settings of input channel 2 to input channel 1.
RESET BOTH—Reset both input channels to their initial settings.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select a pairing mode, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The highlighted switch and STEREO label show that the input
channels are now configured as a stereo pair.
Pairing Input Channels 53
01V—Owner’s Manual
Releasing Input Channel Pairs
1. Press the [SEL] button of both input channels simultaneously.
OR
On SETUP page 4, use the cursor buttons to select the paired channel
switch, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The following dialog box appears.
2. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The stereo pair is broken, and both input channels operate independently.
54 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Input Channel Pair Block Diagram
Delay
Meter
Delay
Meter
CH INPUT 2, 4...12
(even channels)
CH INPUT 1, 3...11
(odd channels)
ATT
*PAN: INDIVIDUAL/GANG/INV. GANG
PAN*
ON
Unchanged
Unchanged
1234
BUS
432121
AUX EFF ST
LR
Dynamics
4-Band
PEQ
Dynamics
4-Band
PEQ
CH Fader
CH Fader
AUX1
AUX2EFF1
EFF2
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
Grouping Faders 55
01V—Owner’s Manual
Grouping Faders
Input channel faders 1 through 16 can be grouped together in fader groups for
multi-channel control using a single fader. Three groups are available: A, B, and C.
Making Fader Groups
1. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 3, as shown below.
2. Use the up and down cursor buttons to select the fader groups, and the
[SEL] buttons to add and remove faders to and from that group.
Channels cannot be in more than one group at a time.
Input channels 13/14, 15/16, and paired input channels 1 through 12 (“Pairing Input
Channels” on page 52) are added and removed together.
Operate only one fader in a group at a time. If you attempt to adjust two or more faders
in the same group, the fader motors may malfunction due to the increased load.
Enabling & Disabling Fader Groups
Fader groups can be enabled and disabled using the ENABLE switches. Disabling a
group allows you to adjust faders without removing them from the group.
1. Use the up and down cursor buttons to select the fader group that you
want to disable: A, B, or C.
2. Use the [ENTER] button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC]
buttons to enable or disable the selected group.
Fader group enabled
Fader group disabled
56 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Grouping Mutes
Input channel [ON] buttons 1 through 16 can be grouped together in mute groups for
multi-channel control using a single button. Three groups are available: D, E, and F.
Mute groups may contain on channels and off channels, making it easy to toggle
between channels. When switched, on channels go off and off channels come on.
Making a Mute Group
1. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 3, as shown below.
2. Use the up and down cursor buttons to select the mute groups, and the
[SEL] buttons to add and remove channels to and from that group.
Channels cannot be in more than one group at a time.
Input channels 13/14, 15/16, and paired input channels 1 through 12 (“Pairing Input
Channels” on page 52) are added and removed together.
Enabling & Disabling Mute Groups
Mute groups can be enabled and disabled using the ENABLE switches. Disabling a
group allows you to set channels without removing them from the group.
1. Use the up and down cursor buttons to select the mute group that you
want to disable: D, E, or F.
2. Use the [ENTER] button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC]
buttons to enable or disable the selected group.
Mute group enabled
Mute group disabled
Viewing Input Channel Settings 57
01V—Owner’s Manual
Viewing Input Channel Settings
Settings for input channels 1 through 16 can be viewed, and certain parameters
adjusted on VIEW pages 1 and 2. Settings for input channels 17 through 24 can be
viewed and adjusted on OPTION page 2.
Input Channels 1–16
1. Use the [VIEW] button to locate VIEW page 1 or 2
VIEW pages for input channels 1 through 12 appear as below.
VIEW pages for input channels 13/14 and 15/16 appear as below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel, [–1/DEC], [+1/INC], and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
58 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels 17–24
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 2, as shown below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel, [–1/DEC], [+1/INC], and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
Most of the parameters for input channels 17 through 24 can be set only on OPTION
page 2.
Copying & Swapping Channel Settings 59
01V—Owner’s Manual
Copying & Swapping Channel Settings
The Channel Copy function is used to copy input channel settings from one channel to
another. The Channel swap function is used to swap input channel settings between
channels. Copy and Swap can be used with input channels 1 through 16.
1. Use the [VIEW] button to locate the VIEW page shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons and PARAMETER wheel to select the SOURCE and
DESTINATION channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons and [ENTER] button to select a CATEGORY.
ALL—All input channel settings.
EQ—EQ settings.
DELAY—Delay settings.
DYNAMICS—Dynamics settings.
FADER—Fader settings.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select COPY or SWAP, and the [ENTER] button
to execute the function.
60 Chapter 5—Input Channels
01V—Owner’s Manual
Input Channel Block Diagram
Meter
Same as INPUT 14
Same as INPUT 13
16
15 AD
HA
GAIN
AD
HA
INPUT
(BAL)
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
INPUT
(BAL)
1-12
Pad
Pad
14
13
7-12
1-6,
to
(BAL)
INPUT
to SELECT
OUTPUT
PAN*
*PAN: INDIVIDUAL/GANG/INV. GANG
ATT
ATT
Meter
ON/OFF
FLIP
ON
ON
CH Fader
CH Fader
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
EFF1
EFF2
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
EFF1
EFF2
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
Meter
Meter
+48V
DIGITAL
STEREO
IN
RL
ST
from 2TR IN
EFF
De-emphasis
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
HA AD
GAIN
HA AD
AUX
121234
BUS
Dynamics
PEQ
4-Band Delay
Dynamics Delay
Dynamics Delay
AD
26dB
Pad
PHANTOM 4321
PAN
HA
GAIN
15/16
2TR IN ATT
Meter
to MONI
to MONI
CH Fader
AUX1
AUX2
EFF1
EFF2
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
Option I/O
IN
PAN
2-Band
PEQ
ATT
De-emphasis
or DC Cut
17-24
1-8 Unchanged
Meter
ON
Meter
SWAP
INPUT
(BAL) Unchanged
This section is available only when
an optional Option I/O card is installed.
EQ 61
01V—Owner’s Manual
EQ
6
In this chapter...
About the 01V EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Adjusting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
EQ Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Bypassing the EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Resetting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Preset EQ Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Storing EQ Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recalling EQ Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Editing EQ Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Preset EQ Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
62 Chapter 6—EQ
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the 01V EQ
Input channels 1 through 16, the effects returns, aux sends, and stereo out all feature
four-band parametric EQ, with variable gain, frequency, Q, and ON/OFF parameters.
Input channels 17 through 24 feature a simplified two-band parametric EQ. See the
“Block Diagram” on page 24 for the exact location of each EQ section. The high and
low bands of each EQ can be used as shelving, peaking, or HPF (High-Pass Filter) and
LPF (Low-Pass Filter), respectively.
EQ settings can be stored in the EQ library as programs, or with all mix settings in mix
scenes. The EQ library consists of 40 preset programs and 40 user programs. User pro-
grams allow you to store frequently used EQ settings, which can be titled for easy iden-
tification. The unique collection of preset EQ programs are designed for specific
applications and instruments, and provide a good reference and starting point when
making EQ adjustments. The EQ library cannot be used with the 2-band EQs on input
channels 17 through 24. See “EQ Library” on page 67 for more information.
The EQs on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are permanently linked.
When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Channels” on page 52),
their EQs are linked.
The EQ parameters and response curve for input channels 1 through 16, the effects
returns, aux sends, and stereo out appear on the EQ page shown below.
The EQ parameters and response curve for input channels 17 through 24 appear on the
OPTION page shown below.
The quickest way to adjust the EQ is by using the SELECTED CHANNEL controls
shown below.
EQ HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
Adjusting the EQ 63
01V—Owner’s Manual
Adjusting the EQ
EQ can be adjusted using the SELECTED CHANNEL controls, the quickest method, or
the EQ pages in conjunction with the cursor buttons, [–/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons,
and PARAMETER wheel.
For Input Channels 1–16
1. Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 to select channels.
2. Use the [HIGH], [HI-MID], [LO-MID], and [LOW] buttons to select EQ
bands, and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain, respec-
tively.
If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting 01V Prefer-
ences” on page 203), the EQ page shown below appears, and the Home fader mode is
selected. This page can also be located using the [EQ/ATT] button.
The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param-
eters and the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
For Input Channels 17–24
1. Press the [OPTION I/O] button.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Use the [HIGH] and [LOW] buttons to select EQ bands, and the F and G
controls to adjust the frequency and gain, respectively.
If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting 01V Prefer-
ences” on page 203), the OPTION page shown below appears. This page can also be
located using the [OPTION I/O] button.
EQ HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
For quick EQ'ing select
a channel and use the
EQ controls.
64 Chapter 6—EQ
01V—Owner’s Manual
The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param-
eters and the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
For Effects Returns 1 & 2
1. Use the effects returns [SEL] buttons to select effects returns 1 and 2.
2. Use the [HIGH], [HI-MID], [LO-MID], and [LOW] buttons to select EQ
bands, and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain, respec-
tively.
If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting 01V Prefer-
ences” on page 203), the EQ page shown below appears, and the Home fader mode is
selected. This page can also be located using the [EQ/ATT] button.
The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param-
eters and the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
For Aux Sends 1–4
1. Use the Fader Mode AUX buttons to select an aux send.
2. Press the MASTER [SEL] button.
3. Use the [HIGH], [HI-MID], [LO-MID], and [LOW] buttons to select EQ
bands, and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain, respec-
tively.
If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting 01V Prefer-
ences” on page 203), the EQ page shown below appears, and the Home fader mode is
selected. This page can also be located using the [EQ/ATT] button.
The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param-
eters and the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
When aux sends are paired (“Pairing Aux Sends” on page 101), their EQs are linked.
Adjusting the EQ 65
01V—Owner’s Manual
For the Stereo Output
1. Press the [HOME] button.
2. Press the MASTER [SEL] button.
ST is the selected channel.
3. Use the [HIGH], [HI-MID], [LO-MID], and [LOW] buttons to select EQ
bands, and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain, respec-
tively.
If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting 01V Prefer-
ences” on page 203), the EQ page shown below appears, and the Home fader mode is
selected. This page can also be located using the [EQ/ATT] button.
The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param-
eters and the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
66 Chapter 6—EQ
01V—Owner’s Manual
EQ Specs
The following table contains the EQ specs.
Bypassing the EQ
The selected channel’s EQ can be turned on or off using the EQ ON switch on
the EQ page (OPTION page 2 for channels 17 through 24), or the [ENTER]
button. While the EQ page is displayed, the [ENTER] button turns the EQ on
or off regardless of the cursor position.
Resetting the EQ
To reset all the EQ parameters on the selected channel to their initial values, press the
[HIGH] and [LOW] buttons simultaneously.
The following table contains the initial EQ values.
1. Four-band EQs only (low and high bands only on input channels 17 through 24).
2. When the low and high EQ bands are configured as HPF and LPF, their gain controls
function as filter on and off switches.
1. Four-band EQs only (low and high bands only on input channels 17 through 24).
Low Lo-Mid1Hi-Mid1High
Gain (G) –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)2
Frequency (F) 21 Hz–20.1 kHz (1/12 octave steps, 120 steps)
QHPF, 10.0–0.10
(41 steps),
L.SHELF
10.0–0.10 (41 steps)
LPF, 10.0–0.10
(41 steps),
H.SHELF
Low Lo-Mid1Hi-Mid1High
Gain (G) 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
Frequency (F) 125 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 10.0 kHz
QL.SHELF 0.70 0.70 H.SHELF
ENTER
EQ Library 67
01V—Owner’s Manual
EQ Library
EQ settings can be stored as programs in the EQ library, which contains 40 preset pro-
grams (1–40) and 40 user programs (41–80). User programs allow you to store fre-
quently used EQ settings, and they can be titled for easy identification. The EQ library
can also be used to transfer settings from one EQ to another. For example, the stereo
out EQ settings could be stored as a library program and then recalled to an aux send
EQ. The unique collection of preset EQ programs are designed for specific applications
and instruments, and provide a good reference and starting point when making EQ
adjustments. See page 71 for a complete list of the preset EQ programs.
The EQ library is controlled from the EQ Library page shown below. Use the [EQ/ATT]
button to locate this page.
As each program is selected, its EQ curve appears in the EQ CURVE window. Above
this are signal level meters for the selected channel.
Preset EQ Program List
# Title # Title
01 Bass Drum 1 21 A.G.Stroke 2
02 Bass Drum 2 22 A.G.Arpeg. 1
03 Snare Drum 1 23 A.G.Arpeg. 2
04 Snare Drum 2 24 Brass Sec.
05 Tom-tom 1 25 Male Vocal 1
06 Cymbal 26 Male Vocal 2
07 High Hat 27 Female Vo. 1
08 Percussion 28 Female Vo. 2
09 E.Bass 1 29 Chorus&Harmo
10 E.Bass 2 30 Total EQ 1
11 Syn.Bass 1 31 Total EQ 2
12 Syn.Bass 2 32 Total EQ 3
13 Piano 1 33 Bass Drum 3
14 Piano 2 34 Snare Drum 3
15 E.G.Clean 35 Tom-tom 2
16 E.G.Crunch 1 36 Piano 3
17 E.G.Crunch 2 37 Piano Low
18 E.G.Dist. 1 38 Piano High
19 E.G.Dist. 2 39 Fine-EQ Cass
20 A.G.Stroke 1 40 Narrator
68 Chapter 6—EQ
01V—Owner’s Manual
Storing EQ Programs
EQ programs are stored on the EQ Library page. You can store EQ settings to user pro-
grams 41 to 80. Preset programs 1 through 40 are read only.
1. Use the [EQ/ATT] button to locate the EQ Library page shown below.
2. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel whose EQ settings you want
to store as a program.
You can select input channels 1 through 16, the effects returns, aux sends, or stereo out.
You cannot select input channels 17 through 24.
3. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select
programs.
The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer-
ences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203).
4. Use the cursor buttons to select STORE, and then press the [ENTER] but-
ton.
The Title Edit dialog box appears. If the STORE CONFIRMATION option is turned off
in the preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203), the Title Edit dialog box
does not appear and the EQ program is stored.
5. Enter a title for the EQ program.
See “Title Edit Dialog Box” on page 37 for more information.
6. When you’ve finished, select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The EQ program is stored.
Recalling EQ Programs 69
01V—Owner’s Manual
Recalling EQ Programs
EQ programs are recalled on the EQ Library page. You can recall any one of the 40 pre-
set and 40 user programs.
1. Use the [EQ/ATT] button to locate the EQ Library page shown below.
2. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel to which you want to recall
the EQ program.
You can select input channels 1 through 16, the effects returns, aux sends, or stereo out.
You cannot select input channels 17 through 24.
3. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select
programs.
As each program is selected its EQ curve is displayed in the EQ CURVE window.
The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer-
ences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203).
4. Use the cursor buttons to select RECALL, and then press the [ENTER] but-
ton.
The EQ program is recalled. If the RECALL CONFIRMATION option is turned on in
the preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203), a confirmation dialog box
appears. In this case, select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button to confirm the
recall.
70 Chapter 6—EQ
01V—Owner’s Manual
Editing EQ Program Titles
The titles of stored EQ programs can be edited using the Title Edit function.
1. Use the [EQ/ATT] button to locate the EQ Library page shown below.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel to select programs.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select TITLE EDIT, and then press the [ENTER]
button.
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
4. Edit the program title.
See “Title Edit Dialog Box” on page 37 for more information.
5. When you’ve finished, select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The new title is stored.
Preset EQ Program Parameters 71
01V—Owner’s Manual
Preset EQ Program Parameters
# Title Parameter Description
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
01 Bass Drum 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes the low
range of a bass drum
and the attack created
by the beater.
G+3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
F99 Hz 265 Hz 1.05 kHz 5.33 kHz
Q1.2 10 0.9 —
02 Bass Drum 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF
Creates a peak around
80Hz, producing a
tight, stiff sound.
G+8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON
F79 Hz 397 Hz 2.52 kHz 12.6 kHz
Q1.4 4.5 2.2 —
03 Snare Drum 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Emphasizes snapping
and rimshot sounds.
G–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB
F132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.17 kHz 5.04 kHz
Q1.2 4.5 0.11 —
04 Snare Drum 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
Emphasizes the ranges
of that classic rock snare
drum sound.
G+1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F177 Hz 334 Hz 2.37 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q—10 0.7 0.1
05 Tom-tom 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
Emphasizes the attack of
tom-toms, and creates a
long, “leathery” decay.
G+2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB
F210 Hz 667 Hz 4.49 kHz 6.35 kHz
Q1.4 10 1.2 0.28
06 Cymbal
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes the attack of
crash cymbals, extend-
ing the “sparkling”
decay.
G–2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB
F105 Hz 420 Hz 1.05 kHz 13.4 kHz
Q—8 0.9 —
07 High Hat
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Use on a tight high-hat,
emphasizing the mid to
high range.
G–4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB
F94 Hz 420 Hz 2.82 kHz 7.55 kHz
Q—0.5 1 —
08 Percussion
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes the attack
and clarifies the
high-range of instru-
ments, such as shakers,
cabasas, and congas.
G–4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F99 Hz 397 Hz 2.82 kHz 16.9 kHz
Q—4.5 0.56 —
09 E.Bass 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Makes a tight electric
bass sound by cutting
very low frequencies.
G–7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F35 Hz 111 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q—5 4.5 —
10 E.Bass 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Unlike program 9, this
program emphasizes
the low range of an
electric bass.
G+3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB
F111 Hz 111 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q0.1 5 6.3 —
72 Chapter 6—EQ
01V—Owner’s Manual
11 Syn.Bass 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Use on a synth bass with
emphasized low range.
G+3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
F83 Hz 944 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.6 kHz
Q0.1 8 4.5 —
12 Syn.Bass 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Emphasizes the attack
that is peculiar to a
synth bass.
G+2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB
F125 Hz 177 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.6 kHz
Q1.6 8 2.2 —
13 Piano 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
This is used to make a
piano sound brighter.
G–6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F94 Hz 944 Hz 3.17 kHz 7.55 kHz
Q—8 0.9 —
14 Piano 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Used in conjunction
with a compressor, this
program emphasizes
the attack and low
range of a piano sound.
G+3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F223 Hz 595 Hz 3.17 kHz 5.33 kHz
Q5.6 10 0.7 —
15 E.G.Clean
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use for line-recording
an electric guitar or
semi-acoustic guitar to
get a slightly hard
sound.
G+2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB
F265 Hz 397 Hz 1.33 kHz 4.49 kHz
Q0.18 10 6.3 —
16 E.G.Crunch 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
Adjusts the tonal qual-
ity of a slightly distorted
guitar sound.
G+4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB
F140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.88 kHz 5.65 kHz
Q8 4.5 0.63 9
17 E.G.Crunch 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
A variation on program
16.
G+2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F125 Hz 445 Hz 3.36 kHz 19.0 kHz
Q8 0.4 0.16 —
18 E.G.Dist. 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Makes a heavily dis-
torted guitar sound
clearer.
G+5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F354 Hz 944 Hz 3.36 kHz 12.6 kHz
Q—910—
19 E.G.Dist. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
A variation on program
18.
G+6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB
F315 Hz 1.05 kHz 4.23 kHz 12.6 kHz
Q—10 4 —
20 A.G.Stroke 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Emphasizes the bright
tones of an acoustic gui-
tar.
G–2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB
F105 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.88 kHz 5.33 kHz
Q0.9 4.5 3.5 —
# Title Parameter Description
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
Preset EQ Program Parameters 73
01V—Owner’s Manual
21 A.G.Stroke 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF A variation on program
20. You can also use it
with a gutsy guitar
sound.
G–3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F297 Hz 749 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.56 kHz
Q—9 4.5 —
22 A.G.Arpeg. 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
Corrects arpeggio tech-
nique of an acoustic gui-
tar.
G–0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F223 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.72 kHz
Q—4.5 4.5 0.12
23 A.G.Arpeg. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
A variation on program
22.
G0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
F177 Hz 354 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.23 kHz
Q—7 4.5 —
24 Brass Sec.
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use with trumpets,
trombones, or sax. With
one instrument, adjust
the HIGH or H-MID fre-
quency.
G–2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F88 Hz 841 Hz 2.11 kHz 4.49 kHz
Q2.8 2 0.7 7
25 Male Vocal 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for
male vocal. Adjust the
HIGH or H-MID setting
according to the voice
quality.
G–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB
F187 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.72 kHz
Q0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11
26 Male Vocal 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
A variation on program
25.
G+2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F167 Hz 236 Hz 2.67 kHz 6.72 kHz
Q0.11 10 5.6 —
27 Female Vo. 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for
female vocal. Adjust the
HIGH or H-MID setting
according to the voice
quality.
G–1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB
F118 Hz 397 Hz 2.67 kHz 5.99 kHz
Q0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14
28 Female Vo. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
A variation on program
27.
G–7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB
F111 Hz 334 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.72 kHz
Q—0.16 0.2 —
29 Chorus&Harmo
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for a
chorus. It makes the
entire chorus much
brighter.
G–2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F88 Hz 841 Hz 2.11 kHz 4.49 kHz
Q2.8 2 0.7 7
30 Total EQ 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use on a stereo mix dur-
ing mixdown. Sounds
even better when used
with a compressor.
G–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB
F94 Hz 944 Hz 2.11 kHz 16.0 kHz
Q7 2.2 5.6 —
# Title Parameter Description
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
74 Chapter 6—EQ
01V—Owner’s Manual
31 Total EQ 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
A variation on program
30.
G+4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB
F94 Hz 749 Hz 1.78 kHz 17.9 kHz
Q7 2.8 5.6 —
32 Total EQ 3
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF A variation on program
30. Can also be used
with stereo inputs or
external effect returns.
G+1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F66 Hz 841 Hz 1.88 kHz 15.1 kHz
Q—0.28 0.7 —
33 Bass Drum 3
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
A variation on program
1. The low and mid
range is removed.
G+3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F118 Hz 315 Hz 4.23 kHz 20.1 kHz
Q2 10 0.4 0.4
34 Snare Drum 3
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
A variation on program
3. It creates a thick
sound.
G0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F223 Hz 561 Hz 4.23 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q—4.5 2.8 0.1
35 Tom-tom 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
A variation on program
5. Emphasizes the mid
and high range.
G–9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F88 Hz 210 Hz 5.33 kHz 16.9 kHz
Q—4.5 1.2 —
36 Piano 3
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
A variation on program
13.
G+4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB
F99 Hz 472 Hz 2.37 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q8109—
37 Piano Low
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Use for the low range of
a piano sound recorded
in stereo.
G–5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB
F187 Hz 397 Hz 6.72 kHz 12.6 kHz
Q10 6.3 2.2 —
38 Piano High
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
Use for the high range
of a piano sound
recorded in stereo.
G–5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB
F187 Hz 397 Hz 6.72 kHz 5.65 kHz
Q10 6.3 2.2 0.1
39 Fine-EQ Cass
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Use when recording to
or from cassette tape to
make the sound clearer.
G–1.5 dB –18.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB
F74 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.6 kHz
Q—4.5 1.8 —
40 Narrator
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
Use when recording
narration.
G–4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F105 Hz 707 Hz 2.52 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q4 7 0.63 —
# Title Parameter Description
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
Solo, Monitors & Meters 75
01V—Owner’s Manual
Solo, Monitors & Meters
7
In this chapter...
About Monitor & Solo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Monitor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Two-track Input (2TR IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Monitor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Monitor Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Solo Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using Solo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Solo Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Metering Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Main Stereo Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Peak Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting the Metering Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Option I/O Meters (input channels 17–24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Effects Send Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
76 Chapter 7—Solo, Monitors & Meters
01V—Owner’s Manual
About Monitor & Solo
Flexible monitoring and solo functions mean the 01V can be used in a wide range of
applications. All inputs and outputs can be monitored pre or post fader via the monitor
out or phones. Recording Solo and Mixdown Solo modes allow quick monitoring of
inputs channels and effects returns. Monitor and solo parameters appear on SETUP
page 2 shown below.
When no channels are soloed, the signal source for the monitor out and phones is
selected using the MONITOR SETUP parameters in the top half of this page. Selectable
sources are: the stereo output, stereo cascade in, aux sends 1 through 4, or bus outs 1
through 4. Signals can be sourced pre-fader (PFL) or post-fader (AFL). Other parame-
ters include monitor trim and a mono/stereo switch. See “Monitor Setup” on page 78
for more information.
The SOLO SETUP parameters in the bottom half of this page are used to configure the
Solo function. Input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be soloed using
the [SOLO] buttons. Two Solo modes are available: Recording Solo and Mixdown Solo.
The SEL MODE determines how signals from each channel are soloed: individually or
mixed together. Signals can be sourced pre-fader (PFL) or post-fader (AFL). Other
parameters include solo trim and a solo enable switch. See “Solo Setup” on page 80 for
more information.
Monitor Outputs 77
01V—Owner’s Manual
Monitor Outputs
Monitor and solo signals are output via the monitor out and phones connections. Make
sure the MONITOR–2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR for monitoring. See
“Two-track Input (2TR IN)” on page 77 for more information.
Monitor signals are converted to analog using 18-bit 8-times
oversampling D/A converters, and then output via balanced
1/4-inch phone jacks with a +4 dB nominal output level.
The MONITOR OUT LEVEL control is used to adjust the level
of the monitor out signal.
Phones
A pair of stereo headphones can be connected to the PHONES
stereo (TRS) phone jack. The phones signal is the same as the
monitor out signal.
The PHONES LEVEL control is used to adjust the level of the
phones signal.
Two-track Input (2TR IN)
Signals connected via the 2TR IN jacks can be monitored via the
MONITOR OUT and PHONES when the MONITOR–2TR IN
switch is set to 2TR IN. The stereo outputs of a master recorder
can be connected here for confidence monitoring and master
playback. The 2TR IN uses phono jacks with a –10 dBV nominal
input level.
By setting the 15/16–2TR IN switch to 2TR IN, 2TR IN signals
can be fed to input channels 15 and 16 for mixing with other sig-
nals. Normally, the input signals for these input channels are
derived from phone jack inputs 15 and 16.
The 2TR OUT jacks are explained on page 88.
MONITOR OUT
+4dB(BAL)
LR
LEVEL
MONITOR
OUT
100
PHONES
LEVEL
PHONES
100
2TR
L
R
IN OUT
–10dBV (UNBAL)
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
78 Chapter 7—Solo, Monitors & Meters
01V—Owner’s Manual
Monitor Setup
The signal source for the monitor out and phones is selected using the MONITOR
SETUP parameters on SETUP page 2. Selectable sources are: the stereo output, stereo
cascade in, aux sends 1 through 4, or bus outs 1 through 4. Since the Solo function has
priority, these sources can be monitored only when the Solo function is off (i.e., no
channels are soloed). Signals can be sourced pre-fader (PFL) or post-fader (AFL).
Other parameters include monitor trim and a mono/stereo switch.
1. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 2 shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the MONITOR SETUP parameters, and
the PARAMETER wheel, [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons, and [ENTER] but-
ton to set them.
SOURCE—These switches are used to select the signal source for the monitor out and
phones. You can select the stereo out, stereo cascade in, aux sends 1 through 4, or bus
outs 1 through 4. Several sources can be selected simultaneously.
LISTEN—This switch sets the monitor signal source to pre-fader (PFL) or post-fader
(AFL). It affects the stereo out, aux send, and bus out monitor sources. For example,
when set to PFL, the stereo out can be monitored regardless of the position of the stereo
master fader. When set to AFL, however, this fader must be raised in order to monitor
the stereo out.
MONI TRIM—This parameter is used to adjust the level of the monitor signal from
–60 dB to +6 dB.
MONO—This switch sets the monitor and phone’s signals to mono (MONO) or ste-
reo (ST). When set to MONO, the left and right signals are summed together to form a
mono mix, which is attenuated by –3 dB.
Using Monitor
To monitor, for example, the stereo out, proceed as follows.
1. Connect a monitoring system (amp, speakers) to the MONITOR OUT.
2. Make sure that the MONITOR–2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR.
3. Set the MONITOR OUT LEVEL control midway.
If you are using headphones, set the PHONES LEVEL control midway.
4. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 2, explained previously.
5. Set the SOURCE to STEREO OUT.
If MONITOR SETUP LISTEN is set to AFL, the STEREO fader must be raised. Other-
wise, you won’t hear anything.
Monitor Block Diagram 79
01V—Owner’s Manual
Monitor Block Diagram
from
LR
MONI
STEREO OUT
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
1-4
1-4
AUX
BUS
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
1-4
1-4
2TR OUT
Meter BUS
master fader
AUX
master fader
Meter
ON
1-4
to SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
STEREO
IN
SELECT
to
Meter
ST CASCADE IN
ON
ON
Meter
Meter
BALANCE
L
R
R
L
ST
Dither
RL
ST
DA
Dynamics Delay
Dynamics
Dynamics
Delay
DA
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
Meter
PAN
EFFAUX
121234
BUS
4321
OUT
OUT
STEREO
STEREO
DIGITAL
Meter
MONITOR
LEVEL
MONI
TRIM MONO
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
to INPUT 15, 16
2TR IN
R
L
DA
DA
LEVEL
PHONES
R
L
Monitor section
80 Chapter 7—Solo, Monitors & Meters
01V—Owner’s Manual
Solo Setup
The Solo function, available on input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns, is
used to monitor channels individually. Two solo modes are available: Recording Solo
and Mixdown Solo. These and configured using the SOLO SETUP parameters on
SETUP page 2. Solo has priority over the sources selected using the MONITOR SETUP
parameters. Channel signals can be soloed pre-fader (PFL) or post-fader (AFL). When
input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Channels” on page 52), their
[SOLO] buttons continue to work independently.
1. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 2 shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the MONITOR SETUP parameters, and
the PARAMETER wheel, [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons, and [ENTER] but-
ton to set them.
SOLO—This switch is used to enable and disable the Solo function. When set to DIS-
ABLE, signals are not soloed, the [SOLO] indicator on the soloed channel lights up
instead of flashing, and the SOLO status indicator does not light up.
SOLO MODE—These switches are used to select the Solo mode: Recording Solo or
Mixdown Solo.
In Recording Solo mode, Soloed channel signals are fed to the Monitor bus and then
output to the monitor out and phones. No other outputs are affected. Input channels
that are turned off can also be soloed. If LISTEN is set to AFL, off channels are moni-
tored PFL. This mode is typically used to monitor individual input signals in recording
and sound reinforcement applications, and is useful for checking whether signals are
clipping, or making EQ adjustments in isolation.
In Mixdown Solo mode, Soloed channels signals are fed to the Stereo bus and then out-
put to the stereo output, monitor out, and phones. Non-soloed channels are muted.
Only channels that are routed to the Stereo bus cab be soloed. For the purpose of solo-
ing, channels that are turned off are turned on when soloed. This mode is typically used
when adjusting individual channels during mixdown.
SEL MODE—These switches set the Solo Select mode. In LAST SOLO mode, only one
channels can be soloed at a time. In MIX SOLO mode, however, several channels can
be soloed simultaneously.
LISTEN—This switches set the solo signal source to pre-fader (PFL) or post-fader
(AFL). It affects input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns. This switch is not
effective in Mixdown Solo mode because the monitor out and phones signals are
sourced from the Stereo bus. In this mode, the MONITOR SETUP LISTEN switch can
be used to select either PFL or AFL.
SOLO TRIM—This parameter is used to adjust the level of the solo signal from –60 dB
to +6 dB.
Using Solo 81
01V—Owner’s Manual
Using Solo
Input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be soloed as follows.
1. Connect a monitoring system (amp, speakers) to the MONITOR OUT.
2. Make sure that the MONITOR–2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR.
3. Set the MONITOR OUT LEVEL control midway.
If you are using headphones, set the PHONES LEVEL control midway.
4. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 2, explained previously, and
configure as necessary.
For Input Channels 1–16
5. Use [SOLO] buttons 1 through 16 to solo channels.
For Input Channels 17–24
6. Press the [OPTION I/O] button.
7. Use [SOLO] buttons 17 through 24 to solo channels.
For Effects Returns 1 & 2
8. Use the effects returns [SOLO] buttons to solo effects returns 1 and 2.
When a channel is soloed, its [SOLO] button and the main SOLO indicator flash.
If SOLO SETUP LISTEN is set to AFL, you must raise the soloed channel’s fader. Oth-
erwise, you won’t hear anything.
82 Chapter 7—Solo, Monitors & Meters
01V—Owner’s Manual
Solo Block Diagram
Input channels 1 through 24 and
effects returns that are turned off are
temporarily turned on when soloed
(Solo Safe channels are unaffected).
Input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be soloed.
The stereo output, aux sends, bus outs, and stereo cascade input
can be monitored when Solo is off.
13/14
15/16
EFF1, 2
1-12
17-24
13/14
15/16
EFF1, 2
1-12
17-24
MONI
RECORDING SOLO LISTEN SOLO
MIX SOLO
Unchanged
PAN
Unchanged
ON
MONO
PHONES
Unchanged
MONITOR
OUT
SOLO
TRIM
SOLO
TRIM
ON
ON
OUT
MONITOR
Unchanged
Unchanged Unchanged
Unchanged
LISTEN
PAN
Unchanged
1234
PHONES
BUS
432121
AUX EFF
LR
ST
LR
MONI
1234
BUS
432121
AUX EFF
LR
ST STEREO OUT: unchanged
LR
MONO
SOLO
LISTEN SOLO
BALANCE
ON
Metering Signal Levels 83
01V—Owner’s Manual
Metering Signal Levels
Signal level meters for input channels 1 through 16, the effects returns, aux sends, bus
outs, omni outs, and stereo output are provided on the HOME pages. The signal source
points for input and output meters can be set on HOME page 5. Stereo output levels
can be metered using the main stereo meters or the meters on HOME page 4. A Peak
Hold function can be set globally for all meters. Meters for input channels 17 through
24 and the eight digital outputs (Option I/O) are available on the OPTION pages. All
meters feature a CLIP indicator, which lights up when signals clip. If this happens, back
off the levels, otherwise signal distortion may occur.
Input channels 1 through 16, the stereo output, aux sends, and effects sends can also be
metered on the VIEW pages.
1. Use the [HOME] button to locate the following HOME pages.
Input channels 1–16
HOME page 1 displays signal level meters for input channels 1 through 16. The decibel
value below each meter indicates the position of the corresponding channel fader. The
highlighted numbers 1, 2, and 3 indicate that input channels 1, 2, and 3 have been
swapped with input channels 17, 18, and 19. See “Swapping Inputs 1–8 & 17–24” on
page 51 for more information.
Meters for input channels 1 through 16 also appear on the VIEW pages. See “Viewing
Input Channel Settings” on page 57 for more information.
Effects Returns, Aux Sends & Bus Outs
HOME page 2 displays signal level meters for the effects returns, aux sends, and bus
outs. The decibel value below each meter indicates the position of the corresponding
fader. The position of the stereo fader (ST) is also shown.
Meters for the effects returns also appear on the EFFECT and VIEW pages. See “Using
the Effects” on page 123 and “Viewing Effects Returns Settings” on page 130. Meters for
the aux sends also appear on the VIEW pages. See “Viewing Aux Send Settings” on page
98 for more information.
84 Chapter 7—Solo, Monitors & Meters
01V—Owner’s Manual
Omni Outs
HOME page 3 displays signal level meters for the four omni outs. The source assigned
to an omni out is displayed below its meters. These assignments are made on
PAN/ROUT page 4. See “Assigning Omni Outs” on page 116 for more information.
Stereo Output
HOME page 4 displays signal level meters for the stereo output. Compared to the main
stereo meters, these have a large scale from –72 dB to CLIP.
Meters for the stereo output also appear on the VIEW pages. See “Viewing Stereo Out-
put Settings” on page 89 for more information.
Main Stereo Meters
In addition to the meters on HOME page 4, stereo output levels are
displayed on the dedicated 12-segment main stereo meters, with
Peak Hold. The meters range from –48 dB to CLIP. If a CLIP LED
does light, reduce the stereo output level to prevent signal distor-
tion. The main stereo meters are not affected by the metering
points on HOME page 5.
Peak Hold
The Peak Hold function works with the HOME, OPTION I/O, and main stereo meters.
When it’s turned on, the meter segments lit by the loudest signal peaks remain on, pro-
viding an easy way to check for peak levels.
1. Use the PARAMETER wheel, [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons, or [ENTER]
button to turn the Peak Hold function on or off.
To reset the Peak Hold function, turn it off and then on again.
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
Setting the Metering Point 85
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Metering Point
The metering points for input channels 1 through 16 and the effects returns can be set
to either PRE EQ or PRE FADER. For the stereo output, aux send, and bus out meters
it can be set to either POST EQ or POST ON. These settings do not affect the main ste-
reo meters, which always meter POST ON signals.
1. Use the [HOME] button to locate HOME page 5, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the switches, and the PARAMETER wheel,
[–1/DEC], [+1/INC], and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
INPUT—Used to set the meter source points for input channels 1 through 16 and the
effects returns to either PRE EQ or PRE FADER.
OUTPUT—Used to set the meter source points for the stereo output, aux send, and bus
out meters to either POST EQ or POST ON.
Option I/O Meters (input channels 17–24)
Signal level meters for input channels 17 through 24 and the Option I/O outputs are
displayed on the OPTION pages.
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate the OPTION pages.
Signal level meters for inputs 17 through 24 are displayed on OPTION page 1, as shown
below. The decibel value below each meter indicates the position of the corresponding
fader. The highlighted numbers 20 and 22 indicate that input channels 20 and 22 have
been swapped with input channels 4 and 6. See “Swapping Inputs 1–8 & 17–24” on
page 51 for more information.
Signal level meters for the Option I/O outputs are displayed on OPTION page 3, as
shown below. The source assigned to each output is displayed below its meter. These
assignments are made on OPTION page 4. See “Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs”
on page 219 for more information.
86 Chapter 7—Solo, Monitors & Meters
01V—Owner’s Manual
Effects Send Meters
Signal level meters for effects sends 1 and 2 are displayed on the VIEW pages.
1. Use the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to select an effects send, and
then press the MASTER [SEL] button.
EFF1 or EFF2 appears on the display, indicating that an effects send is selected.
2. Use the [VIEW] button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2, as shown below.
Signal level meters for effects send 1 are displayed on VIEW pages 1 and 2, as shown
below.
Signal level meters for effects send 2 are displayed on VIEW pages 1 and 2, as shown
below.
Stereo Output 87
01V—Owner’s Manual
Stereo Output
8
In this chapter...
About the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Analog Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2TR Out & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Coaxial Digital Out & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Option I/O & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Omni Outs & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Solo & the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Monitoring the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Metering the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Routing Signals to the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Viewing Stereo Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Setting the Stereo Output Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Muting the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Balancing the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Applying EQ to the Stereo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Stereo Output Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Stereo Output Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Stereo Output Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
88 Chapter 8—Stereo Output
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the Stereo Output
The stereo output features four-band parametric EQ, a dynamics processor, balance
control, and variable output delay of up to 300 milliseconds. The stereo signal is output
via analog XLR-type connectors, analog 2TR OUT connectors, Coaxial digital outputs,
and can be assigned to the Option I/O digital outputs or omni outs.
Analog Stereo Output
The stereo output signal is converted to analog using
20-bit 8-times oversampling D/A converters, and then
output via balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors with a
+4 dB nominal output level.
2TR Out & the Stereo Output
In addition to the XLR connectors, the stereo output signal is output
to the 2TR OUT connectors. These are phono jacks with a –10 dBV
nominal output level, and are typically connected to the analog
inputs of a stereo cassette deck, DAT, or MiniDisc deck for stereo mix
recording.
Coaxial Digital Out & the Stereo Output
The stereo output signal is output digitally in Coaxial format
from the digital stereo out connector. Typically this is connected
to the digital input on a DAT or MiniDisc deck for stereo mix
recording. See “Digital Stereo Out” on page 211 for more infor-
mation.
Option I/O & the Stereo Output
The stereo output signal can be assigned to the Option I/O digital outputs. See “About
Option I/O Cards” on page 216 for more information.
Omni Outs & the Stereo Output
The stereo output signal can be assigned to the omni outs. See “Assigning Omni Outs”
on page 116 for more information.
Solo & the Stereo Output
The Mixdown Solo modes work in conjunction with the stereo output. See “Solo
Setup” on page 80 for more information.
Monitoring the Stereo Output
The stereo output can be monitored using the monitor out or phones. See “Monitor
Setup” on page 78 for more information.
STEREO OUT
+4dB(BAL)
RL
2TR
L
R
IN OUT
–10dBV (UNBAL)
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
OUT IN
Metering the Stereo Output 89
01V—Owner’s Manual
Metering the Stereo Output
Stereo output signal levels can be metered using the L STEREO R meters or HOME
page 4 meters. See “Metering Signal Levels” on page 83 for more information.
Routing Signals to the Stereo Output
Input channels 1 through 24 and the effects return can be routed to the stereo output.
See “Routing Input Channels” on page 49 for more information.
Viewing Stereo Output Settings
Settings for the stereo output can be viewed, and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW
pages 1 and 2.
1. Press the [HOME] button, and then the MASTER [SEL] button.
ST appears on the display, indicating that the stereo output is selected.
2. Use the [VIEW] button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2, as shown below.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel, [–1/DEC], [+1/INC], and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
Parameters are explained in the following sections.
90 Chapter 8—Stereo Output
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Stereo Output Level
The stereo output level is controlled using the STEREO fader. Since
this fader is also used to control the aux and effects send master levels,
you may need to press the [HOME] button before adjusting the stereo
output level. See “Faders (plus Return Rotary Controls)” on page 35
for more information.
Muting the Stereo Output
The stereo output can be muted using the STEREO [ON] button. This but-
ton lights up when stereo output is on. Since this button is also used to
mute the aux and effects send master outputs, you may need to press the
[HOME] button before turning the stereo output on or off. See “ON But-
tons” on page 34 for more information.
Balancing the Stereo Output
The left and right channels of the stereo output signal can be balanced as follows.
1. Press the [HOME] button, and then the STEREO [SEL] button.
ST appears on the display, indicating that the stereo output is selected.
2. Use the PAN control to adjust the balance.
The balance can also be adjusted on the VIEW page. See “Viewing Stereo Output Set-
tings” on page 89 for more information.
Applying EQ to the Stereo Output
The stereo output features four-band parametric EQ. See “EQ” on page 61 for more
information. The EQ can be turned on or off, and the EQ curve viewed on the VIEW
page. See “Viewing Stereo Output Settings” on page 89 for more information.
Stereo Output Dynamics Processors
The stereo output features a stereo dynamics processor. See “Dynamics Processors” on
page 161 for more information. The dynamics can be turned on or off, and the dynam-
ics curve viewed on the VIEW page. See “Viewing Stereo Output Settings” on page 89
for more information.
STEREO
MASTER
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
ON
Stereo Output Delay 91
01V—Owner’s Manual
Stereo Output Delay
The left and right channels of the stereo output can be delayed individually by up to
300 milliseconds. This can be used to compensate for delays in multi-speaker sound
reinforcement systems.
1. Use the [∅/DELAY] button to locate DELAY page 4, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the delay parameters and the [ENTER]
button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set
them.
Parameter Range Description
ON/OFF ON/OFF These switches are used to turn on and off the delays.
DELAY 0–300 ms
Delay can be specified in milliseconds, meters, or samples
(“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203). The maximum
delay in samples is fixed at 13229. The maximum delay in
milliseconds and meters depends on the sampling rate. At
44.1 kHz, for example, it is 300 milliseconds and 102.2
meters, respectively.
92 Chapter 8—Stereo Output
01V—Owner’s Manual
Stereo Output Block Diagram
LR
MONI
STEREO OUT
LISTEN
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
2TR OUT
ON
Meter
BALANCE
L
R
R
L
ST
Dither
RL
ST
DA
Dynamics Delay
Dynamics Delay
DA
4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
EFFAUX
121234
BUS
4321
OUT
OUT
STEREO
STEREO
DIGITAL
Meter
Aux Sends 93
01V—Owner’s Manual
Aux Sends
9
In this chapter...
About the Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Option I/O & the Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Omni Outs & the Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Monitoring Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Metering Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sending Channel Signals to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Pre-fader/Post-fader Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Viewing Aux Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting Aux Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Muting Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Applying EQ to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Aux Send Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pairing Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Aux Send Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Stereo Pair Aux Send Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
94 Chapter 9—Aux Sends
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the Aux Sends
The 01V’s four aux sends, which can be used individually or in stereo pairs, feature
four-band parametric EQ and dynamics processors. Signals from input channels 1
through 16 and the effects returns can be sent to aux sends 1 through 4, while those
from input channels 17 through 24 can be sent to aux sends 1 and 2. Channel aux sends
can be configured individually as pre-fader or post-fader sends. The 01V does not have
dedicated aux send connections. Instead aux sends must be assigned to the Option I/O
digital outputs or omni outs.
The 01V does not have dedicated aux return inputs. Use the input channels to return
aux signals. Stereo return signals can be connected to input channels 13/14 and 15/16.
The onboard effects are explained in their own chapter. See “Effects” on page 119 for
more information.
Option I/O & the Aux Sends
Aux send signals can be assigned to the Option I/O digital outputs. See “About Option
I/O Cards” on page 216 for more information.
Omni Outs & the Aux Sends
Aux send signals can be assigned to the omni outs. See “Assigning Omni Outs” on page
116 for more information.
Monitoring Aux Sends
Aux sends can be monitored using the monitor out or phones. See “Monitor Setup” on
page 78 for more information.
Metering Aux Sends
Aux send signal levels can be metered on the HOME pages. See “Metering Signal Lev-
els” on page 83 for more information.
Sending Channel Signals to Aux Sends 95
01V—Owner’s Manual
Sending Channel Signals to Aux Sends
Signals from input channels 1 through 16 and the effects returns can be sent to aux
sends 1 through 4, while those from input channels 17 through 24 can be sent to aux
sends 1 and 2.
For Input Channels 1–16
1. Use the [AUX] buttons to select an aux send.
The faders now function as channel aux send controls for the selected aux send, and an
AUX page similar to the one shown below appears.
2. Raise the fader of the channel you want to send to the aux send.
If the aux send is configured post-fader (“Pre-fader/Post-fader Aux Sends” on page 97),
you’ll have to raise the channel’s regular fader as well. To do this, press the [HOME]
button, and then raise the fader.
The aux send controls on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are perma-
nently linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Channels”
on page 52), their aux send controls are linked.
For Input Channels 17–24
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 2, as shown below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select an AUX fader, and the PARAMETER wheel
or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set the send level.
If the aux send is configured post-fader (“Pre-fader/Post-fader Aux Sends” on page 97),
you’ll have to raise the channel’s regular fader as well. If the Option I/O fader mode is
still selected, simply raise the fader.
96 Chapter 9—Aux Sends
01V—Owner’s Manual
For Effects Returns 1 & 2
1. Use the [AUX] buttons to select an aux send.
The effects returns rotary controls now function as effects returns aux send controls for
the selected aux send, and an AUX page similar to the one shown below appears.
2. Turn up the rotary control of the effects return you want to send to the
aux send.
If the aux send is configured post-fader (“Pre-fader/Post-fader Aux Sends” on page 97),
you’ll have to raise the effects returns regular control as well. To do this, press the
[HOME] button, and then turn up the rotary control.
Pre-fader/Post-fader Aux Sends 97
01V—Owner’s Manual
Pre-fader/Post-fader Aux Sends
The aux sends on input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be configured
individually as pre-fader or post-fader sends. Pre-fader means that signals are sourced
before, and are not affected by the regular channel fader. Post-fader means that signals
are sourced after, and are affected by the regular channel fader. With a post-fader send,
the regular channel fader can be used to control the channel level and the aux send level
simultaneously.
For Input Channels 1–16 & the Effects Returns
1. Use the [AUX] buttons to locate an AUX PRE/POST page, as shown below.
The value below each PRE/POST switch indicates the position of the aux send fader.
The position of the corresponding aux send master fader is displayed at the top of the
page.
2. Use the [SEL] buttons or cursor buttons to select the PRE/POST switches,
and the [ENTER] button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC]
buttons to set them.
The PRE/POST switches on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are perma-
nently linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired, or when aux sends are
configured as stereo pairs (“Pairing Input Channels” on page 52), their PRE/POST
switches are linked.
For Input Channels 17–24
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 2, as shown below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the AUX PRE/POST switches, and the
PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
When aux 1 and 2 are paired (“Pairing Aux Sends” on page 101), the PRE/POST
switches are linked.
98 Chapter 9—Aux Sends
01V—Owner’s Manual
Viewing Aux Send Settings
Settings for the aux sends can be viewed, and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW
pages 1 and 2.
1. Use the [AUX] buttons to select an aux send, and then press the MASTER
[SEL] button.
AUX appears on the display, indicating that an aux send is selected.
2. Use the [VIEW] button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2, as shown below.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel, [–1/DEC], [+1/INC], and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
Parameters are explained in the following sections.
Setting Aux Send Master Levels 99
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting Aux Send Master Levels
Aux send master levels are controlled using the MASTER fader. The
function of this fader depends on the selected Fader mode. See “Fad-
ers (plus Return Rotary Controls)” on page 35 for more information.
1. Use the [AUX] buttons to select an aux send.
An AUX page similar to the one shown below appears.
The MASTER fader now functions as aux send master level control for the selected aux
send.
2. Use the MASTER fader to set the aux send master level.
The position of the aux send master fader is displayed at the top of the AUX PRE/POST
page.
When aux sends are paired (“Pairing Aux Sends” on page 101), their master faders are
linked.
The aux send master levels can be viewed and adjusted on the VIEW pages. See “View-
ing Aux Send Settings” on page 98 for more information.
STEREO
MASTER
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
100 Chapter 9—Aux Sends
01V—Owner’s Manual
Muting Aux Sends
Aux send masters can be muted using the MASTER [ON] button, which
lights up when an aux send is on. The function of this button depends on
the selected Fader mode. See “ON Buttons” on page 34 for more informa-
tion.
1. Use the [AUX] buttons to select an aux send.
An AUX page similar to the one shown below appears.
The MASTER [ON] button now functions as aux send master on/off switch for the
selected aux send.
2. Use the MASTER [ON] button to turn the aux send on or off.
When aux sends are paired (“Pairing Aux Sends” on page 101), their on switches are
linked.
The aux send master switches can be viewed and set on the VIEW pages. See “Viewing
Aux Send Settings” on page 98 for more information.
Applying EQ to Aux Sends
Each aux send features a four-band parametric EQ. See “EQ” on page 61 for more
information. The EQ can be turned on or off, and the EQ curve viewed on the VIEW
page. See “Viewing Aux Send Settings” on page 98 for more information.
Aux Send Dynamics Processors
Each aux send features a dynamics processor. See “Dynamics Processors” on page 161
for more information. The dynamics can be turned on or off, and the dynamics curve
viewed on the VIEW page. See “Viewing Aux Send Settings” on page 98 for more infor-
mation.
ON
Pairing Aux Sends 101
01V—Owner’s Manual
Pairing Aux Sends
Aux sends 1 and 2 and aux sends 3 and 4 can be paired together for stereo signal pro-
cessing. When paired, the EQ, dynamics, master faders, ON buttons, and monitors of
each aux send are set the same and linked for simultaneous control. In addition to the
linking of aux send master parameters, pairing also affects input channels 1 through 24
and the effects returns. For these channels, aux send controls and pre/post switches are
linked, and aux send panpots appear.
Making Aux Send Pairs
1. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 4, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select aux pair 1/2 or 3/4, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The following dialog box appears.
AUX 1 –> 2—Copy the settings of aux send 1 to aux send 2.
AUX 2 –> 1—Copy the settings of aux send 2 to aux send 1.
RESET BOTH—Reset both aux sends to their initial settings.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select a pairing mode, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The highlighted switch and STEREO label show that the aux sends
are now configured as a stereo pair.
Releasing Aux Send Pairs
1. On SETUP page 4, use the cursor buttons to select the paired aux switch,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
The following dialog box appears.
2. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The stereo pair is broken, and both aux sends operate independently.
102 Chapter 9—Aux Sends
01V—Owner’s Manual
Panning Channel Aux Sends
1. Use the [AUX 1] or [AUX 2] button to locate the AUX 1–2 Pan page, or
the [AUX 3] or [AUX 4] button to locate the AUX 3–4 Pan page.
When aux sends are not paired, the AUX PAN pages are empty, as shown below.
When aux sends are paired (“Making Aux Send Pairs” on page 101), the AUX PAN
pages contain panpots for input channels 1 through 16 and the effects returns, as shown
below.
2. Use the [SEL] buttons or cursor buttons to select the channel panpots,
and the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set
them.
For input channels 13/14, 15/16, and the effects returns, press the [SEL] buttons repeat-
edly to select the odd/left and even/right channels.
The INPUT PAN LINK option is used to link aux send panpots to their corresponding
channel panpots. When this option is on, pan settings made on the AUX PAN pages are
reflected on PAN/ROUT page 1 and vice versa. Also, the aux panpots are affected by the
INDIVIDUAL, GANG, and INV. GANG pan modes on PAN/ROUT page 1.
Including center, there are 33 pan positions.
Input channels 1 through 12 feature a single panpot, as shown here.
Input channels 13/14 and 15/16 and the effects returns feature dual pan-
pots, with the inner panpots being the odd/left channel pans and the outer
panpots being the even/right channel pans. When working with stereo sig-
nals, these dual panpots can be used to adjust the width of stereo signals, as
shown below.
With the inner control set at L16 and the outer control set at R16, as shown
here, the width of a stereo signal is 100%.
With both controls set at CENTER, as shown here, the width of the stereo
signal is zero (i.e., mono).
L16←···←L3←L2←L1←CENTER→R1→R2→R3→···→R16
Hard left Center Hard right
Pairing Aux Sends 103
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting the controls to positions in between these two extremes allows you
to set the width of the stereo signal. To maintain a central balance, however,
you must set both controls to corresponding values. For example, L8 and
R8, or L10 and R10.
104 Chapter 9—Aux Sends
01V—Owner’s Manual
Aux Send Block Diagram
to
MONITOR
LR
MONI
LISTEN
AUX 1
AUX 1
AUX 1
master fader
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
Meter
ON
Meter
RL
ST
Dynamics
4-Band
PEQ
Meter
LISTEN
AUX 2
AUX 2
AUX 2
master fader
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
Meter
ON
Meter
Dynamics
4-Band
PEQ
Meter
LISTEN
AUX 3
AUX 3
AUX 3
master fader
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
Meter
ON
Meter
Dynamics
4-Band
PEQ
Meter
LISTEN
AUX 4
AUX 4
AUX 4
master fader
OUTPUT
SELECT
to
Meter
ON
Meter
Dynamics
4-Band
PEQ
Meter
EFFAUX
121234
BUS
4321
Stereo Pair Aux Send Block Diagram 105
01V—Owner’s Manual
Stereo Pair Aux Send Block Diagram
Unchanged
Unchanged
EFF1, 2
CH INPUT 14, 16
CH INPUT 13, 15
4-Band
PEQ
PEQ
4-Band
PAN*
ON
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
Unchanged
ON PAN*
AUX 2
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 1
CH INPUT 1-12
RL
STEFFAUX
121234
BUS
4321
Meter
ON
LISTEN
LISTEN
Meter
Unchanged
Unchanged
4-Band
PEQ Dynamics
Meter
Meter Meter
Dynamics
PEQ
4-Band
CH Fader
CH Fader
AUX1/2
AUX1/2
AUX1/2
AUX3
AUX3
AUX3
AUX4
EFF1
EFF2
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
PAN
AUX1/2 PAN
AUX1/2 PAN
AUX1/2 PAN
*PAN: INDIVIDUAL/GANG/INV. GANG
EFF RTN
Rotary
AUX 1/2
master fader
AUX 4
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 3
Meter
ON
ON
LISTEN
LISTEN
Meter
Unchanged
Unchanged
4-Band
PEQ Dynamics
Meter
Meter Meter
Dynamics
PEQ
4-Band
AUX 3
master fader
AUX 4
master fader
Aux send panpots are available on input channels
1 through 16 when aux sends are paired.
In this diagram, aux sends 1 and 2 are paired.
Bus Outs 107
01V—Owner’s Manual
Bus Outs
10
In this chapter...
About the Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Option I/O & the Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Omni Outs & the Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Monitoring Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Metering Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Routing Signals to the Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Setting Bus Out Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Muting Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Routing Bus Signals to the Stereo Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Pairing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Bus Out Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Stereo Pair Bus Out Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
108 Chapter 10—Bus Outs
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the Bus Outs
The 01V’s four bus outs can be used individually or in stereo pairs. Signals from input
channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be routed to bus outs 1 through 4. See
“Routing Input Channels” on page 49 for more information. The 01V does not have
dedicated bus out connections. Instead bus outs must be assigned to the Option I/O
digital outputs or omni outs.
Option I/O & the Bus Outs
Bus out signals can be assigned to the Option I/O digital outputs. See “About Option
I/O Cards” on page 216 for more information.
Omni Outs & the Bus Outs
Bus out signals can be assigned to the omni outs. See “Assigning Omni Outs” on page
116 for more information.
Monitoring Bus Outs
Bus outs can be monitored using the monitor out or phones. See “Monitor Setup” on
page 78 for more information.
Metering Bus Outs
Bus out signal levels can be metered on the HOME pages. See “Metering Signal Levels”
on page 83 for more information.
Routing Signals to the Bus Outs
Signals from input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be routed to bus
outs 1 through 4. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 49 and “Routing Effects
Returns” on page 131 for more information.
Setting Bus Out Master Levels 109
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting Bus Out Master Levels
Bus out master levels are controlled using the virtual faders on PAN/ROUT page 3.
1. Use the [PAN/ROUTING] button to locate PAN/ROUT page 3, a shown
below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the bus out master faders, and the
PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
When bus outs are paired (“Pairing Bus Outs” on page 111), their master faders are
linked.
Bus out master levels can be controlled using regular faders on REMOTE page 1. See
“Assigning Faders & On Buttons” on page 194 for more information.
Muting Bus Outs
Bus outs are muted using the virtual ON switches on PAN/ROUT page 3.
1. Use the [PAN/ROUTING] button to locate PAN/ROUT page 3, a shown
below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the bus out ON switches, and the [ENTER]
button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set
them.
When bus outs are paired (“Pairing Bus Outs” on page 111), their ON switches are
linked.
Bus outs can be muted using regular [ON] buttons on REMOTE page 1. See “Assigning
Faders & On Buttons” on page 194 for more information.
110 Chapter 10—Bus Outs
01V—Owner’s Manual
Routing Bus Signals to the Stereo Bus
The bus outs can be routed to the Stereo bus and used as sub-groups during mixdown.
Initially odd bus outs are panned to the left and even bus outs to right.
1. Use the [PAN/ROUTING] button to locate PAN/ROUT page 3, a shown
below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the TO ST switches, and the [ENTER] but-
ton, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to turn them
on.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the panpots, and the PARAMETER wheel
or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
Including center, there are 33 pan positions.
L16←···←L3←L2←L1←CENTER→R1→R2→R3→···→R16
Hard left Center Hard right
Pairing Bus Outs 111
01V—Owner’s Manual
Pairing Bus Outs
Bus outs 1 and 2 and bus outs 3 and 4 can be paired together for stereo signal process-
ing. When paired, the master faders and ON buttons are linked for simultaneous con-
trol.
Making Bus Out Pairs
1. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 4, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select bus pair 1/2 or 3/4, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The following dialog box appears.
BUS 1 –> 2—Copy the settings of bus out 1 to bus out 2.
BUS 2 –> 1—Copy the settings of bus out 2 to bus out 1.
RESET BOTH—Reset both bus outs to their initial settings.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select a pairing mode, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The highlighted switch and STEREO label show that the bus outs
are now configured as a stereo pair.
Releasing Bus Out Pairs
1. On SETUP page 4, use the cursor buttons to select the paired bus switch,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
The following dialog box appears.
2. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The stereo pair is broken, and both bus outs operate independently.
112 Chapter 10—Bus Outs
01V—Owner’s Manual
Bus Out Block Diagram
LISTEN
BUS 1
Meter BUS 1
master fader
Meter
ON
BUS 1
TO ST
to SELECT
OUTPUT
RL
ST
PAN
LISTEN
BUS 2
Meter BUS 2
master fader
Meter
ON
BUS 2
TO ST
to SELECT
OUTPUT
PAN
LISTEN
BUS 3
Meter BUS 3
master fader
Meter
ON
BUS 3
TO ST
to SELECT
OUTPUT
PAN
LISTEN
BUS 4
Meter BUS 4
master fader
Meter
ON
BUS 4
TO ST
to SELECT
OUTPUT
PAN
EFFAUX
121234
BUS
4321
to
MONITOR
LR
MONI
Stereo Pair Bus Out Block Diagram 113
01V—Owner’s Manual
Stereo Pair Bus Out Block Diagram
Meter
PAN
PAN
TO ST ON
LISTEN
LISTEN
TO ST
BUS 2
BUS 1
Meter
Meter Meter
BUS 1
Unchanged
BUS 2
Unchanged
1234
BUS
432121
AUX EFF ST
LR BUS 1
master fader
BUS 2
master fader
Meter
PAN
PAN
TO ST ON
LISTEN
LISTEN
TO ST
BUS 4
BUS 3
Meter
Meter Meter
BUS 3
Unchanged
BUS 4
Unchanged
BUS 3
master fader
BUS 4
master fader
In this diagram, bus outs 1 and 2 are paired.
Omni Outs 115
01V—Owner’s Manual
Omni Outs
11
In this chapter...
About the Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Assigning Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Omni Out Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Omni Out Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
116 Chapter 11—Omni Outs
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the Omni Outs
The 01V’s four omni outs can be used as aux send outputs, bus out outputs, additional
stereo outputs, or post-fader direct outputs for input channels 1 through 16. Each omni
out features a variable output delay of up to 300 milliseconds.
Omni Outs
Omni out signals are converted to analog
using 18-bit D/A converters, and then output
via balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks with a
+4 dB nominal output level.
Assigning Omni Outs
Omni outs are initially assigned to aux sends 1 through 4. They can also be assigned to
the bus outs, the left and right channels of the stereo output, or post-fader direct out-
puts of input channels 1 through 16.
1. Use the [PAN/ROUTING] button to locate PAN/ROUT page 4, a shown
below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the OMNI OUT parameter boxes, and
the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select
sources for the omni outs.
3. Press the [ENTER] button to confirm your selection.
OMNI OUT
+4dB (BAL)
3421
Omni Out Delay 117
01V—Owner’s Manual
Omni Out Delay
The omni outs can be delayed individually by up to 300 milliseconds. This can be used
to compensate for delays in multi-speaker sound reinforcement systems.
1. Use the [∅/DELAY] button to locate DELAY page 4, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the delay parameters and the [ENTER]
button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set
them.
Parameter Range Description
ON/OFF ON/OFF These switches are used to turn on and off the delays.
DELAY 0–300 ms
Delay can be specified in milliseconds, meters, or samples
(“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203). The maximum
delay in samples is fixed at 13229. The maximum delay in
milliseconds and meters depends on the sampling rate. At
44.1 kHz, for example, it is 300 milliseconds and 102.2
meters, respectively.
118 Chapter 11—Omni Outs
01V—Owner’s Manual
Omni Out Block Diagram
from OMNI
1-4 OUT
DA
Delay
BUS 1
BUS 4
AUX 1
AUX 4
CH 1
CH 2
CH 15
STEREO L
STEREO R
CH 16
OMNI OUT
Select
Effects 119
01V—Owner’s Manual
Effects
12
In this chapter...
About the Onboard Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preset Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using the Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pre-fader/Post-fader Effects Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Viewing Effects Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Setting Effects Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Metering Effects Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Muting Effects Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Viewing Effects Returns Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Metering Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Applying EQ to Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Muting Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting Effects Returns Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Panning Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Routing Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Monitoring Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Effects Returns & Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Storing Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Recalling Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Editing Effects Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Setting Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Effects Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
120 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the Onboard Effects
The 01V’s two onboard stereo multi-effects processors, Effect 1 and Effect 2, provide a
wide range of high-quality effects, including reverb, delay, chorus, flange, amp simula-
tor, and freeze. There are 42 different types of effect available. Effects processors 1 and
2 are fed by Effect buses 1 and 2, respectively, and processed signals are returned via
effect returns 1 and 2. Effects can be applied to input channels 1 through 24 and the
effects returns.
Effects settings are stored as programs in the effects library, which contains 42 preset
programs and 57 user programs. See “Effects Library” on page 132 for more informa-
tion. Effects settings are also stored in scene memories. See “Storing Mix Scenes” on
page 186 for more information.
Effects processors are edited on EFFECT1 page 1, as shown below, and EFFECT2 page
2. Use the [EFFECT 1] button to locate the EFFECT1 pages and the [EFFECT 2] button
to locate the EFFECT2 pages. When EFFECT1 pages are selected, the effects return 1
level icon is highlighted, as shown below. When EFFECT2 pages are selected, the effects
return 2 level icon is highlighted.
The title of the selected program and the type of effect it uses appear at the top of the
page. Below these are the effects parameters, the number of which vary depending on
the type of effect selected. The type of effect is displayed above the effects returns level
control icons. On this page, Effect 1 is using a HALL reverb, while Effect 2 is using a
CHORUS effect. Up and down arrow icons, like the down icon on this page, indicate
that more parameters are available and can be selected using the up and down cursor
buttons. The meters indicate effects returns signal levels for the selected effects proces-
sor.
Preset Effects Programs 121
01V—Owner’s Manual
Preset Effects Programs
The following table lists the preset effects programs. See “Effects Parameters” on
page 138 for detailed parameter information. Effects programs that use the HQ.
PITCH or FREEZE type effects can be used only with Effect 2.
Reverb-type Effects
Delays
Modulation-type Effects
# Title Type Description
01 Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Reverb simulating a large space such as a concert
hall.
02 Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a smaller space
(room) than REVERB HALL.
03 Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed with vocals in mind.
04 Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Simulation of a metal-plate reverb unit, producing a
feeling of hard-edged reverberation.
05 Early Ref. EARLY REF.
An effect which isolates only the early reflection (ER)
component from reverberation. A flashier effect than
reverb is produced.
06 Gate Reverb GATE REVERB A type of ER designed for use as gated reverb.
07 Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE A reverse-playback type ER.
# Title Type Description
08 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Mono delay with simple operation. Use when you
don't need to use complex parameter settings.
09 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Stereo delay with independent left and right.
10 Mod.delay MOD.DELAY Mono delay with modulation.
11 Delay LCR DELAY LCR Three-tap delay (L, C, R).
12 Echo ECHO
Stereo delay with additional parameters for more
detailed control. The signal can be fed back from left
to right, and right to left.
# Title Type Description
13 Chorus CHORUS Three-phase stereo chorus.
14 Flange FLANGE The well-known flanging effect.
15 Symphonic SYMPHONIC A Yamaha proprietary effect that produces a richer
and more complex modulation than chorus.
16 Phaser PHASER Stereo phaser with 2–16 stages of phase shift.
17 Auto Pan AUTO PAN An effect which cyclically moves the sound between
left and right.
18 Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo
19 HQ.Pitch HQ.PITCH Only one note is pitch-shifted, but a stable effect is
produced.
20 Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shift with left and right pitches set
independently.
21 Rotary ROTARY Simulation of a rotary speaker.
122 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
Guitar Effects
Dynamic Effects
Combined Effects
Other Effects
22 Ring Mod. RING MOD.
An effect that modifies the pitch by applying
amplitude modulation to the frequency of the input.
On the 01V, even the modulation frequency can be
controlled by modulation.
23 Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER An effect which uses an LFO to modulate the
frequency of the filter.
# Title Type Description
24 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion
25 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar Amp Simulator
# Title Type Description
26 Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter. Responds to MIDI Note
On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.
27 Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger. Responds to MIDI
Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.
28 Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter. Responds to
MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.
# Title Type Description
29 Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel
30 Rev->Chorus REV->CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series
31 Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel
32 Rev->Flange REV->FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series
33 Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel
34 Rev->Sympho. REV->SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series
35 Rev->Pan REV->PAN Reverb and auto-pan in parallel
36 Delay+ER. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel
37 Delay->ER. DELAY->ER. Delay and early reflections in series
38 Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel
39 Delay->Rev DELAY->REV Delay and reverb in series
40 Dist->Delay DIST->DELAY Distortion and delay in series
# Title Type Description
41 Multi.Filter MULTI.FILTER
Three-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave). Easily setup
when used with the Internal Parameter function on
REMOTE page 1 (see page 194).
42 Freeze FREEZE Basic Sampler
# Title Type Description
Using the Effects 123
01V—Owner’s Manual
Using the Effects
There are two stages to applying effects: 1) Sending the input channel signal to an effects
processor. 2) Returning the processed signal back into the mix. The following three sec-
tions explain how to send signals from input channels 1 through 16, 17 through 24, and
the effects returns to effects processors. The final section explains how to return the
processed signal back into the mix.
For Input Channels 1–16
1. Press the [HOME] button, and then raise the fader of the channel to
which you want to apply an effect.
This step is necessary because effects sends are initially configured as post-fader sends.
If the channel fader is not raised, no signal is fed to the effects sends. See
“Pre-fader/Post-fader Effects Sends” on page 125 for more information.
2. Press the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to select an effects processor.
An EFFECT page similar to the one shown below appears, and faders now function as
effects send controls.
3. Raise the channel’s fader (i.e., effects send level control).
This sends the channel signal to the selected effects processor. The effects return meters
display the level of the effects return signal.
Since each effects processor has a mono input, the signals of input channels 13 and 14
(likewise 15 and 16) are summed into a mono mix before being fed to an effects pro-
cessor. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Channels” on
page 52), their effects send controls are linked.
For Input Channels 17–24
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 2, as shown below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Raise the fader of the channel to which you want to apply an effect.
This step is necessary because effects sends are initially configured as post-fader sends.
If the channel fader is not raised, no signal is fed to the effects sends. See
“Pre-fader/Post-fader Effects Sends” on page 125 for more information.
124 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
4. Use the cursor buttons to select an EFFECT fader, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set the effects send level.
For Effects Returns 1 & 2
To prevent signal loops, effects return 1 can be fed only to Effect 2, and effects return 2
can be fed only to Effect 1.
1. Press the [HOME] button, and then turn up the RETURN level control of
the effects return to which you want to apply an effect.
This step is necessary because effects sends are initially configured as post-fader sends.
If the channel fader is not raised, no signal is fed to the effects sends. See
“Pre-fader/Post-fader Effects Sends” on page 125 for more information.
2. Press the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to select an effects processor.
An EFFECT page similar to the one shown below appears, and effects returns rotary
controls now function as effects returns effects send controls.
3. Turn up the effects return RETURN level control (i.e., effects send level
control).
This sends the effects return signal to the selected effects processor. The effects return
meters display the level of the effects return signal.
Returning Processed Signals
The final stage to applying effects is to return the processed signal back into the mix.
1. Press the [HOME] button.
Faders now function as regular channels faders.
2. Turn up the effects return control corresponding to the effect that you
are using: Return 1 for Effect 1, Return 2 for Effect 2.
The processed signal is returned into the mix.
3. Set the EQ, pan, and so on for the effects return channel.
Effects programs can be recalled from the effects library. See “Recalling Effects Pro-
grams” on page 134 for more information.
Pre-fader/Post-fader Effects Sends 125
01V—Owner’s Manual
Pre-fader/Post-fader Effects Sends
Effects sends on input channels 1 through 24 and effects returns 1 and 2 can be config-
ured as either pre-fader or post-fader sends. Pre-fader means that signals are sourced
before, and are not affected by the regular channel fader. Post-fader means that signals
are sourced after, and are affected by the regular channel fader. With a post-fader send,
the regular channel fader can be used to control the channel level and the effects send
level simultaneously.
For Input Channels 1–16 & the Effects Returns
1. Use the [EFFECT 1] button to locate the PRE/POST page for Effect 1, or
the [EFFECT 2] button to locate the PRE/POST page for Effect 2.
Both pages are shown below.
The value below each PRE/POST switch indicates the position of the effects send fader.
The position of the corresponding effects send master fader is displayed at the top of the
page.
To prevent signal loops, effects return 1 can be fed only to Effect 2, and effects return 2
can be fed only to Effect 1. This is why EFFECT1 page 3 does not have a PRE/POST
switch for effect 1, and EFFECT2 page 3 does not have a PRE/POST switch for effect 2.
2. Use the [SEL] buttons or cursor buttons to select the PRE/POST switches,
and the [ENTER] button, PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC]
buttons to set them.
The PRE/POST switches on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are perma-
nently linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Channels”
on page 52), their PRE/POST switches are linked.
126 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
For Input Channels 17–24
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 2, as shown below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 17 through 24 to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the EFFECT PRE/POST switches, and the
PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
Viewing Effects Send Settings 127
01V—Owner’s Manual
Viewing Effects Send Settings
Settings for the effects sends can be viewed, and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW
pages 1 and 2.
1. Use the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to select an effects send, and
then press the MASTER [SEL] button.
EFF1 or EFF2 appears on the display, indicating that an effects send is selected.
2. Use the [VIEW] button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2, as shown below.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel, [–1/DEC], [+1/INC], and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
Parameters are explained in the following sections.
Metering Effects Sends
Effects sends signal levels can be metered on the VIEW pages. See “Viewing Effects Send
Settings” on page 127 for more information.
128 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting Effects Send Master Levels
Effects send master levels are controlled using the MASTER fader. The
function of this fader depends on the selected Fader mode. See “Fad-
ers (plus Return Rotary Controls)” on page 35 for more information.
1. Use the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to select an effects send.
An EFFECT page similar to the one shown below appears.
The MASTER fader now functions as effects send master level control for the selected
effects send.
2. Use the MASTER fader to set the effects send master level.
The position of the effects send master fader is displayed at the top of the EFFECT
PRE/POST page.
The effects send master levels can be viewed and adjusted on the VIEW pages. See
“Viewing Effects Send Settings” on page 127 for more information.
STEREO
MASTER
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
Muting Effects Sends 129
01V—Owner’s Manual
Muting Effects Sends
Effects send masters can be muted using the MASTER [ON] button, which
lights up when an effects send is on. The function of this button depends
on the selected Fader mode. See “ON Buttons” on page 34 for more infor-
mation.
1. Use the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to select an effects send.
An EFFECT page similar to the one shown below appears.
The MASTER [ON] button now functions as effects send master on/off switch for the
selected effects send.
2. Use the MASTER [ON] button to turn the effects send on or off.
The effects send master switches can be viewed and set on the VIEW pages. See “View-
ing Effects Send Settings” on page 127 for more information.
ON
130 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
Viewing Effects Returns Settings
Settings for the effects returns can be viewed, and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW
pages 1 and 2.
1. Use the effects returns [SEL] button to select an effects returns.
RTN1 or RTN2 appears on the display, indicating that an effects return is selected.
2. Use the [VIEW] button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2, as shown below.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel, [–1/DEC], [+1/INC], and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
Parameters are explained in the following sections.
Metering Effects Returns
Effects returns signal levels can be metered on the EFFECT and VIEW pages. See “Using
the Effects” on page 123 and “Viewing Effects Returns Settings” on page 130.
Applying EQ to Effects Returns
Effects returns feature four-band parametric EQ. See “EQ” on page 61 for more infor-
mation. The EQ can be turned on or off, and the EQ curve viewed on the VIEW page.
See “Viewing Effects Returns Settings” on page 130 for more information.
Muting Effects Returns
Effects returns can be turned on and off (i.e., muted) using the effects returns
[ON] buttons. When an effects returns is on, its [ON] button lights up.
ON
Setting Effects Returns Levels 131
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting Effects Returns Levels
Effects return levels are controlled using the effects return
rotary controls.
To adjust the level of an effects return, press the [HOME] but-
ton, and then use the rotary controls.
Rotary control operation depends on the selected Fader mode.
See “Faders (plus Return Rotary Controls)” on page 35 for
more information. The selected fader mode is shown on the
display. See “Display” on page 28 for more information.
Panning Effects Returns
Effects return panpots are used to pan signals between the left and right channels of the
stereo out, and the odd and even bus outs. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 47
for more information.
Routing Effects Returns
Effects returns can be routed to the four buses and stereo out. See “Routing Input Chan-
nels” on page 49 for more information.
Monitoring Effects Returns
Effects returns can be monitored using the monitor out or phones. See “Monitor Setup”
on page 78 for more information.
Effects Returns & Aux Sends
Signals from effects returns 1 and 2 can be sent to aux sends 1 through 4. Effects return
sends can be configured as either pre-fader or post-fader sends. When aux sends are
paired, aux send panpots become available on each effects return. See “Aux Sends” on
page 93 for more information.
1 RETURN 2
132 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
Effects Library
Effects settings are stored as programs in the effects library, which contains 42 preset
programs (1–42) and 57 user programs (43–99). User programs are used to store cus-
tom effects settings, which can be titled for easy identification. The effects library can
also be used to transfer settings from one effects processor to another. For example, the
Effect 1 settings could be stored as a library program and then recalled to Effect 2. The
unique collection of preset effects programs is designed for specific applications and
instruments, and provides a good reference and starting point when using the effects
processors. See page 121 for a complete list of the preset effects programs.
The effects library is controlled from the library page shown below. Use the [EFFECT
1] or [EFFECT 2] button to locate it. Although the effects library can be accessed using
either button, the effects library is in fact common to both effects processors. When the
library page is selected using the [EFFECT 1] button, store and recall operations affect
Effect 1. When the library page is selected using the [EFFECT 2] button, store and recall
operations affect Effect 2.
The top half of the library page contains the STORE, RECALL, and TITLE EDIT
switches. Below these is the library window, which can be scrolled using the PARAME-
TER wheel. The “R” icon next to a preset program means read only. The meters indicate
effects returns signal levels for the selected effects processor.
Storing Effects Programs 133
01V—Owner’s Manual
Storing Effects Programs
Custom effects settings can be stored in user programs 43 through 99.
1. Use the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to locate the library page, as
shown below.
To store the effects settings of Effect 1, use the [EFFECT 1] button to locate the library
page. To store the effects settings of Effect 2, use the [EFFECT 2] button.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a
user program from 43 through 99.
The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer-
ences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203).
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the STORE switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The Title Edit dialog box appears. If the STORE CONFIRMATION option is turned off
in the preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203), the Title Edit dialog box
does not appear and the effects program is stored.
4. Title the effects program.
See “Title Edit Dialog Box” on page 37 for more information.
5. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The effects program is stored.
134 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
Recalling Effects Programs
Effects programs 1 through 99 can be recalled. Programs that use the HQ. PITCH or
FREEZE effects can be recalled only to Effect 2.
1. Use the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to locate the Library page, as
shown below.
To recall an effects program to Effect 1, use the [EFFECT 1] button to locate the library
page. To recall an effects program to Effect 2, use the [EFFECT 2] button.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select
programs.
As each program is selected its type is displayed.
The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer-
ences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203).
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the RECALL switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The effects program is recalled. If the RECALL CONFIRMATION option is turned on
in the preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203), a confirmation dialog box
appears. In this case, select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button to confirm the
recall.
Editing Effects Program Titles 135
01V—Owner’s Manual
Editing Effects Program Titles
User program titles can be edited using the Title Edit function.
1. Use the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to locate the library page, as
shown below.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a
user program from 43 through 99.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT switch, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
4. Edit the program title.
See “Title Edit Dialog Box” on page 37 for more information.
5. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The program is stored with its new title.
136 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
Editing Effects
Effects programs can be edited, and then stored as user programs.
1. Press the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] button to locate EFFECT1 page 1 or
EFFECT2 page 1, depending on which effect you want to edit.
EFFECT1 page 1 is shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the effects parameters, and the PARAM-
ETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
Up and down arrow icons, like the down icon on this page, indicate that more param-
eters are available and can be selected using the up and down cursor buttons.
Effects parameters, including variable range and description, are listed on page 138.
To store the edited program, see “Storing Effects Programs” on page 133.
Setting Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters 137
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters
Delay parameters can be set manually by entering the delay time in milliseconds, or
automatically by entering the NOTE and TEMPO parameters. For example, with the
TEMPO set to 120 beats per minute and NOTE set to eighth note, the delay is automat-
ically set to 250 milliseconds, as shown below. With the TEMPO still at 120 beats per
minute, changing the DELAY to 500.0 milliseconds would automatically set the NOTE
parameter to quarter note. Similarly, changing the NOTE parameter to sixteenth note
would automatically set the DELAY parameter to 125.5 milliseconds. If the TEMPO
parameter is changed, the DELAY parameter is automatically recalculated.
The TEMPO can be set from 25 to 300 beats per minute, although the range may be
reduced if the DELAY parameter calculation exceeds the maximum delay time.
The FREQ. parameter for modulation-type effects can also be set either manually or
automatically. For example, with the TEMPO set to 120 beats per minute and NOTE
set to quarter note, the FREQ. is automatically set to 2.00 hertz, as shown below. With
the TEMPO still at 120 beats per minute, changing the FREQ. to 4.00 hertz would auto-
matically set the NOTE parameter to eighth note. Similarly, changing the NOTE
parameter to sixteenth note would automatically set the FREQ. parameter to 8.00 hertz.
If the TEMPO parameter is changed, the FREQ. parameter is automatically recalcu-
lated.
The TEMPO can be set from 25 to 300 beats per minute, although the range may be
reduced if the FREQ. parameter calculation exceeds the maximum frequency.
The TEMPO parameter can be entered manually or by using the Tap Tempo function.
To use Tap Tempo, select the TAP TEMPO switch, and then press the [ENTER] button
on each beat. The TEMPO is calculated automatically based on the time between each
button press.
Only the DELAY and FREQ. parameters can be controlled by using MIDI Control
Change and System Exclusive Parameter Change messages.
138 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB
PLATE
Hall, room, stage, and plate simulations, all with gates.
EARLY REF.
Early reflections.
1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO.RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = ER,
100% = reverb)
GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed
HOLD *1 Gate open time
DECAY *2 Gate closing speed
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter Range Description
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall,
Random, Revers,
Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 =
live)
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections
FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Effects Parameters 139
01V—Owner’s Manual
GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
Early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
MONO DELAY
Basic repeat delay.
1. (Maximum value depends
on the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 =
live)
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections
FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter Range Description
DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine DELAY
140 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
STEREO DELAY
Basic stereo delay.
MOD.DELAY
Basic repeat delay with modulation.
1. (Maximum value depends on
the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1. (Maximum value depends
on the tempo setting)
2.
3. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left
channel DELAY
FB.G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right
channel DELAY
FB.G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE L and NOTE R to
determine DELAY
Parameter Range Description
DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time
DLY NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
MOD
NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*3 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with DLY NOTE and MOD NOTE
to determine DELAY and FREQ.
Effects Parameters 141
01V—Owner’s Manual
DELAY LCR
Three-tap delay (left, center, right).
1. (Maximum value depends
on the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
L
LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level
DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time
NOTE C *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
C
LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level
DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
R
LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level
FB.DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time
NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine
FB.DLY
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to
determine DELAY L, DELAY C, DELAY R, and FB.DLY
142 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
ECHO
Stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
CHORUS
Chorus effect.
1. (Maximum value depends on
the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
L
FB.G L –99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
R
FB.G R –99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
FB.D L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time
NOTE FBL *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.D L
L->R FB.G –99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
FB.D R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time
NOTE FBR *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.D R
R->L FB.G –99 to +99%
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to
determine DELAY L, DELAY R, FB.D L, and FB.D R
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Effects Parameters 143
01V—Owner’s Manual
FLANGE
Flange effect.
SYMPHONIC
Symphonic efect.
PHASER
16-stage phaser.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
STAGE 2, 4, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
144 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
AUTOPAN
Auto-panner.
TREMOLO
Tremolo effect.
HQ.PITCH (Effect 2 only)
High-quality pitch shifter.
1.
2. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R
3. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1. (Maximum value depends on
the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
DIR. *2 Panning direction
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
TEMPO*3 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift
FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine
MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision
DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine DELAY
Effects Parameters 145
01V—Owner’s Manual
DUAL PITCH
Twin-voice pitch shifter.
ROTARY
Rotary speaker simulator.
1. (Maximum value depends on
the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
PITCH L –24 to +24 semitones Left channel pitch shift
FINE L –50 to +50 cents Left channel pitch shift fine
LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel level (plus values for normal phase,
minus values for reverse phase)
PITCH R –24 to +24 semitones Right channel pitch shift
FINE R –50 to +50 cents Right channel pitch shift fine
LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel level (plus values for normal phase,
minus values for reverse phase)
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
L
FB.G L –99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
R
FB.G R –99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to
determine DELAY L and DELAY R
Parameter Range Description
ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start
SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level
ACCEL 0–10 Accelation at speed changes
LOW 0–100 Low-frequency filter
HIGH 0–100 High-frequency filter
SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed
FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed
146 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
RING MOD.
Ring modulator.
MOD.FILTER
LFO modulation-type filter.
DISTORTION
Distortion effect.
1.
2. For more information about the FM FREQ., NOTE FM, and TEMPO parameters, see
“Setting Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
OSC FREQ 0.0–3000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency
FM FREQ 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed
NOTE FM *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM
FREQ
FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE FM to determine FM
FREQ
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset
RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance
PHASE 0.00–354.38°Left-channel modulation and right-channel
modulation phase difference
LEVEL 0–100 Output level
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive
MASTER 0–100 Master volume
TONE –10 to +10 Tone
N.GATE 0–20 Noise reduction
Effects Parameters 147
01V—Owner’s Manual
AMP SIMULATE
Guitar Amp Simulator.
DYNA.FILTER
Dynamically controlled filter.
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger.
1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI,
FLAT
1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Parameter Range Description
AMP TYPE *1 Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
N.GATE 0–20 Noise reduction
DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive
MASTER 0–100 Master volume
CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth
BASS 0–100 Bass tone control
MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control
TREBLE 0–100 High tone control
EQ F 99–8.0 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency
EQ G –12 to +12 dB Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q 10.0–0.10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity
SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity
TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type
OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset
RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance
LEVEL 0–100 Output Level
DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY *1 Filter frequency change decay speed
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity
SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity
FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset
DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY *1 Decay speed
148 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
DYNA.PHASER
Dynamically controlled phaser.
REV+CHORUS
Reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48kHz)
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity
SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity
FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
STAGE 2, 4, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
DECAY *1 Decay speed
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = chorus, 100% =
reverb)
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Effects Parameters 149
01V—Owner’s Manual
REV->CHORUS
Reverb and chorus effects in series.
REV+FLANGE
Reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
REV BAL. 0–100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = chorused
reverb, 100% = reverb)
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = flange, 100% =
reverb)
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
150 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
REV->FLANGE
Reverb and flanger effects in series.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
REV BAL. 0–100% Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = flanged
reverb, 100% = reverb)
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
REV/SYM 0–100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = symphonic,
100% = reverb)
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Effects Parameters 151
01V—Owner’s Manual
REV->SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic effects in series.
REV->PAN
Reverb and auto-pan effects in parallel.
1.
2. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
1.
2. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R
3. For more information about the FREQ., NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
REV BAL. 0–100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% =
symphonic reverb, 100% = reverb)
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
DIR. *2 Panning direction
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
REV BAL. 0–100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = panned
reverb, 100% = reverb)
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru
Hz Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*3 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ.
152 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
1. (Maximum value depends
on the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left
channel DELAY L
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right
channel DELAY R
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
FB.DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine
FB.DLY
DLY/ER 0–100% Delay and early reflections balance (0% = early
reflections, 100% = delay)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall,
Random, Revers,
Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 =
live)
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to
determine DELAY L, DELAY R, and FB.DLY
Effects Parameters 153
01V—Owner’s Manual
DELAY->ER.
Delay and early reflections effects in series.
1. (Maximum value depends on
the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left
channel DELAY L
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right
channel DELAY R
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
FB.DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine
FB.DLY
DLY BAL. 0–100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = early
reflected delay, 100% = delay)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall,
Random, Revers,
Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 =
live)
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to
determine DELAY L, DELAY R, and FB.DLY
154 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
DELAY+REV
Delay and reverb effects in parallel.
1. (Maximum value depends on
the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left
channel DELAY L
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right
channel DELAY R
DLY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
FB.DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine
FB.DLY
DLY/REV 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = reverb, 100% =
delay)
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to
determine DELAY L, DELAY R, and FB.DLY
Effects Parameters 155
01V—Owner’s Manual
DELAY->REV
Delay and reverb effects in series.
1. (Maximum value depends on
the tempo setting)
2. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left
channel DELAY L
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right
channel DELAY R
DLY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
FB.DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine
FB.DLY
DLY BAL 0–100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = delayed
reverb, 100% = delay)
REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time
INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
HPF Thru, 21 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TEMPO*2 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to
determine DELAY L, DELAY R, and FB.DLY
156 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
DIST->DELAY
Distortion and delay effects in series.
MULTI FILTER
Three-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
1. (Maximum value depends
on the tempo setting)
2.
3. For more information about the DELAY, NOTE, and TEMPO parameters, see “Setting
Delay, Freq, Note & Tempo Parameters” on page 137.
Parameter Range Description
DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive
MASTER 0–100 Master volume
TONE –10 to +10 Tone control
N.GATE 0–20 Noise reduction
DLY BAL 0–100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = distortion, 100%
= delayed distortion)
DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time
DLY NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
MOD
NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
TEMPO*3 25–300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to
determine DELAY and FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
TYPE 1 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: low pass, high pass, band pass
TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: low pass, high pass, band pass
TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: low pass, high pass, band pass
FREQ. 1 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency
FREQ. 2 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency
FREQ. 3 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency
LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level
LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level
LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level
RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance
RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance
RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance
Effects Parameters 157
01V—Owner’s Manual
FREEZE (Effect 2 only)
Basic Sampler with 2.9 second memory.
To record and playback a sample
1. Send a channel signal to Effect 2, and then recall the Freeze effect.
See “Using the Effects” on page 123 and “Recalling Effects Programs” on page 134.
2. Use the [EFFECT 2] button to locate EFFECT 2 page 1, as shown below.
3. Select the (REC) switch, and then press the [ENTER] button. Note
that the previous sampler is deleted at this point.
The REC switch appears highlighted, and input signal can be heard.
1. 0.0–2972.1 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–2730.6 ms (fs=48 kHz)
Parameter Range Description
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing
the [ENTER] button. In INPUT mode, recording is
triggered by an input signal.
START *1 Playback start point in milliseconds
[SAMPLE] 0–131070 Playback start point in samples
PLY MODE MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays for the moment
that the [ENTER] button is pressed. In CONT. mode,
playback continues once the [ENTER] button has
been pressed. In INPUT mode, playback continues
once it’s been triggered by an input signal. The
number of times the sample plays is set using the
LOOP NUM parameter.
END *1 Playback end point in milliseconds
[SAMPLE] 0–131070 Playback end point in samples
LOOP
NUM 0–100 Number of times the sample plays
LOOP *1 Loop start point in milliseconds
[SAMPLE] 0–131070 Loop start point in samples
TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to
trigger recording or playback)
TRG DLY –1000 to +1000 ms
Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after
the trigger is received. For minus values, recording
starts before the trigger is received.
TRG MASK 0–1000 ms
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent
triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK
time.
MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL Sample playback can be triggered using MIDI Note
on/off messages.
PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift
FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine
158 Chapter 12—Effects
01V—Owner’s Manual
4. Select the (PLAY) switch, and press the [ENTER] button to start
recording.
The bar below the REC and PLAY switches fills up as recording progresses.
With the REC MODE is set to INPUT, recording starts automatically when an input
signal exceeds the TRG LVL.
5. To play back the sample, select the (PLAY) switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
With the PLY MODE is set to INPUT, playback starts automatically when an input sig-
nal exceeds the TRG LVL.
Use the PLY MODE parameters to set the type of playback, and the START, END, and
LOOP parameters to edit the sample.
Be aware that samples are lost when another type of effect is recalled or the 01V is
turned off.
Effects Block Diagram 159
01V—Owner’s Manual
Effects Block Diagram
Meter
PAN*
*PAN: INDIVIDUAL/GANG/INV. GANG
ON
EFF RTN 1
Rotary
Effect send 1
master fader
Effect send 2
master fader
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
EFF2
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
Internal
Effect 1
Meter 4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
Meter
PAN*
ON
EFF RTN 2
Rotary
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
EFF1
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
Internal
Effect 2
Meter 4-Band
PEQ
4-Band
PEQ
RL
STEFFAUX
121234
BUS
4321
ON
ON
Dynamics Processors 161
01V—Owner’s Manual
Dynamics Processors
13
In this chapter...
About the Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Preset Dynamics Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using the Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Editing the Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Processor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dynamics Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Storing Dynamics Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Recalling Dynamics Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Editing Dynamics Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Preset Dynamics Program Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
162 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the Dynamics Processors
Input channels 1 through 16, the aux sends, and the stereo output all feature powerful
dynamics processors, offering compressor, limiter, gate, ducker, and compander func-
tions. See the “Block Diagram” on page 24 for the exact location of each dynamics pro-
cessor. Input channel processors can be self triggering (i.e., the signal being processed
is used as the trigger signal), or triggered by a signal from another input channel.
Dynamics settings are stored as programs in the dynamics library, which contains 40
preset programs and 40 user programs. See “Dynamics Library” on page 173 for more
information. Dynamics settings are also stored in scene memories. See “Storing Mix
Scenes” on page 186 for more information.
Dynamics processors are edited on DYNAMICS page 1, as shown below. Use the
[DYNAMICS] button to locate this page.
The name of the type of dynamics processor appears in the middle of the page next the
dynamics curve. To the left is the processor on/off switch. Below these are the dynamics
parameters, the number of which vary depending on the type of processor selected. The
GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied to the selected channel.
Next to this are level meters for the selected channel and its neighbor.
Preset Dynamics Programs 163
01V—Owner’s Manual
Preset Dynamics Programs
The following table lists the preset dynamics programs. See “Preset Dynamics Program
Settings” on page 177 for detailed parameter information.
No. Title Type No. Title Type
01 Comp COMP 21 E.Guitar COMP
02 Gate GATE 22 A.Guitar COMP
03 Expand EXPAND 23 Strings1 COMP
04 Ducking DUCKING 24 Strings2 COMP
05 Compander(H) COMPAND-H 25 Strings3 COMP
06 Compander(S) COMPAND-S 26 BrassSection COMP
07 A.Dr.BD COMP 27 Syn.Pad COMP
08 A.Dr.BD GATE 28 SamplingPerc COMPAND-S
09 A.Dr.BD COMPAND-H 29 Sampling BD COMP
10 A.Dr.SN COMP 30 Sampling SN COMP
11 A.Dr.SN EXPAND 31 Hip Comp COMPAND-S
12 A.Dr.SN GATE 32 Solo Vocal1 COMP
13 A.Dr.SN COMPAND-S 33 Solo Vocal2 COMP
14 A.Dr.Tom EXPAND 34 Chorus COMP
15 A.Dr.OverTop COMPAND-S 35 Click Erase EXPAND
16 E.B.Finger COMP 36 Announcer COMPAND-H
17 E.B.Slap COMP 37 Limiter1 COMPAND-S
18 Syn.Bass COMP 38 Limiter2 COMP
19 Piano1 COMP 39 Total Comp1 COMP
20 Piano2 COMP 40 Total Comp2 COMP
164 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
Using the Dynamics Processors
Input channels 1 through 16, the aux sends, and the stereo output all feature dynamics
processors.
To recall a program from the dynamics library, see “Recalling Dynamics Programs” on
page 175. To edit a dynamics processor, see“Editing the Dynamics Processors” on
page 166.
For Input Channels 1–16
1. Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 to select channels.
2. Use the [DYNAMICS] button to locate DYNAMICS page 1, as shown
below.
3. Press the [ENTER] button to turn on the dynamics processor.
The ON/OFF switch appears highlighted when the dynamics processor is on. While
DYNAMICS page 1 is displayed, the [ENTER] button turns the dynamics processor on
or off regardless of the cursor position.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
The dynamics processors on input channels 13 and 14 (likewise 15 and 16) are perma-
nently linked. When input channels 1 through 12 are paired (“Pairing Input Channels”
on page 52), their dynamics processors are linked, so adjustments can be made with
either channel selected.
For Aux Sends 1–4
1. Use the [AUX] buttons to select an aux send, and then press the MASTER
[SEL] button.
AUX appears on the display, indicating that an aux send is selected.
2. Use the [DYNAMICS] button to locate DYNAMICS page 1, as shown
below.
3. Press the [ENTER] button to turn on the dynamics processor.
The ON/OFF switch appears highlighted when the dynamics processor is on. While
DYNAMICS page 1 is displayed, the [ENTER] button turns the dynamics processor on
or off regardless of the cursor position.
Using the Dynamics Processors 165
01V—Owner’s Manual
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
When aux sends are paired (“Making Aux Send Pairs” on page 101), their dynamics
processors are linked.
For the Stereo Output
1. Press the [HOME] button, and then the MASTER [SEL] button.
ST appears on the display, indicating that the stereo output is selected.
2. Use the [DYNAMICS] button to locate DYNAMICS page 1, as shown
below.
3. Press the [ENTER] button to turn on the dynamics processor.
The ON/OFF switch appears highlighted when the dynamics processor is on. While
DYNAMICS page 1 is displayed, the [ENTER] button turns the dynamics processor on
or off regardless of the cursor position.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
166 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
Editing the Dynamics Processors
Dynamics processors are edited on the DYNAMICS page 1, as shown below.
1. Use the [DYNAMICS] button to locate DYNAMICS page 1, as shown
below.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 and MASTER to select channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
TYPE—This is the name of the type of dynamics processor currently selected: COMP,
GATE, DUCKING, EXPAND, COMPANDER-(H), or COMPANDER-(S).
ON/OFF—This switch is used to turn on or off the dynamics processors. While
DYNAMICS page 1 is displayed, the [ENTER] button turns the dynamics processor on
or off regardless of the cursor position.
KEY IN—This parameter is used to select the trigger source for the dynamics proces-
sors, and can be set to SELF (i.e., the signal being processed is used as the trigger signal)
or triggered by a signal from another input channel from CH1 through CH16.
CURVE—This window shows the curve of the dynamics processor, pro-
viding a visual indication of how it’s set. The horizontal axis corresponds
to the input signal and the vertical axis corresponds to the output signal.
A straight line at 45 degrees from the bottom left corner indicates that the
input signal will pass through the dynamics processor unaffected. This
can be seen when, for example, a compressor is set with a compression
ratio of 1:1.
PARAMETER—These controls are used to adjust the dynamics processor’s parameters.
The number and type of parameters available depends on the type of dynamics proces-
sor selected.
Meters—The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied to the
selected channel. Next to this are level meters for the selected channel and its neighbor.
The GR meter works from top to bottom. For the COMP, DUCKING, EXPAND, and
COMPANDER types, the GR meter displays the amount of gain reduction. For the
GATE type, the processor is active when the input signal is below the threshold, so the
GR meter displays the amount of gain reduction when the input signal is below the
threshold, and when there is no input signal.
The dynamics processors parameters are explained in detail on page 167.
Processor Types 167
01V—Owner’s Manual
Processor Types
Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels, although
they can also be used creatively to shape a sound’s volume envelope. The following sec-
tions explain the COMP, GATE, DUCKING, EXPAND, COMPANDER-(H), and
COMPANDER-(S) dynamics processors, their parameters, and general applications.
COMP
The COMP processor is a compressor that
attenuates signals above a specified threshold,
providing automatic level control. Vocalists
that tend to move toward and away from the
microphone while singing produce fluctuat-
ing signal levels; sometimes loud, sometimes
soft. Likewise, acoustic instruments with a
large dynamic range produce sound levels
from pianissimo (very soft) through to fortis-
simo (very loud). In these situations, it is
often difficult to set an average fader level that
will allow a voice or instrument to be heard
clearly throughout a song or piece of music.
This is where the compressor comes in with
automatic level control. By automatically reducing high levels, thus effectively reducing
the dynamic range, the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set
appropriate fader levels. Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels
can be set higher, therefore improving signal-to-noise performance.
The COMP processor can also be used as a
limiter, which is essentially a compressor with
a high ratio setting. Compression ratios
above 10:1 are considered to limit signals
rather than compress them. When an input
signal exceeds the specified threshold level, its
level is automatically reduced to the thresh-
old level. This means that the limiter’s output
level never actually exceeds the threshold
level. Limiters are often used to prevent sig-
nals from overloading amplifiers and tape
recorders. A limiter with a relatively high
threshold, for example, could be used with
the stereo outputs to prevent amplifier and
speaker overload.
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (55 steps)
OUT GAIN 0.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)
KNEE hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)
RELEASE 5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)
6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)
RATIO 1:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 8:1,
10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 steps)
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Knee = hard
Threshold = –20dB
Compression ratio = 2:1
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Knee = hard
Threshold = –20dB
Compression ratio = 20:1
168 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
THRESHOLD—This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the com-
pressor. Signals at a level below the threshold pass through the compressor unaffected.
Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using
the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY IN parameter.
OUT GAIN—This sets the compressor’s output signal level, and can be used to com-
pensate for the overall level change caused by the compression process.
KNEE—This determines how compression is applied at the threshold point. When set
to hard, compression at the specified ratio is applied as soon as the input signal level
exceeds the specified threshold. For knee settings from 1 to 5, however, compression is
applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural
sound. This is called soft-knee compression.
ATTACK—This determines how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor
has been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is compressed almost immedi-
ately. With a slow attack time, however, the initial transient of a sound passes through
unaffected. Attack times from 1 to 5 milliseconds are a good place to start.
RELEASE—This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once
the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. If the release time is too short, the
gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping (i.e., noticeable gain fluctuations).
If it is set too long, the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high
level signal appears, and it will be compressed incorrectly. Release times from 0.1 to 0.5
seconds are a good place to start.
RATIO—This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output sig-
nal level relative to change in input signal level. For a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB
change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change in output level. For
a 5:1 ratio, a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 2 dB change
in output level.
GATE
A gate, or noise gate is essentially an audio
switch used to mute signals below a set
threshold level. It can be used to cut back-
ground noise picked up by open micro-
phones, noise and hiss from guitar valve
amps and effects pedals, and leakage between
drum microphones. It also has many creative
uses too. For example, gating a drum sound
with a short decay time tightens up the
sound. Also, patching a gate into a droning
bass synth channel and then triggering it
from the kick drum channel allows the bass
synth through only when the kick drum is
struck, adding extra “oomph” on the beat.
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (55 steps)
RANGE –70 dB to 0 dB (71 steps)
HOLD 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs = 48 kHz)
0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)
ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)
DECAY 5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)
6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Threshold = –10dB
Range = –30dB
Range = –70dB
Processor Types 169
01V—Owner’s Manual
THRESHOLD—This determines the level at which the gate closes, cutting off the sig-
nal. Signals above the threshold level pass through unaffected. Signals at or below the
threshold, however, cause the gate to close. The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY
IN parameter.
RANGE—This determines the level to which the gate closes. Think of it as a brick hold-
ing a garden gate open so that a certain amount of signal always flows through. For a
setting of –70 dB, the gate closes completely when the input signal falls below the
threshold. For a setting of –30 dB, however, the gate half closes. For a setting of 0 dB,
the gate has no effect. When signals are gated abruptly, the sudden disappearance can
sometimes sound odd. This parameter causes the gate to reduce the signal level rather
than cut it completely.
HOLD—This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen
below the threshold level.
ATTACK—This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the thresh-
old level. Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive
sounds. Too slow an attack time makes some sounds appear backwards.
DECAY—This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. A
longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect, allowing the natural decay of
an instrument to pass through. With a maximum decay time of between 42 and 63 sec-
onds, you could even use this for fade-outs.
DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over
applications in which the background music
level is reduced automatically when an
announcer speaks. Ducking is achieved by
triggering a compressor with a different
sound source. For example, a ducker is
patched into the background music channel,
and the KEY IN signal is sourced from the
announcer’s microphone channel. When the
announcer’s microphone level exceeds the
specified threshold, the background music
level is reduced automatically, allowing the
announcer to be heard clearly. The same
technique can also be used for vocals in a mix.
For example, ducking backing sounds such as rhythm guitar and synth pad during
vocal phrases allows the vocals to be heard more clearly. This can also be used to bring
solo instruments up in a mix.
THRESHOLD—This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to acti-
vate ducking. Trigger signal levels below the threshold do not activate ducking. Trigger
signals at and above the threshold level, however, activate ducking, and the signal level
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (55 steps)
RANGE –70 dB to 0 dB (71 steps)
HOLD 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs = 48 kHz)
0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)
ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)
DECAY 5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)
6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Range = –30dB
Threshold = –20dB
170 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter. The trigger signal is sourced using the
KEY IN parameter.
RANGE—This determines the level to which the signal is ducked. For a setting of
–80 dB, the signal is virtually cutoff. For a setting of –30 dB, however, the signal is
ducked by 30 dB. For a setting of 0 dB, the ducker has no effect.
HOLD— This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has
fallen below the threshold level.
ATTACK—This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been
triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is ducked almost immediately. With a slow
attack time, however, ducking appears to fade the signal. Too fast an attack time may
sound abrupt.
DECAY—This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the
trigger signal level drops below the threshold.
EXPAND
An expander is similar to a compressor except that it works on signals below the thresh-
old level. By reducing signals below the threshold level, the expander attenuates
low-level noise, effectively increasing the dynamic range and improving the sig-
nal-to-noise performance. An expander set to an infinite ratio (i.e., ∞:1) is essentially a
gate. The following two graphs show typical expander curves. The one on the left shows
an expander with an expansion ratio of 2:1 and a hard knee setting. The one on the
right shows an expander with an expansion ratio of 2:1 and a soft knee setting of 5.
THRESHOLD—This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the
expander. Signals above the threshold pass through the expander unaffected. Signals at
and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio
parameter. The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY IN parameter.
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (55 steps)
OUT GAIN 0.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)
KNEE hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)
RELEASE 5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)
6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)
RATIO 1:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 8:1,
10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 steps)
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Threshold = –10dB
Knee = hard
Expansion ratio = 2:1
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Threshold = –20dB
Knee = 5
Expansion ratio = 2:1
Processor Types 171
01V—Owner’s Manual
OUT GAIN—This sets the expander’s output signal level, and can be used to compen-
sate for the overall level change caused by the expansion process.
KNEE—This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold point. When set to
hard, expansion at the specified ratio is applied as soon as the input signal level falls
below the specified threshold. For knee settings from 1 to 5, however, expansion is
applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more nat-
ural sound.
ATTACK—This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has
been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is expanded almost immediately. With
a slow attack time, however, the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected.
Attack times from 1 to 5 milliseconds are a good place to start.
RELEASE—This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the
trigger signal level exceeds the threshold. If the release time is too short, the gain will
recover too quickly causing level pumping (i.e., noticeable gain fluctuations). If it is set
too long, the expander may not have time to recover before the next low-level signal
appears, and it will be expanded incorrectly. Release times from 0.1 to 0.5 seconds are a
good place to start.
RATIO—This determines the amount of expansion. That is, the change in output sig-
nal level relative to change in input signal level. For a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 5 dB
change in input level (below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level. For
a 5:1 ratio, a 2 dB change in input level (below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change
in output level.
COMPANDER (HARD & SOFT)
The hard (H) and soft (S) companders comprise of compressor, expander, and limiter.
The limiter prevents output signals from exceeding 0 dB. The compressor compresses
signals that exceed the threshold level. The expander attenuates signals below the
threshold and width. The soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1, while the
hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1. The following two graphs show typical
compander curves. The one on the left shows the hard compander. The one on the
right, the soft compander.
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Hard Compander
Output Level (dB)
Threshold
Width
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Soft Compander
Output Level (dB)
Threshold
Width
172 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
THRESHOLD—This determines the input signal level at which compression and
expansion are applied. Signals at a level below the sum of the threshold and width are
attenuated by the expander. Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by
the amount specified using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is sourced using the
KEY IN parameter.
OUT GAIN—This sets the compander’s output signal level. It can be used to compen-
sate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes.
WIDTH—This determines how far below the threshold level expansion is applied. The
expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to 90 dB.
ATTACK—This determines how soon the signal is compressed and expanded once the
compander has been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is companded almost
immediately. With a slow attack time, however, the initial transient of a sound passes
through unaffected. Attack times from 1 to 5 milliseconds are a good place to start.
RELEASE—This determines how soon the compressor and expander return to their
normal gains once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. If the release time
is too short, the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping (i.e., noticeable
gain fluctuations). If it is set too long, the compressor may not have time to recover
before the next high level signal appears, and it will be compressed incorrectly. Release
times from 0.1 to 0.5 seconds are a good place to start.
RATIO—This determines the amount of compression. That is, the change in output
signal level relative to change in input signal level. For a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB
change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change in output level. For
a 5:1 ratio, a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 2 dB change
in output level. The expander ratios are fixed: 1.5:1 for the soft compander (S) and 5:1
for the hard compander (H).
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (55 steps)
OUT GAIN –18 dB to 0 dB (0.5 dB steps)
WIDTH 1 dB–90 dB (1 dB steps)
ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)
RELEASE 5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)
6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)
RATIO 1:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 8:1,
10:1, 20:1 (15 steps)
Dynamics Library 173
01V—Owner’s Manual
Dynamics Library
Dynamics settings are stored as programs in the dynamics library, which contains 40
preset programs (1–40) and 40 user programs (41–80). User programs are used to store
custom dynamics settings, which can be titled for easy identification. The dynamics
library can also be used to transfer settings from one dynamics processor to another.
For example, the stereo out dynamics settings could be stored as a library program, and
then recalled to an aux send dynamics processor. The unique collection of preset
dynamics programs is designed for specific applications and instruments, and provides
a good reference and starting point when using the dynamics processors. See page 177
for a complete list of the preset dynamics programs.
The dynamics library is controlled from the library page shown below. Use the
[DYNAMICS] button to locate it.
The top half of the library page contains the STORE, RECALL, and TITLE EDIT
switches. Below these is the library window, which can be scrolled using the PARAME-
TER wheel. The “R” icon next to a preset program means read only. As each program
is selected, its dynamics curve is displayed. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain
reduction being applied to the selected channel. Next to this are level meters for the
selected channel and its neighbor.
174 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
Storing Dynamics Programs
Custom dynamics settings can be stored in user programs 41 through 80.
1. Select the channel whose dynamics processor settings you want to store
as a program.
Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 to select the input channels 1 through 16. To select an
aux send, use the [AUX] buttons to select an aux send, and then press the MASTER
[SEL] button. To select the stereo output, press the [HOME] button, and then the
MASTER [SEL] button.
2. Use the [DYNAMICS] button to locate the Library page, as shown below.
3. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a
user program from 41 through 80.
The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer-
ences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203).
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the STORE switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The Title Edit dialog box appears. If the STORE CONFIRMATION option is turned off
in the preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203), the Title Edit dialog box
does not appear and the dynamics program is stored.
5. Title the dynamics program.
See “Title Edit Dialog Box” on page 37 for more information.
6. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The dynamics program is stored.
Recalling Dynamics Programs 175
01V—Owner’s Manual
Recalling Dynamics Programs
Dynamics programs 1 through 80 can be recalled.
1. Select the channel to which you want to recall the dynamics program.
Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 to select the input channels 1 through 16. To select an
aux send, use the [AUX] buttons to select an aux send, and then press the MASTER
[SEL] button. To select the stereo output, press the [HOME] button, and then the
MASTER [SEL] button.
2. Use the [DYNAMICS] button to locate the Library page, as shown below.
3. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select
programs.
As each program is selected its dynamics curve is displayed.
The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer-
ences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203).
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the RECALL switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The Dynamics program is recalled. If the RECALL CONFIRMATION option is turned
on in the preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203), a confirmation dialog
box appears. In this case, select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button to confirm the
recall.
176 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
Editing Dynamics Program Titles
User program titles can be edited using the Title Edit function.
1. Use the [DYNAMICS] button to locate the Library page, as shown below.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a
user program from 41 through 80.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT switch, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
4. Edit the program title.
See “Title Edit Dialog Box” on page 37 for more information.
5. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The program is stored with its new title.
Preset Dynamics Program Settings 177
01V—Owner’s Manual
Preset Dynamics Program Settings
# Title Type Parameter Value Description
01 Comp COMP
Threshold (dB) –8
Compressor intended to reduce
the overall volume level. Use it
on the stereo output during mix-
down. It can also be used with
the stereo input.
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 60
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 250
02 Gate GATE
Threshold (dB) –26
Gate template.
Range (dB) –56
Attack (ms) 0
Hold (ms) 2.56
Decay (ms) 331
03 Expand EXPAND
Threshold (dB) –23
Expander template.
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 70
04 Ducking DUCKING
Threshold (dB) –19
Ducking template.
Range (dB) –22
Attack (ms) 93
Hold (ms) 1.20 S
Decay (ms) 6.32 S
05 Compander(H) COMPAND-H
Threshold (dB) –10
Hard-knee compressor template.
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 6
Release (ms) 250
06 Compander(S) COMPAND-S
Threshold (dB) –8
Soft-knee compressor template.
Ratio ( :1) 4
Attack (ms) 25
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 24
Release (ms) 180
07 A.Dr.BD COMP
Threshold (dB) –24
Compressor program for use
with acoustic kit’s bass drum.
Ratio ( :1) 3
Attack (ms) 9
Out gain (dB) 5.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 58
08 A.Dr.BD GATE
Threshold (dB) –11
Gate program for use with acous-
tic kit’s bass drum.
Range (dB) –53
Attack (ms) 0
Hold (ms) 1.93
Decay (ms) 400
178 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
09 A.Dr.BD COMPAND-H
Threshold (dB) –11
COMPAND-H program for use
with acoustic kit’s bass drum.
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) –1.5
Width (dB) 7
Release (ms) 192
10 A.Dr.SN COMP
Threshold (dB) –17
Compressor program for use
with acoustic kit’s snare drum.
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 12
11 A.Dr.SN EXPAND
Threshold (dB) –23
Expander program for use with
acoustic kit’s snare drum.
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 0
Out gain (dB) 0.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 151
12 A.Dr.SN GATE
Threshold (dB) –8
Gate program for use with acous-
tic kit’s snare drum.
Range (dB) –23
Attack (ms) 1
Hold (ms) 0.63
Decay (ms) 238
13 A.Dr.SN COMPAND-S
Threshold (dB) –8
COMPAND-H program for use
with acoustic kit’s snare drum.
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 11
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 10
Release (ms) 128
14 A.Dr.Tom EXPAND
Threshold (dB) –20 Expander program for use with
acoustic kit’s tom toms, which
automatically reduces the vol-
ume when the tom toms are not
played, helping to differentiate
the bass and snare drums clearly.
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 2
Out gain (dB) 5.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 749
15 A.Dr.OverTop COMPAND-S
Threshold (dB) –24 Soft-knees compander program
to emphasize the attack and
ambience of cymbals recorded
with overhead microphones. It
automatically reduces the vol-
ume when the cymbals are not
played, helping to differentiate
the bass and snare drums clearly.
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 38
Out gain (dB) –3.5
Width (dB) 54
Release (ms) 842
16 E.B.Finger COMP
Threshold (dB) –12
Compressor program to level the
attack and volume level of a fin-
ger-picked electric bass guitar.
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 15
Out gain (dB) 4.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 470
# Title Type Parameter Value Description
Preset Dynamics Program Settings 179
01V—Owner’s Manual
17 E.B.Slap COMP
Threshold (dB) –12
Compressor program to level the
attack and volume level of a slap
electric bass guitar.
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 6
Out gain (dB) 4.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 133
18 Syn.Bass COMP
Threshold (dB) –10
Compressor program to control
or emphasize the level of a synth
bass.
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 9
Out gain (dB) 3.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 250
19 Piano1 COMP
Threshold (dB) –9
Compressor program to brighten
the tonal color of a piano.
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 17
Out gain (dB) 1.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 238
20 Piano2 COMP
Threshold (dB) –18
A variation on program 19, using
a deep threshold to change the
entire attack and level.
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 7
Out gain (dB) 6.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 174
21 E.Guitar COMP
Threshold (dB) –8
Compressor program for electric
guitar cutting and arpeg-
gio-style backing performance.
The sound color can be varied
using different playing styles.
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 7
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 261
22 A.Guitar COMP
Threshold (dB) –10
Compressor program for acous-
tic guitar stroke and arpeg-
gio-style backing performance.
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 5
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 238
23 Strings1 COMP
Threshold (dB) –11
Compressor program for strings.
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 33
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 749
24 Strings2 COMP
Threshold (dB) –12
A variation on program 23,
intended for violas or cellos.
Ratio ( :1) 1.5
Attack (ms) 93
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 1.35 S
# Title Type Parameter Value Description
180 Chapter 13—Dynamics Processors
01V—Owner’s Manual
25 Strings3 COMP
Threshold (dB) –17
A variation on program 23,
intended for string instruments
with a very low range, such as
cellos or contrabass.
Ratio ( :1) 1.5
Attack (ms) 76
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 186
26 BrassSection COMP
Threshold (dB) –18
Compressor program intended
for brass sounds with a fast and
strong attack.
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 18
Out gain (dB) 4.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 226
27 Syn.Pad COMP
Threshold (dB) –13
Compressor program for synth
pad, intended to prevent diffu-
sion of the sound.
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 58
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 238
28 SamplingPerc COMPAND-S
Threshold (dB) –18
Compressor program for sam-
pled sounds, making them as
powerful as real acoustic drums.
This program is for percussion
sounds.
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) –2.5
Width (dB) 18
Release (ms) 238
29 Sampling BD COMP
Threshold (dB) –14
A variation on program 28,
intended for sampled bass drum
sounds.
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 2
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 35
30 Sampling SN COMP
Threshold (dB) –18
A variation on program 28,
intended for sampled snare drum
sounds.
Ratio ( :1) 4
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) 8.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 354
31 Hip Comp COMPAND-S
Threshold (dB) –23
A variation on program 28,
intended for sampled sound
loops.
Ratio ( :1) 20
Attack (ms) 15
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 15
Release (ms) 163
32 Solo Vocal1 COMP
Threshold (dB) –20
Compressor program suited for
use with solo vocals.
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 31
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 342
# Title Type Parameter Value Description
Preset Dynamics Program Settings 181
01V—Owner’s Manual
33 Solo Vocal2 COMP
Threshold (dB) –8
A variation on program 32.
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 26
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 3
Release (ms) 331
34 Chorus COMP
Threshold (dB) –9
A variation on program 32,
intended for chorus vocals.
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 39
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 226
35 Click Erase EXPAND
Threshold (dB) –33
Expander program to remove
click track sounds that may bleed
out of the musicians monitor
headphones.
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 284
36 Announcer COMPAND-H
Threshold (dB) –14
Hard compander program to
reduce the music level when the
announcer speaks, making the
voice clearer.
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) –2.5
Width (dB) 18
Release (ms) 180
37 Limiter1 COMPAND-S
Threshold (dB) –9
A soft-knee compander program
with a slow release.
Ratio ( :1) 3
Attack (ms) 20
Out gain (dB) –3.0
Width (dB) 90
Release (ms) 3.90 s
38 Limiter2 COMP
Threshold (dB) 0
A compressor program using the
peak-stop style.
Ratio ( :1) ∞
Attack (ms) 0
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 319
39 Total Comp1 COMP
Threshold (dB) –18
Compressor intended to reduce
the overall volume level. Use it
on the stereo output during mix-
down. It can also be used with
the stereo input.
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 94
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee hard
Release (ms) 447
40 Total Comp2 COMP
Threshold (dB) –16
A variation on program 39 with
greater compression.
Ratio ( :1) 6
Attack (ms) 11
Out gain (dB) 6.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 180
# Title Type Parameter Value Description
Scene Memories 183
01V—Owner’s Manual
Scene Memories
14
In this chapter...
About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
What’s Stored in Scene Memories? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
About the Edit Buffer & Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Scene Memory 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Scene Memory Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Storing Mix Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Recalling Mix Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Undoing Mix Scene Recalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Protecting Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Editing Scene Memory Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Renumbering Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Setting a Fade Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Recalling Scene Data Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
184 Chapter 14—Scene Memories
01V—Owner’s Manual
About Scene Memories
Scene memories are memory locations that are used to store mix scenes. A mix scene
consists of all 01V mix settings (i.e., EQ, fader positions, effects, dynamics, and so on).
There are 100 scene memories, and 1 through 99 can be titled for easy identification.
The Recall Undo function can be used to undo accidental scene memory recalls, or for
quick A/B mix comparisons. Crossfades from 0 to 25 seconds can be set up using the
Fade Time function. Individual channels can be set as “safe channels” so their settings
remain unchanged when a mix scene is recalled.
Scene memories can be stored and recalled in two ways:
• Manually on MEMORY page 1
• Remotely using MIDI Program Change messages from a computer or MIDI
sequencer
Scene memory data can be backed up to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data
filer, using MIDI Bulk Dump. See “Bulk Dump” on page 232 for more information. A
scene memory to Program Change assignment table is provided on page 273.
Mix scenes are stored and recalled on MEMORY page 1, as shown below. Use the
[MEMORY] button to locate it.
The area to the left of the page contains the TITLE EDIT, RECALL, and STORE
switches. Next to these is the scene memory list, which can be scrolled using the
PARAMETER wheel. If the INC/DEC MEMORY RECALL option is turned on in the
preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203), the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] but-
tons can also be used to select and recall scene memories. Scene memory 00 contains
the initial settings and is a read-only memory, which means it can only be recalled. As
each scene memory is selected, the PROTECT switch indicates whether or not it’s pro-
tected. Below this is the RECALL UNDO switch for undoing mix scene recalls. After
intializing the 01V, the RECALL UNDO switch appears gray until a mix scene is
recalled, because there is no data for undoing.
What’s Stored in Scene Memories?
Virtually all 01V mix settings are stored in a scene memories. Settings that are not
stored consist mainly of analog controls and switches. Namely, the 26 dB PAD switches,
GAIN controls, 15/16–2TR IN switch, MONITOR–2TR IN switch, MONITOR OUT
LEVEL control, PHONES LEVEL control, display contrast control, and on the rear
panel, the phantom power switches.
In addition, the following data types are not stored: 01V Setup data, MIDI Program
Change Map, MIDI Control Change Map, Scene Memory data, EQ library, Dynamics
library, and Effects library. This data can be backed up to an external MIDI device, such
as a MIDI data filer, using MIDI Bulk Dump. See “Bulk Dump” on page 232 for more
information.
About the Edit Buffer & Indicator 185
01V—Owner’s Manual
About the Edit Buffer & Indicator
The Edit Buffer is the scene memory area inside the 01V that contains the current mix
settings. When a mix scene is stored, the mix settings in the Edit Buffer are written to
the selected scene memory. When a mix scene is recalled, the contents of the selected
scene memory are placed in the Edit Buffer, making them the current mix settings.
When a parameter is adjusted after a mix scene has been recalled, the EDIT indicator
appears in the Memory area of the display, indicating that the current mix settings (i.e.,
those in the Edit Buffer) no longer match those of the mix scene that was recalled last.
The Edit Buffer settings are stored when the 01V is turned off, so they don’t have to be
stored to a scene memory before the 01V is turned off.
Scene Memory 00
Scene memory 00 is a little different to scene memories 1 through 99 in that it’s a
read-only memory and contains the initial 01V settings. You can recall it, but you can-
not store it. To reset all mix settings to their initial values, recall scene memory 00.
Scene Memory Display Area
The scene memory area of the display shows the number and title of the
selected scene memory, whether that scene memory is read only or write
protected (indicated by the closed padlock icon), and whether or not the
contents of the Edit Buffer have been edited. Scene memories from 1 to
99 can be protected individually against accidental overwriting. Scene
memory 00 is a read only memory. When a scene memory other than the
one recalled last is selected, the scene memory number flashes. If the
scene memory that was recalled last is selected again, or a different scene
memory is recalled, the number stops flashing. Also in the Memory area
are the MIDI and HOST indicators, which appear when MIDI data is
received at the MIDI IN or TO HOST port, respectively. See “MIDI
Receive Indicators” on page 224 for more information.
Scene memory 02 has just been
recalled, so the contents of the Edit
Buffer match those of scene memory
02.
The EDIT indicator means that a
parameter has been changed since
scene memory 02 was recalled, so the
contents of the Edit Buffer no longer
match those of scene memory 02.
186 Chapter 14—Scene Memories
01V—Owner’s Manual
Storing Mix Scenes
Mix scenes can be stored in scene memories 1 through 99.
1. Use the [MEMORY] button to locate MEMORY page 1, as shown below.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a
scene memory from 1 through 99.
The scene memory list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in
preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203).
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the STORE switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The Title Edit dialog box appears. If the STORE CONFIRMATION option is turned off
in the preferences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203), the Title Edit dialog box
does not appear and the mix scene is stored.
4. Title the mix scene.
See “Title Edit Dialog Box” on page 37 for more information.
5. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The mix scene is stored to the selected scene memory, the scene memory number stops
flashing, and the EDIT indicator disappears.
Caution: When storing mix scenes, make sure that there are no mix settings in the Edit
Buffer that you do not want to store. Perhaps some settings have been adjusted acciden-
tally, or by someone else. If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s exact contents, recall the
last mix scene, make the adjustments that you really want, and then store the mix scene.
You may want to store the current mix settings to an unused scene memory just in case.
Recalling Mix Scenes 187
01V—Owner’s Manual
Recalling Mix Scenes
Mix scenes can be recalled from scene memories 0 through 99 manually, or remotely
using MIDI Program Change messages.
1. Use the [MEMORY] button to locate MEMORY page 1, as shown below.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select
scene memories.
As each scene memory is selected, its title and number flash on the display.
The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer-
ences (“Setting 01V Preferences” on page 203).
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the RECALL switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The mix scene is recalled, the scene memory title and number stop flashing, and the
EDIT indicator disappears.
If the RECALL CONFIRMATION option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting 01V
Preferences” on page 203), a confirmation dialog box appears. In this case, select OK,
and then press the [ENTER] button to confirm the recall.
If the INC/DEC MEMORY RECALL option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting
01V Preferences” on page 203), the [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons can be used to
select and recall scene memories. As the [–1/DEC] or [+1/INC] button is pressed, sub-
sequent scene memories that contain a mix scene are selected and recalled.
Mix scene recalls can be undone using the Recall Undo function. See “Undoing Mix
Scene Recalls” on page 189 for more information.
Note: When recalling mix scenes, be aware that volume levels may change suddenly as
channels are turned on and fader levels adjusted. Nobody likes sudden loud noises, or
speaker damage.
188 Chapter 14—Scene Memories
01V—Owner’s Manual
Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program
Change Messages
MIDI Program Change messages can be used to recall mix scenes for snapshot-style
mix automation. Program Change messages can be transmitted from a controlling
computer, MIDI sequencer, or MIDI keyboard. Most MIDI keyboards, for example,
transmit a Program Change message when a voice is selected. This could be used to
recall a corresponding mix scene on the 01V, so that just one press of a button (or foot-
switch), the synthesizer and 01V are reconfigured ready for the next song or scene.
To recall mix scenes using MIDI Program Change messages you must:
1. Connect MIDI equipment capable of transmitting Program Change mes-
sages to the 01V.
2. Configure the 01V to receive MIDI Program Change messages. See “MIDI
Setup” on page 224 for more information.
3. Assign Program Change messages to scene memories. See “Program
Change Scene Recall” on page 227 for more information.
If the Program Change Tx switch is turned on (“MIDI Setup” on page 224), the 01V
transmits a Program Change message each time a mix scene is recalled. This could be
used to recall programs on other MIDI equipment, for example, effects program on an
external effects processor, or a voice on a synthesizer. Recalling scene memory #10, for
example, would recall voice #10 on a synthesizer. Program Change messages transmit-
ted by the 01V can be recorded to a MIDI sequencer for automated scene changes.
Undoing Mix Scene Recalls 189
01V—Owner’s Manual
Undoing Mix Scene Recalls
Mix scene recalls can be undone using the Recall Undo function.
1. Use the [MEMORY] button to locate MEMORY page 1, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the RECALL UNDO switch.
The RECALL UNDO switch appears gray until a mix scene is recalled after the 01V is
initialized.
3. Press the [ENTER] button.
The 01V returns to the mix settings that were active before the mix scene was recalled.
Pressing the [ENTER] button again redoes the mix scene recall. Pressing again undoes
it, and so on.
Recall Undo is useful when a mix scene is recalled by mistake, but can also be used for
A/B mix comparisons. To compare different mix settings, for example, store them to
two scene memories. Recall one mix scene, and then the other. Recall Undo will then
toggle between the two mixes.
Protecting Scene Memories
Scene memories can be protected individually against accidental overwriting by using
the Protect function. When a scene memory is protected, mix scenes cannot be stored
in it, and scene memory data received via MIDI Bulk Dump is ignored.
1. Use the [MEMORY] button to locate MEMORY page 1, as shown below.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a
scene memory.
Only scene memories that contain a mix scene can be protected.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the PROTECT switch.
4. Press the [ENTER] button.
When a scene memory is protected, the word PROTECT appears next to it in the scene
memory list and a closed padlock appears in the scene memory area on the display.
To turn off the protection, select the PROTECT switch, and then press the [ENTER]
button.
190 Chapter 14—Scene Memories
01V—Owner’s Manual
Editing Scene Memory Titles
Scene memory titles can be edited using the Title Edit function.
1. Use the [MEMORY] button to locate MEMORY page 1, as shown below.
2. Use the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a
scene memory.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT switch, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
The Title Edit dialog box appears.
4. Edit the scene memory title.
See “Title Edit Dialog Box” on page 37 for more information.
5. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The scene memory is stored with its new title.
Renumbering Scene Memories
Scene memories can be renumbered by using the Sort function.
1. Use the [MEMORY] button to locate MEMORY page 3, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the list on the left, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a scene memory.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the list on the right, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select the insertion point.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the SORT switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
The selected scene memory is renumbered.
Setting a Fade Time 191
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting a Fade Time
Using the Fade Time function, crossfades, fade outs, and fade ins from 0 to 25 seconds
can be performed automatically by recalling mix scenes. Fade Time settings must be
stored with a mix scene before they have any effect. Faders for input channels 1 through
16, the effects returns, aux send masters, bus out masters, and the stereo output can be
enabled for fading individually.
1. Use the [MEMORY] button to locate MEMORY page 2, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the TIME control, and the PARAMETER
wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set it.
The Fade Time can be set from 0 to 25 seconds in 0.1 second steps.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the FADE ENABLE switches, and the
[ENTER] button to enable channels for fading.
FADE ENABLE switches appear highlighted when channels are enabled for fading.
4. Store the current mix scene in a scene memory. See “Storing Mix Scenes”
on page 186 for more information.
5. Recall the mix scene. See “Recalling Mix Scenes” on page 187 for more
information.
When the mix scene is recalled, enabled faders move to their new positions over the
specified time. With a 5-second fade time, for example, it takes the enabled faders 5 sec-
onds to reach their new positions. In a typical crossfade, one channel would fade out
while another channel fades in.
Note: The Fade Time settings must be stored with a mix scene before they have any effect.
192 Chapter 14—Scene Memories
01V—Owner’s Manual
Recalling Scene Data Safely
When a mix scene is recalled, all mix settings are updated so that they match those of
the recalled mix scene. In some cases, it may be necessary to retain mix settings of cer-
tain channels. This can be achieved using the Recall Safe function. Safe channels remain
the same when mix scenes are recalled.
1. Use the [MEMORY] button to locate MEMORY page 4, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the SAFE CHANNEL switches, and the
[ENTER] button to set channels as safe.
SAFE CHANNEL switches appear highlighted for safe channels.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select a MODE (ALL PARAM or FADER ONLY),
and the [ENTER] button to activate it.
In ALL PARAM mode, all parameters are safe. In FADER ONLY mode, only the faders
are safe. All other parameters are updated when mix scenes are recalled.
4. Make sure the SAFE switch is set to ENABLE.
5. Use the cursor buttons to select the SAFE switch, and then press the
[ENTER] button to enable the Recall Safe function.
The SAFE switch works as a master Recall Safe on/off, so you don’t have to set individ-
ual channels when you want a scene recall to update all channels.
6. Recall a mix scene. See “Recalling Mix Scenes” on page 187 for more
information.
When a mix scene is recalled, and providing that the SAFE switch is set to ENABLE, mix
settings on safe channels remain the same.
If a mix scene containing paired channels, fader group, or mute group settings is
recalled, and one of the channels in the pair or group is set as a safe channel, the pair or
group is cancelled and only the non-safe channel is updated.
Recall Safe settings are not stored in mix scenes. They are, however, stored as part of the
01V Setup data. See “Bulk Dump” on page 232 for more information.
Other Functions 193
01V—Owner’s Manual
Other Functions
15
In this chapter...
Assigning Faders & On Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting 01V Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Initializing the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Calibrating the Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
194 Chapter 15—Other Functions
01V—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Faders & On Buttons
The faders and [ON] buttons of input channels 1 though 16 and the stereo output
(master) can be assigned functions other than their regular functions. Input channel
faders 1 through 4, for example, can be used to control bus out master levels, which do
not have their own dedicated faders. These assignments are active only when REMOTE
page 1 is displayed. Select another page and the [ON] buttons and faders perform their
regular functions. Four assignment sets can be stored in banks 1 through 4.
1. Use the [REMOTE] button to locate REMOTE page 1, as shown below.
While this page is displayed, faders and [ON] buttons perform the functions assigned
to them here, not their regular functions.
2. Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 16 and MASTER to select the channels whose
[ON] buttons and faders you want to reassign.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters boxes, and the PARAM-
ETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
Available functions for the faders and [ON] buttons are listed in the subsequent tables.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the BANK switches, and then press the
[ENTER] button to activate the selected bank.
The switch of the active bank appears highlighted.
Custom assignments are stored in their respective banks when other banks are selected,
and banks can be stored using MIDI Bulk Dump. See “Bulk Dump” on page 232 for
more information.
To reset a bank back to its initial assignments, make it the active bank, select the INI-
TIALIZE switch, and then press the [ENTER] button. A confirmation dialog box
appears. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button to confirm your action. The
selected bank is reset to its initial assignments.
Assigning Faders & On Buttons 195
01V—Owner’s Manual
Fader Assignments
Faders 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to the following parameters.
Parameter Channel
NO ASSIGN ——
FADER
CHANNEL CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, CH17–24,
RETURN1, RETURN2
MASTER AUX1–4, BUS1–4, EFFECT1, EFFECT2, ST OUT
AUX1 SEND, AUX2 SEND CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, CH17–24,
RETURN1, RETURN2
AUX3 SEND, AUX4 SEND CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, RETURN1,
RETURN2
EFF1 SEND CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, CH17–24,
RETURN2
EFF2 SEND CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, CH17–24,
RETURN1
DELAY
TIME CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, ST OUT L, ST
OUT R, OMNI1–4
MIX
FB GAIN
EQ (F, G, Q)
F LOW CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, CH17–24,
RETURN1, RETURN2, AUX1–4, ST OUT
G LOW
Q LOW
F L-MID CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, RETURN1,
RETURN2, AUX1–4, ST OUT
G L-MID
Q L-MID
F H-MID CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, RETURN1,
RETURN2, AUX1–4, ST OUT
G H-MID
Q H-MID
F HIGH CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, CH17–24,
RETURN1, RETURN2, AUX1–4, ST OUT
G HIGH
Q HIGH
ATT CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, CH17–24
DYNAMICS
RATIO
CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16, AUX1–4, ST OUT
KNEE/HOLD
THRESHOLD
ATTACK
G/RANGE
REL/DECAY
EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM1–19
EFFECT2
PAN
CHANNEL CH1–24, RETURN1 L, RETURN1 R, RETURN2 L,
RETURN2 R
AUX1, 2
AUX3, 4 CH1–16, RETURN1 L, RETURN1 R, RETURN2 L,
RETURN2 R
BUS TO ST BUS1–4
BALANCE ST OUT
196 Chapter 15—Other Functions
01V—Owner’s Manual
On Button Assignments
On buttons 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to the following parameters.
Parameter Channel
NO ASSIGN ——
ON (channel on/off)
CHANNEL CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16,
CH17–24, RETURN1, RETURN2
MASTER AUX1–4, BUS1–4, EFFECT1, EFFECT2,
ST OUT
BUS TO ST BUS1–4
PHASE
(normal/reverse) CHANNEL CH1–16
PRE/POST (pre/post)
AUX1 SEND, AUX2 SEND CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16,
CH17–24, RETURN1, RETURN2
AUX3 SEND, AUX4 SEND CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16,
RETURN1, RETURN2
EFF1 SEND CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16,
CH17–24, RETURN2
EFF2 SEND CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16,
CH17–24, RETURN1
DELAY (on/off) CHANNEL CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16
OUTPUT ST OUT L, ST OUT R, OMNI1–4
EQ (on/off) CHANNEL CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16,
CH17–24, RETURN1, RETURN2
OUTPUT AUX1–4, ST OUT
DYNAMICS (on/off) CHANNEL CH1–12, CH13-14, CH15-16
OUTPUT AUX1–4, ST OUT
Assigning Faders & On Buttons 197
01V—Owner’s Manual
Initial Assignments for Bank 1
These are the initial fader and [ON] button assignments for Bank 1.
Channel Control Parameter
1[ON] button ON MASTER BUS1
Fader FADER MASTER BUS1
2[ON] button ON MASTER BUS2
Fader FADER MASTER BUS2
3[ON] button ON MASTER BUS3
Fader FADER MASTER BUS3
4[ON] button ON MASTER BUS4
Fader FADER MASTER BUS4
5[ON] button ON MASTER AUX1
Fader FADER MASTER AUX1
6[ON] button ON MASTER AUX2
Fader FADER MASTER AUX2
7[ON] button ON MASTER AUX3
Fader FADER MASTER AUX3
8[ON] button ON MASTER AUX4
Fader FADER MASTER AUX4
9[ON] button ON MASTER EFFECT1
Fader FADER MASTER EFFECT1
10 [ON] button ON MASTER EFFECT2
Fader FADER MASTER EFFECT2
11 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader NO ASSIGN ——
12 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader NO ASSIGN ——
13–14 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader NO ASSIGN ——
15–16 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader NO ASSIGN ——
MAS [ON] button ON MASTER ST OUT
Fader FADER MASTER ST OUT
198 Chapter 15—Other Functions
01V—Owner’s Manual
Initial Assignments for Bank 2
These are the initial fader and [ON] button assignments for Bank 2.
Channel Control Parameter
1[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH1
Fader DELAY TIME CH1
2[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH2
Fader DELAY TIME CH2
3[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH3
Fader DELAY TIME CH3
4[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH4
Fader DELAY TIME CH4
5[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH5
Fader DELAY TIME CH5
6[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH6
Fader DELAY TIME CH6
7[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH7
Fader DELAY TIME CH7
8[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH8
Fader DELAY TIME CH8
9[ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH9
Fader DELAY TIME CH9
10 [ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH10
Fader DELAY TIME CH10
11 [ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH11
Fader DELAY TIME CH11
12 [ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH12
Fader DELAY TIME CH12
13–14 [ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH13-14
Fader DELAY TIME CH13-14
15–16 [ON] button DELAY CHANNEL CH15-16
Fader DELAY TIME CH15-16
MAS [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader NO ASSIGN ——
Assigning Faders & On Buttons 199
01V—Owner’s Manual
Initial Assignments for Bank 3
These are the initial fader and [ON] button assignments for Bank 3.
Channel Control Parameter
1[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM1
2[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM2
3[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM3
4[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM4
5[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM5
6[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM6
7[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM7
8[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM8
9[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM9
10 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM10
11 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM11
12 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM12
13–14 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM13
15–16 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM14
MAS [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM15
200 Chapter 15—Other Functions
01V—Owner’s Manual
Initial Assignments for Bank 4
These are the initial fader and [ON] button assignments for Bank 4.
Channel Control Parameter
1[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM1
2[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM2
3[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM3
4[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM4
5[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM5
6[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM6
7[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM7
8[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM8
9[ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM9
10 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM10
11 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM11
12 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM12
13–14 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM13
15–16 [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM14
MAS [ON] button NO ASSIGN ——
Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM15
Assigning Faders & On Buttons 201
01V—Owner’s Manual
User Assignment table
Use this table for your own assignments.
Channel Control Parameter
1[ON] button
Fader
2[ON] button
Fader
3[ON] button
Fader
4[ON] button
Fader
5[ON] button
Fader
6[ON] button
Fader
7[ON] button
Fader
8[ON] button
Fader
9[ON] button
Fader
10 [ON] button
Fader
11 [ON] button
Fader
12 [ON] button
Fader
13–14 [ON] button
Fader
15–16 [ON] button
Fader
MAS [ON] button
Fader
202 Chapter 15—Other Functions
01V—Owner’s Manual
Using the Oscillator
The 01V features a useful audio oscillator with 100 Hz, 1 kHz, and 10 kHz sine wave
tones and pink noise and burst pink noise. It can be assigned to individual aux sends,
bus outs, effects sends, or the stereo output, and is useful for calibration or diagnostic
purposes. Assigning burst noise to an effects send is a convenient way to audition reverb
settings.
1. Use the [UTILITY] button to locate UTILITY page 1, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the [ENTER] button,
PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
ON/OFF—This switch is used to turn the oscillator on or off.
WAVEFORM—This switch is used to select the type of waveform generated by the
oscillator: 100 Hz, 1 kHz, or 10 kHz sine wave tones, pink noise, or burst pink noise,
which consists of 200 ms pulses at four second intervals.
LEVEL—This control is used to adjust the output level of the oscillator from 0 dB to
–96 dB.
ASSIGN—These switches are used to assign the oscillator to individual aux sends, bus
outs, effects sends, or the stereo output.
The Oscillator page also features level meters for the aux sends, bus outs, and effects
returns.
When the oscillator is assigned to a bus, the oscillator signal has priority and other sig-
nals routed to that bus are muted.
Note: To prevent sudden tone-burst surprises in your monitors or headphones, set the
oscillator level, stereo output, aux sends, bus outs, or effects returns to a minimal level.
Setting 01V Preferences 203
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting 01V Preferences
The Preferences are used to customize the operation of the 01V.
1. Use the [UTILITY] button to locate UTILITY page 2 or 3, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the [ENTER] button,
PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
EQ AUTO SCREEN—When this option is turned on, EQ page 1 or OPTION page 2
appears when the selected channel F or G control is adjusted, or the selected channel
[HIGH], [HI-MID], [LO-MID], or [LOW] button is pressed. See “Adjusting the EQ”
on page 63 for more information.
PANPOT AUTO SCREEN—When this option is turned on, PAN/ROUT page 1 or
OPTION page 2 appears when the selected channel PAN control is adjusted. See “Pan-
ning Input Channels” on page 47 for more information.
STORE CONFIRMATION—When this option is turned on, the Title Edit dialog box,
which also functions as a confirmation, appears whenever a mix scene or library pro-
gram is stored; useful for preventing mix scenes and library programs from being
stored accidentally.
RECALL CONFIRMATION—When this option is turned on, a confirmation dialog
box appears whenever a mix scene or library program is recalled; useful for preventing
mix scenes and library programs from being recalled accidentally.
DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION—When this option is turned on, a warning message
appears if digital signals from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In or Option I/O inputs are not
wordclock synchronized with the 01V. See “Setting the Wordclock” on page 209 for
more information.
“SELECTED CH” MESSAGE—When this option is turned on, a message indicating
the selected channel appears when the Fader mode is switched to and from Option I/O.
DELAY UNITS—Delay values for the input channel delay, stereo output delay, and
omni out delay can be specified in milliseconds, meters, or samples. See “Delaying
Channel Signals” on page 45, “Stereo Output Delay” on page 91, and “Omni Out
Delay” on page 117.
INC/DEC SCENE RECALL—When this option is turned on, the [–1/DEC] and
[+1/INC] buttons can be used to select and recall scene memories while MEMORY
page 1 is displayed. As the [–1/DEC] or [+1/INC] button is pressed, subsequent scene
memories that contain a mix scene are selected and recalled. See “Recalling Mix Scenes”
on page 187 for more information.
204 Chapter 15—Other Functions
01V—Owner’s Manual
LIBRARY LIST ORDER—When this option is set to UP, EQ, effects, dynamics, and
scene memory lists appear with the lowest program/scene at the bottom and the highest
at the top. When set to DOWN, they appear with the lowest at the top, highest at the
bottom.
Initial Settings
Initializing the 01V
The Initialization function can be used to reset the 01V to its factory settings, clear all
programs in the EQ, effects, and dynamics libraries, empty all scene memories, and
reset the MIDI Program Change to scene memory, and Control Change to parameter
assignment tables.
1. Turn off the 01V.
2. While holding down the [MEMORY] button, turn on the 01V.
<<INITIALIZE MEMORY?>> appears on the display.
3. Release the [MEMORY] button.
4. Press the [+1/INC] to initialize the 01V, or the [–1/DEC] to cancel.
If you choose to initialize the 01V, mix settings are reset to their factory settings, all pro-
grams in the EQ, effects, and dynamics libraries are cleared, the scene memories are
emptied, and the faders are calibrated.
Calibrating the Faders
If the 01V is not used for a long time, it’s moved to a new location, or fader movements
have been obstructed, the faders may need calibrating. The calibration process calcu-
lates the torque required by each fader motor to drive its fader accurately and smoothly.
1. Turn off the 01V.
2. While holding down the [ENTER] button, turn on the 01V.
3. Release the [ENTER] button.
The fader calibration process starts. When the faders return to their original positions,
calibration is complete. Do not attempt to use the 01V before calibration is completed.
Preference Options Initial Setting
EQ AUTO SCREEN ON/OFF ON
PANPOT AUTO SCREEN ON/OFF ON
STORE CONFIRMATION ON/OFF ON
RECALL CONFIRMATION ON/OFF OFF
DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION ON/OFF ON
“SELECTED CH” MESSAGE ON/OFF ON
DELAY UNITS msec, meter, sample msec
INC/DEC SCENE RECALL ON/OFF OFF
LIBRARY LIST ORDER UP/DOWN UP
Note: If you want to reset just the mix settings and retain the programs and scene mem-
ories, recall scene memory 00 instead. See “Scene Memory 00” on page 185 for more infor-
mation.
Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs 205
01V—Owner’s Manual
Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
16
In this chapter...
About Wordclocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Setting the Wordclock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Digital Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Output Dither . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Digital Stereo In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Cascading 01Vs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
About Option I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Installing Option I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Option I/O Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
206 Chapter 16—Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
01V—Owner’s Manual
About Wordclocks
Unlike analog audio equipment, digital audio equipment must be synchronized when
digital audio is transferred from one device to another. Otherwise, the digital audio
might not be read correctly and audible noise, glitches, or clicks may occur. Synchroni-
zation is achieved using what’s called a wordclock, which is a clock signal for synchro-
nizing all the digital audio words in an audio system. Note that wordclocks are not the
same as SMPTE or MIDI timecode, which are used to synchronize audio recorders,
MIDI sequencers, and so on. Wordclock synchronization refers to the synchronization
of the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device.
In a typical digital audio system, one device acts as the wordclock master and the other
devices act as wordclock slaves that synchronize to the master wordclock signal. If the
01V is the only digital audio device in your system, no special wordclock settings are
required and the 01V synchronizes to its own internal wordclock. Add a DAT recorder
or digital multitrack recorder, however, and you must decide which device to use as
wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves. Even when you’ve done this and
configured your system, it may be necessary to change the wordclock settings in certain
situations, such as when recording from a DAT or CD player.
The wordclock signal runs at the same frequency as the sampling rate. The 01V gener-
ates its own wordclock at 44.1 kHz (the industry-standard sampling rate for music
CDs) and can be used as wordclock master. Alternatively, it can be used as a wordclock
slave synchronized to an external wordclock of between 44.1 kHz –10% and 48 kHz
+6%. Converting the sampling rate of digital audio is a complicated process, so it’s best
to use the 44.1 kHz sampling rate, especially if your work is destined for CD distribu-
tion.
Wordclock signals can be distributed via dedicated cables or derived from standard dig-
ital audio connections, as shown below. With AES/EBU and Coaxial digital audio con-
nections, a wordclock signal is transmitted even when no audio signal is present.
In a system where all devices share a common wordclock, it’s important that all devices
be turned on even when they’re not being used. Turn on the wordclock master first, and
then the slaves. When shutting down the system, turn off the slaves first, and then the
master. Before commencing with a recording session, make sure that all wordclock
slaves are synchronized to the master wordclock. Some devices have front panel indica-
tors to show when they are wordclock synchronized. Refer to the instructions for each
device.
The following system examples show three typical wordclock setups with the 01V. For
detailed system examples with specific equipment, see “System Examples” on page 241.
Wordclock
master
Wordclock slave Wordclock slave
Wordclock slave Wordclock slave
Wordclock In
Wordclock Out
Digital Audio Out
Digital Audio Out
Wordclock Out
Digital Audio In
DAT
00.00.00.00
Digital Audio In
Wordclock In
DAT
00.00.00.00
About Wordclocks 207
01V—Owner’s Manual
Digitally Recording to DAT
In this system, the 01V’s stereo output signal is digitally transferred to a DAT recorder.
The 01V works as wordclock master and the DAT works as wordclock slave. The 01V is
set to internal wordclock. The DAT derives its wordclock signal from the Digital Stereo
Coaxial Out connection of the 01V. Both devices operate at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz.
Multitrack Recording
In this system, audio is recorded to, and mixed from the digital multitrack recorder. The
01V’s stereo output signal is digitally transferred to the DAT recorder. The digital mul-
titrack recorder is wordclock master and the 01V and DAT recorder are wordclock
slaves. The 01V derives its wordclock from the Option I/O digital input. The DAT
derives its wordclock signal from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out connection of the 01V.
The sampling rate is the same as that used when the digital multitrack tapes were for-
matted or recorded.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
DAT
00.00.00.00
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL OUT
01V (wordclock master)
DAT (wordclock slave)
Digital In
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
01V (wordclock slave)
DAT
00.00.00.00
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL OUT
Digital In
DAT (wordclock slave)
8-TRACK DIGITAL
Digital In
OPTION I/O
Digital Out
Digital multitrack
(wordclock master)
208 Chapter 16—Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
01V—Owner’s Manual
Multitrack Recording with Digital DAT Source
In this system, audio is recorded to, and mixed from the digital multitrack recorder.
The DAT output signal is digitally transferred to the 01V for recording to the digital
multitrack recorder. The DAT recorder is wordclock master and the 01V and digital
multitrack recorder are wordclock slaves. The 01V derives its wordclock from the
Digital Stereo Coaxial In connection. The digital multitrack recorder derives its
wordclock from the 01V’s Option I/O connection. The sampling rate is the same as
that used when the DAT tape was recorded. A CD player could be connected instead of
the DAT recorder. In this case, the sampling rate would be fixed at 44.1 kHz, the
industry-standard sampling rate for music CDs.
PHANTOM +48V
OFF ON
PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN /
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN
–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
01V (wordclock slave)
DAT
00.00.00.00
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL IN
Digital Out
DAT (wordclock master)
8-TRACK DIGITAL
Digital In
OPTION I/O
Digital Out
Digital multitrack
(wordclock slave)
Setting the Wordclock 209
01V—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Wordclock
The 01V can generate its own internal wordclock at 44.1 kHz (the industry-standard
sampling rate for music CDs) or synchronize to an external wordclock of between
44.1 kHz –10% and 48 kHz +6%, which can be sourced from the Digital Stereo In or a
digital Option I/O card.
1. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 1, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the SOURCE switches, and the [ENTER]
button to set them.
AUTO NAVIGATE—This function checks all possible wordclock sources and then dis-
plays a dialog box recommending a suitable source. Note that in some situations this
function may not be able to recommend a suitable source. The following dialog box
appears when this function is run. Select OK, and press the [ENTER] button to start
digital input scanning.
To select the wordclock source manually, use the following switches.
This switch selects the internal 44.1 kHz wordclock. A highlighted switch like
the one shown here indicates that the 01V is synchronized to the wordclock
source and ready for use.
This switch selects the Digital Stereo In as the wordclock source. A switch like
the one shown here with a single diagonal line indicates that a wordclock sig-
nal is present at this input but the 01V is not synchronized to it.
This switch selects the Option I/O card as the wordclock source. A switch like
the one shown here with two diagonal lines indicates that no wordclock signal
is present at this input.
Note: If the 01V is the only digital audio device in your system, you do not need to change
the wordclock source. It can be left at internal 44.1 kHz.
Note: When the wordclock source is changed, audible glitches or clicks may be produced,
so it’s a good idea to turn down the volume on all monitor amps and headphones first.
210 Chapter 16—Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
01V—Owner’s Manual
A highlighted switch with two diagonal lines like the one shown here indicates
that no wordclock is being received from the selected source, and the Fs win-
dow will probably show UNLOCK. Before using the 01V, correct the external
wordclock, or select another source. This condition typically occurs when the
external wordclock source is turned off, or the cable carrying the wordclock
signal has been disconnected.
If the DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION option is turned on in the preferences (“Setting
01V Preferences” on page 203), a warning message appears if digital signals from the
Digital Stereo Coaxial In or Option I/O inputs are not wordclock synchronized with the
01V. If this message appears, configure the external device as wordclock master.
When an MY8-AE Option I/O card is installed, the OPTION SLOT switch is replaced
by four SLOT switches, as shown below.
These switches are used to select a pair of AES/EBU digital inputs as the wordclock
source.
This window displays the status of the 01V wordclock. 44.1k indicates
that the 01V is locked to a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz. When the word-
clock source is changed, the word LOCK appears, indicating that the 01V
is in the process of locking to the new source. If the external wordclock
source is lost, the word UNLOCK appears. This condition typically
occurs when the external wordclock source is turned off or the cable car-
rying the wordclock signal has been disconnected.
When a CD player is connected to the Digital Stereo In, the only available sampling rate
is 44.1 kHz. When a DAT is connected, the sampling rate is determined by the DAT.
Some DATs record at a fixed sampling rate, while others allow the user to choose, typi-
cally between 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.
Digital Stereo Out 211
01V—Owner’s Manual
Digital Stereo Out
The stereo output signal is output digitally in Consumer format
from the Digital Stereo Out Coaxial connector. Typically this is
connected to the digital input on a DAT or MiniDisc deck for
stereo mix recording, or the Digital Stereo In of another 01V for
cascade operation. See “Cascading 01Vs” on page 214 for more
information. The wordlength of the Digital Stereo Out Coaxial
signal is set using the Dither function. See “Output Dither” on
page 212 for more information.
In the following example, the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out on the 01V is connected to the
digital input of a DAT recorder for digital mixdown recording. The 01V works as word-
clock master, while the DAT works as wordclock slave. See “About Wordclocks” on page
206 for more information. When the digital input on the DAT recorder is selected as the
recording source, the DAT should automatically synchronize to the wordclock signal
coming from the 01V. On some DAT recorders, the wordclock source may have to be
set separately. Refer to the instructions supplied with your DAT recorder.
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
OUT IN
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN /
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
DAT
00.00.00.00
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL OUT
Digital In
01V
DAT recorder
212 Chapter 16—Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
01V—Owner’s Manual
Output Dither
When a high-resolution digital audio signal is transferred to a lower-resolution system,
some of the least-significant bits (LSB) of data are ignored by the receiving system,
which can make low-level signals sound grainy and step like, similar to the noise pro-
duced by a low-resolution digital reverb as signals fade. To prevent this, the wordlength
of a digital audio signal can be shortened to match that of the receiving system. Instead
of simply chopping the unwanted bits off, the 01V uses the industry-standard tech-
nique known as dither is used to optimize the wordlength reduction process.
Dither can be set independently for the Digital Stereo Out and Option I/O digital out-
puts, and should be matched to the wordlength supported by the receiving digital audio
device. For example, with a 16-bit DAT recorder connected to the Digital Stereo Out,
the DIGITAL ST OUT should be set to a wordlength of 16, and with a 20-bit digital
multitrack recorder connected via the Option I/O, OPTION OUT should be set to 20.
1. Use the [SETUP] button to locate SETUP page 5, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the WORD LENGTH switches, and the
[ENTER] button to set them.
Dither works by comparing the output of a special pseudorandom number sequence
generator with the lowest data bit of the shortened data word and the unwanted data
bits. The lowest bit is then rounded up or down prior to D/A conversion, thereby opti-
mizing the digital output signal for use with lower-resolution systems. Since dither
endows the digital signal with a noise floor close to the minimum theoretical limit,
some audio professionals choose not to use it for applications with a wide dynamic
range, such as classical recording. If you’re in any doubt, it’s probably best to use it.
Digital Stereo In 213
01V—Owner’s Manual
Digital Stereo In
Consumer format digital audio signals can be connected to the
01V using the Digital Stereo In Coaxial connection. The digital
output of a CD player, DAT, or MiniDisc deck could be con-
nected here, or the Digital Stereo Out of another 01V for cas-
cade operation. See “Cascading 01Vs” on page 214 for more
information.
1. Use the [PAN/ROUTING] button to locate PAN/ROUT page 4, as shown
below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the FLIP and ON/OFF switches, and the
[ENTER] button to set them.
FLIP—This switch is used to flip the inputs of input channels 13 and 14 with the Digital
Stereo In. Normally, analog inputs 13 and 14 feed input channels 13 and 14, and the
Digital Stereo In feeds the Stereo bus. When flipped, analog inputs 13 and 14 feed the
Stereo bus, and the Digital Stereo In feeds input channels 13 and 14.
ON/OFF—This switch is used to turn on or off the stereo cascade signal. The source of
the stereo cascade signal is set by the FLIP switch. The stereo cascade signal can be mon-
itored pre or post this switch using the monitors or phones. See “Monitor Setup” on
page 78 for more information.
Digital audio signals containing emphasis are automatically deemphasized.
In the following example, the Digital Stereo Coaxial In on the 01V is connected to the
digital output of a DAT recorder for mixing from a digital source. The 01V works as
wordclock slave, while the DAT works as wordclock master. On 01V SETUP page 1, set
the wordclock source to ST IN DIGITAL. See “Setting the Wordclock” on page 209 for
more information.
Note: To prevent noise when using the Digital Stereo In connection, the source device
and the 01V must be wordclock synchronized. See “About Wordclocks” on page 206 for
more information.
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
OUT IN
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN /
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
DAT
00.00.00.00
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL IN
Digital Out
DAT recorder
01V
214 Chapter 16—Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
01V—Owner’s Manual
Cascading 01Vs
By using the Stereo Digital In and Stereo Digital Out connections, two 01Vs can be cas-
caded together for 48-channel digital mixing, as shown below. 01V-A audio signals are
combined into a stereo mix that is then sent to 01V-B via the Digital Stereo Coaxial
connections and mixed with the audio signals of 01V-B. 01V-A works as wordclock
master and is set to INT 44.1K, while 01V-B works as wordclock slave with its word-
clock source set to ST IN DIGITAL. See “Setting the Wordclock” on page 209 for more
information.
For cascade operation, 01V-B Coaxial input should not be flipped and Stereo Cascade
should be turned on. See “Digital Stereo In” on page 213 for more information.
MIDI Local Control
Using the MIDI Local Control function, 01V-A can be controlled using the controls on
01V-B. When Local Control on 01V-B is turned off, its faders, buttons, and display
pages all control 01V-A instead of its own functions. In addition, the meters on 01V-B
display 01V-A signal levels. See “Local Control” on page 234 for more information.
Link Port
For simultaneous solo operation, display page and fader mode selection, two or more
01Vs can be linked together using the TO HOST or MIDI ports. See “Linking 01Vs” on
page 239.
Cascading Aux Sends
Aux sends can be cascaded as follows. Assign, say, aux send 1 on 01V-A (submixer) to
a MONI OUT and connect it to, say, input 13 on 01V-B (main-mixer). Then, feed
channel 13 on 01V-B through to aux send 1 pre-fader. 01V-B aux send 1 output now
contains the aux send 1 signals of both 01Vs. Aux sends 2, 3, and 4 can be cascaded in
a similar manner using inputs 14, 15, and 16 on 01V-B.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL OUT
01V-A (sub-mixer) 01V-B (main-mixer)
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL IN
Cascading 01Vs 215
01V—Owner’s Manual
Cascade Delay
Since it takes 01V-A several hundred microseconds to process its digital audio data, the
input signals of 01V-B need to be delayed slightly to bring them into phase with the sig-
nals from 01V-A. The following illustration shows why phase correction is necessary.
This kind of phase correction is not unique to the 01V. All digital audio equipment
takes a few hundred microseconds to process digital audio data. Use the Delay function
(“Delaying Channel Signals” on page 45) on 01V-B to delay all input channels by 14
samples.
Cascading Two or More 01Vs
In this example, the channel delay should be set to 14 samples on 01V-C, 28 samples on
01V-B.
01V-A 01V-B
L
STEREO
DIGITAL
OUT
STEREO
DIGITAL
IN
RLR
Since signal L has been processed by
both 01V-A and 01V-B, it's out of
phase with signal R. To bring the
signals back in phase, input signal R
is delayed by 14 samples on 01V-B.
01V-A 01V-B 01V-C
DIGITAL
STEREO
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
STEREO
COAXIAL
OUT IN OUT IN
216 Chapter 16—Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
01V—Owner’s Manual
About Option I/O Cards
The 01V features a single slot for an optional Option I/O card, providing eight digital
inputs (input channels 17 through 24) and eight assignable digital outputs. Option I/O
allows a direct digital connection to digital multitrack recorders, with cards for the fol-
lowing formats: ADAT, Tascam, and AES/EBU. Various Option I/O cards with analog
inputs and outputs are also available. See the Yamaha PA Web site for news of other 01V
Option I/O cards. 01V Option I/O cards are not interchangeable with the YGDAI cards
used by the Yamaha 02R and 03D Digital Recording Consoles.
<http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/homeenglish/>
MY8-AT ADAT
The MY8-AT card has two Alesis ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface con-
nectors and is used to connect 8-track digital multitrack recorders such as the Alesis
ADAT, Alesis ADAT-XT, or Fostex D-90 Hard Disk Recorder.
MY8-TD Tascam
The MY8-TD card has a Tascam Digital Audio Interface (TDIF-1) 25-pin D-sub con-
nector and is used to connect 8-track digital multitrack recorders such as the Tascam
DA-88 or DA-38. MY8-TD cards feature a device selector switch that should be set
according to the type of recorder connected. EXT: 88 for use with a Tascam DA-88. INT:
38 for use with a Tascam DA-38 or other recorder.
MY8-AE AES/EBU
The MY8-AE card has a 25-pin D-sub connector and is used to connect digital audio
equipment with AES/EBU format digital inputs and outputs.
MY4-DA Analog Output
The MY4-DA card features four analog XLR outputs. With this card you could, for
example, assign the four bus outs to the Omni outputs and the four aux sends to the
MY4-DA analog outputs for a total of eight analog outputs.
MY8-AD 8 Analog Input
The MY8-AD card features eight analog phone jack inputs, providing eight analog
inputs to input channels 17 through 24.
MY4-AD 4 Analog Input
The MY4-AD card features four analog XLR inputs, providing four analog inputs to
input channels 17 through 20.
About Option I/O Cards 217
01V—Owner’s Manual
Card Specifications
The eight Option I/O digital inputs feed input channels 17 through 24. See “Input
Channels 17–24” on page 40 for more information. The inputs to channels 1 through
8 can be swapped with those of input channels 17 through 24 either individually or
altogether. This allows signals from the Option I/O digital inputs to make use of the
4-band EQ, dynamics processors, and other functions of full-feature input channels 1
through 8. See “Swapping Inputs 1–8 & 17–24” on page 51 for more information.
Option I/O digital audio signals containing emphasis are automatically deemphasized.
The eight Option I/O digital outputs can be assigned to bus outs 1 through 4, aux sends
1 through 4, the left or right channels of the stereo output, or the post-fader direct out-
puts of input channels 1 through 16. See “Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs” on
page 219 for more information.
*1. Cable not included.
Card Description Inputs Outputs Connector
MY8-AT ADAT Digital I/O 8 (CH17–24) 8 (bus, aux, ste-
reo, ch direct)
Optical x2
MY8-TD Tascam TDIF-1 Digital I/O 8 (CH17–24) 25-pin D-sub x1
MY8-AE*1 AES/EBU Digital I/O 8 (CH17–24) 25-pin D-sub x1
MY4-DA Analog output —4 (bus, aux, ste-
reo, ch direct)
XLR-3-32 type
(balanced) x4
MY8-AD Analog input 8 (CH17–24) —Phone jack x8
MY4-AD Analog input 4 (CH17–20) —XLR-3-31 type
(balanced) x4
218 Chapter 16—Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
01V—Owner’s Manual
Installing Option I/O Cards
1. Turn off the 01V.
2. Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below.
Keep the cover in a safe place for future use.
3. Insert the card into the slot as shown below. Push it in all the way so that
the card’s connector mates correctly with the internal 01V connector.
4. Secure the card using the two fixing screws. Do not leave the screws
loose, as the card will not be grounded correctly.
5. Turn on the 01V.
The 01V checks to see what type of Option I/O card is installed when it’s turned on. If
installation is successful, the type of card installed is displayed on OPTION page 1, as
shown below.
Warning: Turn off the 01V before installing an Option I/O card. Failure to do so is an
electrical shock hazard and may cause serious damage.
Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs 219
01V—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs
The eight Option I/O digital outputs can be assigned to bus outs 1 through 4, aux sends
1 through 4, the left or right channels of the stereo output, or the post-fader direct out-
puts of input channels 1 through 16. Although the 01V is a four-bus mixer, assigning
the four bus outs and four aux sends to digital outputs allows eight-track simultaneous
recording.
1. Use the [OPTION I/O] button to locate OPTION page 4, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the switches, and the [ENTER] button,
PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
Switches appear highlighted when selected as the output source.
Option I/O digital outputs are automatically assigned to post-fader direct outputs of
input channels 1 through 12 when the corresponding D switch on PAN/ROUT page 1
is turned on. Likewise, when a direct output is selected as the source for an Option I/O
output on this page, the corresponding D switch is turned on on the PAN/ROUT page.
See “Routing Input Channels” on page 49 for more information.
220 Chapter 16—Using the Digital Inputs & Outputs
01V—Owner’s Manual
Option I/O Block Diagram
from
BUS 1
BUS 4
AUX 1
AUX 4
CH 1
CH 2
CH 15
STEREO L
STEREO R
CH 16
CH Fader
AUX1
AUX2
EFF1
EFF2
AUX/EFF
PRE/POST
RL
STEFFAUX
121234
BUS
4321
Option I/O
OUT
Option I/O
IN Option
I/O
Dither
Meter
Meter
Meter
Option I/O
Output
Select
Meter
1-8
PAN
2-Band
PEQ
ATT
De-emphasis
or DC Cut
17-24
1-8 Unchanged
Meter
ON
Meter
SWAP
INPUT
(BAL) Unchanged
This section is available only when
an optional Option I/O card is installed.
MIDI 221
01V—Owner’s Manual
MIDI
17
In this chapter...
MIDI & the 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
MIDI Receive Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
MIDI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Program Change Scene Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Control Change Parameter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
System Exclusive Parameter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Local Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
MIDI Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
User Defined MIDI Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Linking 01Vs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
222 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
MIDI & the 01V
The 01V can be used with MIDI in the following ways.
• Program Change messages for mix scene recall—“Program Change Scene Recall” on
page 227.
• Control Change messages for real-time parameter control—“Control Change
Parameter Control” on page 229.
• System Exclusive messages for parameter control—“System Exclusive Parameter
Control” on page 231.
• System Exclusive Bulk Dump for data backup and transfer between 01Vs—“Bulk
Dump” on page 232.
• MMC (MIDI Machine Control) for remote recorder control—“MIDI Machine
Control” on page 236.
• MIDI Link for simultaneous operation—“Linking 01Vs” on page 239.
• MIDI Local Control for remote 01V operation—“Local Control” on page 234.
• User defined MIDI controllers for remote operation—“User Defined MIDI Control-
lers” on page 238.
• MIDI Note On for Freeze effect playback and Note On velocity for the DYNA.FIL-
TER, DYNA.FLANGE, and DYNA.PHASER effects—“Effects Parameters” on
page 138.
MIDI Ports
The MIDI IN port receives MIDI messages, while the MIDI OUT port transmits them.
The MIDI THRU port transmits all MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port. In
addition to regular MIDI ports, the 01V features a TO HOST port for connecting to a
personal computer without a MIDI interface.
Apart from being a bidirectional connection that can transmit and receive MIDI data,
the TO HOST port functions in the same way as the regular MIDI ports. Whether you
use the regular MIDI ports or TO HOST port will depend on your particular system
and application. The PORT parameter on MIDI page 1 is used to select the port for reg-
ular MIDI transmission. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information. The
unused port automatically becomes the LINK PORT, which is used for simultaneous
operation with another 01V.
MIDI
THRU OUT IN
TO HOST
MIDI Ports 223
01V—Owner’s Manual
Using the TO HOST Port
In this system, the 01V is connected to a personal computer without a MIDI interface
via the TO HOST port. The PORT parameter on MIDI page 1 is set to match the type
of computer (PC-1, PC-2, or Mac). See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more informa-
tion. 01V operations are recorded as MIDI messages by the MIDI sequencer software.
During playback, the sequencer transmits the MIDI messages back to the 01V for auto-
mated mixing.
Using the MIDI Ports
In this system, the 01V, MIDI keyboard, and MIDI sampler connect to the computer
via a standard MIDI interface. Since the MIDI interface features only one MIDI IN
port, which is connected to the MIDI OUT of the MIDI keyboard, the system must be
repatched in order to record MIDI messages from the 01V. Alternatively, a MIDI inter-
face with two or more MIDI INs could be used.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
Serial port TO HOST
01V
MIDI Sequencer
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
Serial port MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI
interface
01V
MIDI Sequencer
MIDI keyboard
MIDI Sampler
224 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
Using the Link Port
In this system, two 01Vs are linked together for simultaneous operation. When, for
example, mix scenes are recalled, Program Change messages are transmitted via the
port assigned as the Link Port for simultaneous scene recall on both 01Vs. See “Cascad-
ing 01Vs” on page 214 for more information.
MIDI Receive Indicators
When MIDI data is received via the MIDI IN port, the MIDI receive indica-
tor shown here appears.
When data is received via the TO HOST port, the HOST receive indicator
shown here appears.
MIDI Setup
MIDI parameters such as transmit channel (Tx), receive channel (Rx), omni, and echo
are set on MIDI page 1.
1. Use the [MIDI] button to locate MIDI page 1, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and the [ENTER] button,
PARAMETER wheel, or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
PORT/LINK PORT—The PORT parameter determines whether the TO HOST or
MIDI ports are used for regular MIDI transmission. The LINK PORT parameter, used
when linking 01Vs (“Linking 01Vs” on page 239), is automatically set to the unused
port. If, for example, PORT is set to MIDI, LINK PORT will be set to HOST, and vice
Note: When the MIDI ports and TO HOST ports of two 01Vs are connected together, be
sure to turn off the Program Change Tx and Rx switches. Otherwise, a MIDI loop will
occur when mix scenes are recalled.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL OUT
01V-A (sub-mixer) 01V-B (main-mixer)
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL IN
TO HOST
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
TO HOST
OR
MIDI Setup 225
01V—Owner’s Manual
versa. When using the TO HOST port, PORT should be set to match the type of com-
puter connected to the 01V, as follows.
Tx CH—This parameter determines which MIDI Channel the 01V uses to transmit
MIDI messages, and can be set from 1 through 16. The device receiving MIDI messages
from the 01V should be set to the same MIDI Channel. When the 01V transmits MIDI
data in response to a request, that data is transmitted on the same MIDI Channel that
the request was received on.
Rx CH—This parameter determines which MIDI Channel the 01V uses to receive
MIDI messages, and can be set from 1 through 16. The device transmitting MIDI mes-
sages to the 01V should be set to the same MIDI Channel. When PROGRAM CHANGE
OMNI or CONTROL CHANGE OMNI is turned on, program change and Control
Change messages can be received regardless of this setting.
PROGRAM CHANGE—Program Change messages are used to recall mix scenes. See
“Program Change Scene Recall” on page 227 for more information. The four ON/OFF
switches in this group are as follows.
Tx determines whether the 01V transmits Program Change messages when a mix scene
is recalled. Rx determines whether the 01V recalls mix scenes when Program Change
messages are received. OMNI determines whether the 01V receives Program Change
messages on all 16 MIDI Channels (ON) or just the Rx channel (OFF).
ECHO determines whether received Program Change messages are echoed through to
the MIDI OUT port. When ECHO is on, the 01V receives Program Change messages
and echoes them through to the MIDI OUT port regardless of the MIDI Channel set-
tings.
CONTROL CHANGE—Control Change messages are used to control 01V parameters
in real time. See “Control Change Parameter Control” on page 229 for more informa-
tion. The four ON/OFF switches in this group are as follows.
Tx determines whether the 01V transmits Control Change messages when mix param-
eters are adjusted. Rx determines whether the 01V adjusts mix parameters when Con-
trol Change messages are received. OMNI determines whether the 01V receives Control
Change messages on all 16 MIDI Channels (ON) or just the Rx channel (OFF).
ECHO determines whether received Control Change messages are echoed through to
the MIDI OUT port. When ECHO is on, the 01V receives Control Change messages
and echoes them through to the MIDI OUT port regardless of the MIDI Channel set-
tings.
PARAM. CHANGE—Parameter Change System Exclusive messages are used to con-
trol 01V parameters in real time. See “System Exclusive Parameter Control” on page 231
for more information. The three ON/OFF switches in this group are as follows.
Tx determines whether the 01V transmits Parameter Change System Exclusive mes-
sages when mix parameters are adjusted. Rx determines whether or not the 01V adjusts
mix parameters when Parameter Change System Exclusive messages are received.
When Rx is turned on, the 01V transmits Parameter Change System Exclusive messages
in response to requests even if Tx is turned off.
Setting Computer Platform Port Transmission Speed
MIDI Standard MIDI MIDI IN, OUT, THRU 31.25 kbps
PC1 NEC PC9800 Series TO HOST 31.25 kbps
PC2 IBM PC compatible TO HOST 38.4 kbps
Mac Macintosh (clock: 1MHz) TO HOST 31.25 kbps
226 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
ECHO determines whether received Parameter Change System Exclusive messages are
echoed through to the MIDI OUT port. When ECHO is on, the 01V receives Parameter
Change System Exclusive messages and echoes them through to the MIDI OUT port
regardless of the MIDI Channel settings.
BULK—This switch determines whether the 01V receives MIDI Bulk requests and
MIDI Bulk Dump messages. When turned on, the 01V transmits Bulk Dump messages
in response to Bulk Dump requests. Bulk Dump messages and Bulk Dump requests are
never echoed. Bulk Dump messages can be transmitted from the 01V regardless of this
setting. See “Bulk Dump” on page 232 for more information.
Program Change Scene Recall 227
01V—Owner’s Manual
Program Change Scene Recall
When a MIDI Program Change message is received, a mix scene is recalled in accor-
dance with the scene memory to Program Change assignment table. Likewise, when a
mix scene is recalled, the 01V transmits a Program Change message that can be used to
recall a mix scene on another 01V or recorded to a MIDI sequencer for automated scene
recall. See “Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages” on page 188.
Initially, scene memories 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1
through 99 as listed in the “Scene Memory to Program Change Table” on page 273,
although these assignments can be edited on MIDI page 2. These assignments are used
for both transmission and reception, so if Program Change #10 is assigned to scene
memory 20, the 01V recalls scene memory 20 when Program Change #10 is received,
and transmits Program Change #10 when scene memory 20 is recalled.
In order for the 01V to receive and transmit MIDI Program Change messages, the Pro-
gram Change Rx and Tx switches on MIDI page 1 must be turned on. See “MIDI Setup”
on page 224 for more information.
1. Use the [MIDI] button to locate MIDI page 2, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the PGM CHG. column, and then use the
PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a Program
Change.
3. Use the right cursor button to select the NO. TITLE column, and then use
the PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a
scene memory.
A scene memory to Program Change assignment table is
provided on page 273. To reset the assignments to their ini-
tial settings, use the cursor buttons to select the INITIAL-
IZE switch, and then press the [ENTER] button. The
dialog box shown here appears. Click OK to initialize.
The current scene memory to Program Change assignment table can be stored to an
external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, using MIDI Bulk Dump. See “Bulk
Dump” on page 232 for more information.
If a scene memory is assigned to two or more Program Changes, the lowest Program
Change is transmitted when that scene memory is recalled.
If a scene memory that is not assigned to a Program Change is recalled, a System Exclu-
sive Parameter Change Scene Recall message is transmitted. See “System Exclusive
Parameter Control” on page 231 for more information.
228 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
Using Program Changes
In the following example, scene memory #10 is recalled on 01V-A and MIDI Program
Change #10 is transmitted, hence scene memory #10 is also recalled on 01V-B. This
assumes that the initial Program Change assignment table is being used. By editing the
Program Change to scene memory assignments, Program Change #10 could be used to
recall a different scene memory on 01V-B, or 01V-A could be set to transmit a different
Program Change when scene memory #10 is recalled.
In the following example, program, or patch #5 is selected on the MIDI keyboard and
MIDI Program Change #5 is transmitted, hence scene memory #5 is recalled on the
01V. This assumes that the initial Program Change assignment table is being used. By
editing the Program Change to scene memory assignments, Program Change #5 could
be used to recall a different scene memory on the 01V.
In the following example, Program Change #26 has been entered into a song on the
MIDI sequencer. When the song is played, MIDI Program Change #26 is transmitted
at the specified location and scene memory #26 is recalled automatically on the 01V.
Since the 01V outputs Program Change messages when mix scenes are recalled, mix
scene recalls can be recorded to the MIDI sequencer in real time.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
(Program Change #10)
MIDI
01V-A 01V-B
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN /
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
(Program Change #5)
MIDI INMIDI OUT
01V
MIDI keyboard
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
(Program Change #26)
MIDI
01V
MIDI Sequencer
Control Change Parameter Control 229
01V—Owner’s Manual
Control Change Parameter Control
When a MIDI Control Change message is received, a mix parameter is adjusted in
accordance with the parameter to Control Change assignment table. Likewise, when a
mix parameter is adjusted, the 01V transmits a Control Change message that can be
used to control another 01V or recorded to a MIDI sequencer for automated parameter
control.
Up to 114 mix parameters can be assigned to Control Changes 0 through 95 and 102
through 119 (Control Changes 96 through 101 are not used). Initially, 01V parameters
are assigned to Control Changes as listed in the “01V Parameter to Control Change
Table” on page 274, although these assignments can be edited on MIDI page 3. These
assignments are used for both transmission and reception, so if Control Change 10 is
assigned to channel fader 10, the 01V adjusts channel fader 10 when Control Change
#10 data is received, and transmits Control Change #10 when channel fader 10 is
adjusted. Assignment tables for use with the Yamaha Programmable Mixer 01 and
Yamaha 03D Digital Mixing Console are also provided.
In order for the 01V to receive and transmit MIDI Control Change messages, the Con-
trol Change Rx and Tx switches on MIDI page 1 must be turned on. See “MIDI Setup”
on page 224 for more information.
1. Use the [MIDI] button to locate MIDI page 3, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the CTL CHG. column, and then use the
PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a Control
Change.
Since Control Changes 0 and 32 are used in conjunction with Program Change and
Bank Select messages, some MIDI sequencers may not record these Control Changes
correctly. In this case, set Control Changes 0 and 32 to NO ASSIGN.
3. Use the right cursor button to select the PARAMETER columns and the
PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select parame-
ters.
A parameter to Control Change assignment table is
provided on page 274. To reset the assignments to their
initial settings, use the cursor buttons to select the INI-
TIALIZE switch, and then press the [ENTER] button.
The dialog box shown here appears. Choose DEFAULT
to initialize.
The P.MIX 01 and 03D switches are used to configure Control Changes for use with the
Yamaha Programmable Mixer 01 or Yamaha 03D Digital Mixer. Parameter to Control
Change assignment tables for these are provided on page 277.
The current parameter to Control Change assignment table can be stored to an external
MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, using MIDI Bulk Dump. See “Bulk Dump” on
page 232 for more information.
230 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
When a Control Change message is received while MIDI page 3 is displayed, that Con-
trol Change is selected automatically, making it easy to determine which Control
Change is being transmitted when, say, the slider of an external MIDI controller is oper-
ated.
Using Control Changes
In the following example, 01V-A Master fader is operated and MIDI Control Change
#27 is transmitted, hence the Master fader on 01V-B is also operated. This assumes that
the initial Control Change assignment table is being used. By editing the Control
Change to parameter assignments, Control Change #27 could be used to control a dif-
ferent parameter on 01V-B, or 01V-A could be set to transmit a different Control
Change when its Master fader is operated.
In the following example, an assignable MIDI controller on the MIDI keyboard is
assigned Control Change #85. When this controller is adjusted, Control Change #85 is
transmitted, hence the effects 1 send level for input channel 9 is adjusted on the 01V.
This assumes that the initial Control Change assignment table is being used. By editing
the Control Change to parameter assignments, MIDI controllers can be used to control
various 01V parameters.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
(Control Change #27)
MIDI
01V-A 01V-B
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN /
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
(Control Change #85)
MIDI INMIDI OUT
01V
MIDI keyboard
System Exclusive Parameter Control 231
01V—Owner’s Manual
In the following example, input channel 5 fader movements are recorded in real time
to a MIDI sequencer using Control Change #5. During playback, the sequencer trans-
mits Control Change #5 messages back to the 01V and fader 5 moves accordingly. This
technique can also be used with [ON] buttons, panpots, and effects, providing auto-
mated mixing.
System Exclusive Parameter Control
01V mix parameters can also be controlled in real time using MIDI System Exclusive
messages. When a mix parameter is adjusted, the 01V transmits a System Exclusive
Parameter Change message. The Transmit and Request functions on MIDI page 5 use
System Exclusive messages to request parameter settings from other 01Vs.
When programs are recalled from the EQ, dynamics, or effects library, System Exclusive
Parameter Change Library Recall messages are also transmitted. When channels are
soloed, System Exclusive Parameter Change Key Remote messages are transmitted.
If a scene memory that is not assigned to a Program Change is recalled, a System Exclu-
sive Parameter Change Scene Recall message is transmitted.
In order for the 01V to receive and transmit System Exclusive Parameter Change mes-
sages, the PARAM. CHANGE Rx and Tx switches on MIDI page 1 must be turned on.
See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information.
Data formats for System Exclusive Parameter Change messages are provided in “MIDI
Data Format” on page 280.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN /
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
MIDI Control Change #5
Playback
01V
MIDI Control Change #5
Recording
MIDI Sequencer
232 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
Bulk Dump
01V scene memories, library programs, and setup data can be transferred to another
MIDI device using System Exclusive Bulk Dump. This can be used to back up impor-
tant 01V data to a MIDI data filer or controlling computer, or to exchange data between
01Vs.
The 01V can transmit MIDI System Exclusive Bulk Dump messages at anytime. In
order for the 01V to respond to Bulk Dump requests from other MIDI devices, the
BULK Rx switch on MIDI page 1 must be turned on. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for
more information.
1. Use the [MIDI] button to locate MIDI page 4, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select a CATEGORY switch, and press the
[ENTER] button to select it.
The switch of the selected category appears highlighted.
3. For the SCENE MEM., LIBRARY, and REMOTE categories, use the cursor
buttons, PARAMETER wheel, and [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set
the TYPE, FROM, and TO parameters.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the REQUEST or TRANSMIT switch, and
then press the [ENTER] button.
When REQUEST is used, the 01V transmits a MIDI Bulk Dump request message. The
receiving device then transmits the requested Bulk Dump data to the 01V. When
TRANSMIT is used, the 01V transmits the selected data category via Bulk Dump.
Data Type Type Range Description
ALL ——All the following data
SETUP MEM. ——
01V setup data (all current set-
tings)
PGM. TABLE ——
MIDI page 2 settings (scene
memory to Program Change
assignment table)
CTL. TABLE ——
MIDI page 3 settings (parame-
ter to Control Change assign-
ment table)
SCENE MEM. —EDIT, 1–99 Scene memories (EDIT is the
Edit Buffer)
LIBRARY
EQ 41–80 EQ library user programs
DYNA 41–80 Dynamics library user programs
EFF 43–99 Effects library user programs
REMOTE
INTP Banks 1–4 REMOTE page 1 banks
MMC ALL (locate points 1–6) REMOTE page 2 locate points
UDEF Banks 1–4 REMOTE page 3 banks
Bulk Dump 233
01V—Owner’s Manual
TRANSMIT INTERVAL—This parameter specifies the interval between data blocks
during Bulk Dump transmission. MIDI devices with a relatively small data buffer are
easily overloaded when too much data is received at once. Setting an interval of, say,
300 milliseconds allows a slower device to process the received MIDI data correctly. An
interval setting of 0 can be used when transferring Bulk Dump data between 01Vs.
Using MIDI Bulk Dump
In the following example, the scene memories and user effects programs from 01V-A
are transferred to 01V-B using MIDI Bulk Dump. The BULK Rx switch on MIDI page
1 of 01V-B must be turned on, otherwise the Bulk Dump data will be ignored. See
“MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information.
In the following example, all data from the 01V is transferred to a MIDI data filer. The
storage device could also be a computer running software with Bulk data management
features. In order to transfer Bulk Dump data from the MIDI data filer back to the 01V,
the BULK Rx switch on MIDI page 1 must be turned on. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224
for more information.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
(Scene memories and
effects programs)
MIDI Bulk Dump
01V-A 01V-B
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100 100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
MIDI Bulk Dump (All data)
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
01V
MIDI data filer
234 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
Local Control
The MIDI Local Control function can be used to control a remote 01V. Normally, the
01V controls (faders, buttons, rotary controls, and display pages) set the 01V’s internal
parameters. When Local Control is turned off, the internal parameters remain the same
when controls are operated but the System Exclusive Parameter Change messages that
the 01V tramsits can be used to control a remote 01V. Controllable parameters include
all those that can be stored in mix scenes and the solo and monitor setings. When Local
Control is turned off, the parameter values displayed on the local 01V are in fact those
of the remote 01V. In addition, the meters on the local 01V display the signals levels of
the remote 01V. This is useful when two 01Vs are cascaded together. See “Cascading
01Vs” on page 214 for more information.
1. Use the [MIDI] button to locate MIDI page 5, as shown below.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the LOCAL CONTROL switch, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
Local Control is turned off and MIDI page 5 appears, as shown below.
While Local Control is turned off, the function area of the display
appears highlighted, as shown here, serving as a reminder that Local
Control is off.
The TRANSMIT and REQUEST functions are used to match local and
remote settings when 01Vs are first connected. The TRANSMIT func-
tion transmits the local 01V CONTROLLER settings to the remote 01V. The REQUEST
function requests the parameter settings of the remote 01V and sets the local 01V CON-
TROLLER accordingly. The internal parameters of the local 01V are unaffected by
either function.
For scene memories, the local 01V stores and recalls its own parameter settings regard-
less of the Local Control function.
Be aware that when Local Control is being used to control a remote 01V (i.e., Local
Control is off on the local 01V), remote control may be disrupted temporarily due to
wordclock abnormalities on the local 01V. Also, if parameters are adjusted directly on
the remote 01V, the meters on the local 01V may not display levels correctly.
Local Control cannot be turned off while a mix-scene crossfade is in progress (Fade
Time), and a warning message appears if you try to do so. Local Control can, however,
be turned on while a mix-scene fade is in progress.
Local Control 235
01V—Owner’s Manual
In the following example, 01V-A (remote) and 01V-B (local) are cascaded together for
48-channel digital mixing. Using the Local Control function, both 01Vs can be con-
trolled using the faders, buttons, rotary controls, and display pages of 01V-B. Even the
signal levels of 01V-A can be metered on 01V-B. To control 01-B, the Local Control
function on 01V-B is turned ON. To control 01V-A, the Local Control function on
01V-B is turned OFF. Both 01Vs should be set to the same PORT (MIDI or TO HOST),
and the MIDI receive channel (Rx) on 01V-A should match the MIDI transmit channel
(Tx) on 01V-B. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL OUT
01V-A (remote) 01V-B (local)
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL IN
TO HOST
TO HOST
236 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
MIDI Machine Control
Using MIDI Machine Control (MMC) commands, an MMC-compatible recorder can
be controlled from the 01V. [ON] buttons 1 through 6 can be used to control transport
functions, while [SEL] buttons 1 through 6 can be used to locate six definable locate
points. MMC commands are transmitted via MIDI.
1. Use the [REMOTE] button to locate REMOTE page 2, as shown below.
While this page is displayed, controls other than [ON] buttons 1 through 6 and [SEL]
buttons 1 through 6 are disabled.
2. Use the cursor buttons to select the DEVICE No. parameter, and the
PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to select a device
number.
The device number, which can be set from 1 through 127 or ALL, should be set to
match that of the recorder you want to control. When set to ALL, all MMC-compatible
recorders connected can be controlled together.
3. Use [ON] buttons 1 through 6 to transmit the following transport com-
mands to a recorder.
4. Use the cursor buttons and PARAMETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC]
buttons to set the locate times in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
5. Use [SEL] buttons 1 through 6 to transmit the locate commands to the
recorder.
Locate points can be stored using MIDI Bulk Dump. See “Bulk Dump” on page 232 for
more information.
On Button Function MMC Command Value
1 Rewind 05
2 Fast Forward 04
3 Stop 01
4 Play 02
5 Pause 09
6 Record 06
MIDI Machine Control 237
01V—Owner’s Manual
In the following example, an MMC-compatible hard disk recording system running on
a personal computer is remotely controlled from an 01V using MMC commands. The
device number on REMOTE page 2 of the 01V should match that of the hard disk
recorder.
In the following example, an MMC-compatible digital multitrack recorder is remotely
controlled from an 01V using MMC commands. The device number on REMOTE
page 2 of the 01V should match that of the digital multitrack recorder.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100 100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
01V
TO HOST
Digital audio
MIDI Machine Control
Serial port
Personal computer
with audio card
OPTION I/O
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
8-TRACK DIGITAL
DIGITAL IN
OPTION I/O
DIGITAL OUT
01V
Digital multitrack
MIDI OUT
MIDI Machine Control
MIDI IN
238 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
User Defined MIDI Controllers
The [SOLO] buttons, [ON] buttons, and faders of channels 1 through 16 and Master
can be used as MIDI controllers for remote MIDI device control. A MIDI data string
up to 16 bytes long can be assigned to each control, and assignments are active only
when REMOTE page 3 is displayed. Select another page and these controls perform
their regular functions. Four assignment sets can be stored in banks 1 through 4.
1. Use the [REMOTE] button to locate REMOTE page 3, as shown below.
While this page is displayed, the [SOLO] and [ON] buttons and faders on channels 1
through 16 and Master transmit the assigned MIDI data when operated. Other controls
are disabled.
2. Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels 1 through 16 or Master, and the
cursor buttons and [ENTER] button to select the SOLO, ON, and FADER
switches.
Controls can also be selected simply by operating them. For example, operating chan-
nel fader 5 automatically selects it. The switch of the selected control appears high-
lighted. The Master channel does not feature a [SOLO] button.
3. Use the cursor buttons to select the DATA parameters, and the PARAM-
ETER wheel or [–1/DEC] and [+1/INC] buttons to set them.
The following hexadecimal DATA values can be set.
Hex: 00–FF
SW: [SOLO] and [ON] buttons (7F for ON, 00 for OFF)
FAD: Faders (00–7F)
END: Completes the command
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the BANK switches, and then press the
[ENTER] button to activate the selected bank.
The switch of the active bank appears highlighted.
In UNLATCH mode, the [SOLO] and [ON] buttons function as momentary switches,
and the specified data is transmitted when they’re pressed and then released. SW is
transmitted as 7F when buttons are pressed, and 00 when they’re released.
In LATCH mode, the [SOLO] and [ON] buttons function as latching switches (i.e., they
remain on when pressed), and the specified data is transmitted only when they’re
pressed. SW is transmitted as 7F when buttons are pressed, and 00 is transmitted when
the buttons are pressed again.
When a Control Change message is received while REMOTE page 3 is displayed, its
value appears in the DATA boxes, making it easy to determine which Control Change
is being transmitted when, say, the slider of an external MIDI controller is operated.
Custom assignments are stored when other banks are selected, and banks can be stored
using MIDI Bulk Dump. See “Bulk Dump” on page 232 for more information.
Linking 01Vs 239
01V—Owner’s Manual
To reset a bank back to its initial assignments, make it the active bank, select the INI-
TIALIZE switch, and then press the [ENTER] button. A confirmation dialog box
appears. Select OK, and then press the [ENTER] button to confirm your action. The
selected bank is reset to its initial assignments.
In the following example, REMOTE page 3 is displayed while the modulation control-
ler on the MIDI keyboard is operated. The 01V detects Modulation Controller Control
Change #1 and assigns it to the selected 01V fader. Then, when the fader is operated,
the 01V transmits Control Change #1 messages back to the MIDI keyboard. The 01V
must be set to receive MIDI Control Change messages. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224
for more information.
Linking 01Vs
The TO HOST connection links the two or more 01Vs together for simultaneous oper-
ation, so when, for example, the fader mode is set to Aux 1 on 01V-B, the fader mode
on 01V-A is also set to Aux 1, and vice versa. Other linked functions include
•Operations
Fader mode & Display page selection, Scene memory title edit, and Mix scene store
(including title) and recall
• Parameters
Solo, Metering point (HOME page 5), and Meter Peak Hold on/off
The LINK PORT parameter on MIDI page 1 should be set to HOST. See “MIDI Setup”
on page 224 for more information.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
(Control Change)
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
01V
MIDI keyboard
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
01V-A 01V-B
TO HOST
TO HOST
240 Chapter 17—MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
Linking 01Vs using the MIDI Ports
If the TO HOST port is connected to a computer for MIDI purposes, simultaneous
operation of two 01Vs is still possible using the MIDI ports, as shown below. The LINK
PORT parameter on MIDI page 1 should be set to MIDI. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224
for more information.
Cascading Two or More 01Vs
Three or more 01Vs can be linked as shown below, although in this case, only settings
made on 01VA are reflected to the other 01Vs. Adjustments made on 01V-B or 01V-C
do not affect the other 01Vs. The LINK PORT parameters on MIDI page 1 should be
set to MIDI. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information.
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
– ∞
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
∞
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
01V-A 01V-B
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
01V-A 01V-B 01V-C
MIDI
THRU
MIDI
IN
MIDI
THRU
MIDI
IN
MIDI
OUT
System Examples 241
01V—Owner’s Manual
System Examples
18
In this chapter...
01V & ADAT-Interface Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Two 01Vs & two ADAT-Interface Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
01V & Tascam-Interface Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Two 01Vs & two Tascam-Interface Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
01V & Pro Tools (AES/EBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
242 Chapter 18—System Examples
01V—Owner’s Manual
01V & ADAT-Interface Recorder
This example shows how the 01V can be used with an 8-track digital tape recorder, or
8-track hard disk recorder, featuring ADAT optical connections to create a 16-input,
8-track fully digital recording system, with the 16 mic/line inputs and eight digital tape
returns providing up to 24 inputs during mixdown.
System Components
• 01V Digital Mixing Console
• MY8-AT Option I/O card
• 8-track digital tape recorder, or 8-track hard disk recorder, such as Alesis ADAT, Ale-
sis ADAT-XT, Alesis M20, Akai DR8, Akai DD8, Fostex D-90, or Fostex CX-8.
• Two ADAT optical cables
See “Installing Option I/O Cards” on page 218 for MY8-AT installation instructions.
Wordclock Configuration
For digital audio transfer, digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized (see
“About Wordclocks” on page 206). In this example, the digital multitrack recorder is
wordclock master and the 01V and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves. The 01V derives
its wordclock from the Option I/O digital input. The DAT derives its wordclock from
the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V. The wordclock frequency, which is the same
as the sampling rate, is set when the digital multitrack tape is formatted or first
recorded.
For digital recording from the DAT recorder to the digital multitrack recorder, the DAT
recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01V and digital multitrack
recorder as wordclock slaves. In this case, the 01V would derive its wordclock from the
Digital Stereo Coaxial In connection, and the digital multitrack recorder would derive
its wordclock from the 01V’s Option I/O connection. The sampling rate will be the
same as that used when the DAT tape was recorded. If a CD player is used instead of the
DAT, the sampling rate will be fixed at 44.1 kHz, the industry-standard for music CDs.
System Notes
• The digital IN and OUT connectors on the MY8-AT card are connected to the digital
multitrack recorder using ADAT optical cables.
• On an Alesis ADAT 8-Track Digital Audio Recorder, use the DIGITAL IN button to
select the optical digital input.
• Although the 01V is a four-bus mixer, a combination of bus outs, aux sends, and
channel direct outputs can be assigned to the digital outputs for eight-track simulta-
neous recording. See “Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs” on page 219 for more
information.
01V & ADAT-Interface Recorder 243
01V—Owner’s Manual
ADAT
PHANTOM +48V
OFF ON
PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN
–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
Digital in
OPTION I/O
Digital out
Digital multitrack
(wordclock master)
Monitors
Headphones
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
MIC/LINE inputs 1–16
Vocals Drums
Guitar processor
Bass processor
Power Amp
DAT
00.00.00.00
OUT
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
IN
Digital in
Digital out
DAT recorder
(wordclock slave)
01V
(wordclock slave)
Personal computer
running MIDI software
Drum machine
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
Serial port
MIDI keyboard
Tone generator
MIDI
interface
244 Chapter 18—System Examples
01V—Owner’s Manual
Two 01Vs & two ADAT-Interface Recorders
This example shows how two 01Vs can be used with two 8-track digital tape recorders,
or 8-track hard disk recorders, featuring ADAT optical connections to create a 32-input,
16-track fully digital recording system, with the 32 mic/line inputs and 16 digital tape
returns providing up to 48 inputs during mixdown.
01V-A and 01V-B are cascaded together using the Stereo Digital In and Stereo Digital
Out connections. 01V-B audio signals are combined into a stereo mix, which is then fed
to 01V-A via the Digital Stereo Coaxial connections and mixed with the audio signals
of 01V-A. The TO HOST connection links the two 01Vs together for simultaneous
operation, so when, for example, the fader mode is set to Aux 1 on 01V-A, the fader
mode on 01V-B is also set to Aux 1, and vice versa. See “Cascading 01Vs” on page 214
for more information.
System Components
• Two 01V Digital Mixing Consoles
• Two MY8-AT Option I/O cards
• Two 8-track digital tape recorders, or 8-track hard disk recorders, such as Alesis
ADAT, ADAT-XT, Alesis M20, Akai DR8, Akai DD8, Fostex D-90, or Fostex CX-8.
• Four ADAT optical cables
• ADAT sync cable
See “Installing Option I/O Cards” on page 218 for MY8-AT installation instructions.
Wordclock Configuration
For digital audio transfer, digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized (see
“About Wordclocks” on page 206). In this example, digital multitrack recorder A is
wordclock master, while digital multitrack recorder B, the 01Vs, and DAT recorder are
wordclock slaves. Digital multitrack recorder B derives its wordclock from the sync con-
nection with recorder A. The 01Vs derive their wordclocks from their Option I/O dig-
ital inputs, and the DAT, from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V. The wordclock
frequency, which is the same as the sampling rate, is set when the digital multitrack tape
is formatted or first recorded.
For digital recording from the DAT recorder to the digital multitrack recorders, the
DAT recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01Vs and digital multi-
track recorders as wordclock slaves. The sampling rate will be the same as that used
when the DAT tape was recorded. If a CD player is used instead of the DAT, the sam-
pling rate will be fixed at 44.1 kHz, the industry-standard for music CDs.
System Notes
• The digital IN and OUT connectors on the MY8-AT cards are connected to the dig-
ital multitrack recorders using ADAT optical cables.
• On Alesis ADAT 8-Track Digital Audio Recorders, use the DIGITAL IN button to
select the optical digital input.
• Although the 01V is a four-bus mixer, a combination of bus outs, aux sends, and
channel direct outputs can be assigned to the digital outputs for eight-track simulta-
neous recording. See “Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs” on page 219 for more
information.
Two 01Vs & two ADAT-Interface Recorders 245
01V—Owner’s Manual
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL OUT
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL IN
TO HOST
TO HOST
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
Monitors
Headphones
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
Power Amp
01V-A
(wordclock slave)
ADAT
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL) Digital in
OPTION I/O
Digital out
Digital multitrack-B
(wordclock slave)
OUT
IN
01V-B
(wordclock slave)
ADAT
Digital in
OPTION I/O
Digital out
Digital multitrack-A
(wordclock master)
DAT
00.00.00.00
OUT
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
IN
Digital in
Digital out
SYNC
OUT
SYNC
IN
DAT recorder
(wordclock slave)
Personal computer
running MIDI software
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Serial port
MIDI
interface
246 Chapter 18—System Examples
01V—Owner’s Manual
01V & Tascam-Interface Recorder
This example shows how the 01V can be used with an 8-track digital tape recorder, or
8-track hard disk recorder, featuring a Tascam Digital Audio Interface (TDIF-1) con-
nection to create a 16-input, 8-track fully digital recording system, with the 16 mic/line
inputs and eight digital tape returns providing up to 24 inputs during mixdown.
System Components
• 01V Digital Mixing Console
• MY8-TD Option I/O card
• 8-track digital tape recorder, or 8-track hard disk recorder, such as the Tascam DA-38
Tascam DA-88, Tascam DA-98, or Akai DD8.
• Tascam PW-88D digital audio cable
See “Installing Option I/O Cards” on page 218 for MY8-TD installation instructions.
Wordclock Configuration
For digital audio transfer, digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized (see
“About Wordclocks” on page 206). In this example, the digital multitrack recorder is
wordclock master and the 01V and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves. The 01V derives
its wordclock from the Option I/O digital input. The DAT derives its wordclock from
the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V. The wordclock frequency, which is the same
as the sampling rate, is set when the digital multitrack tape is formatted or first
recorded.
For digital recording from the DAT recorder to the digital multitrack recorder, the DAT
recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01V and digital multitrack
recorder as wordclock slaves. In this case, the 01V would derive its wordclock from the
Digital Stereo Coaxial In connection. Since the digital multitrack recorder cannot
derive a wordclock signal from its digital inputs, a BNC cable is used to supply a word-
clock signal from the 01V. (Note that this connection is only necessary when the digital
multitrack recorder is used as a wordclock slave.) The sampling rate will be the same as
that used when the DAT tape was recorded. If a CD player is used instead of the DAT,
the sampling rate will be fixed at 44.1 kHz, the industry-standard for music CDs.
System Notes
• The TDIF-1 connector on the MY8-TD is connected to the digital multitrack
recorder using a Tascam PW-88D digital audio cable.
• MY8-TD cards feature a device selector switch that should be set according to the
type of recorder connected. “EXT: 88” for DA-88. “INT: 38” for DA-38 or other
recorder.
• Although the 01V is a four-bus mixer, a combination of bus outs, aux sends, and
channel direct outputs can be assigned to the digital outputs for eight-track simulta-
neous recording. See “Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs” on page 219 for more
information.
• The BNC wordclock connection from the 01V to the digital multitrack recorder is
only necessary when the digital multitrack recorder is used as a wordclock slave.
01V & Tascam-Interface Recorder 247
01V—Owner’s Manual
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL) TDIF-1TDIF-1
OPTION I/O
WORD
CLOCK
OUT
SYNC IN
PW-88D
Digital multitrack
(wordclock master)
Monitors
Headphones
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
MIC/LINE inputs 1–16
Vocals Drums
Power Amp
DAT
00.00.00.00
OUT
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
IN
Digital in
Digital out
DAT recorder
(wordclock slave)
01V
(wordclock slave)
8-TRACK DIGITAL
Personal computer
running MIDI software
Drum machine
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
Serial port
MIDI keyboard
Tone generator
MIDI
interface
Guitar processor
Bass processor
248 Chapter 18—System Examples
01V—Owner’s Manual
Two 01Vs & two Tascam-Interface Recorders
This example shows how two 01Vs can be used with two 8-track digital tape recorders,
or 8-track hard disk recorders, featuring Tascam Digital Audio Interface (TDIF-1) con-
nections to create a 32-input, 16-track fully digital recording system, with the 32
mic/line inputs and 16 digital tape returns providing up to 48 inputs during mixdown.
01V-A and 01V-B are cascaded together using the Stereo Digital In and Stereo Digital
Out connections. 01V-B audio signals are combined into a stereo mix, which is then fed
to 01V-A via the Digital Stereo Coaxial connections and mixed with the audio signals
of 01V-A. The TO HOST connection links the two 01Vs together for simultaneous
operation, so when, for example, the fader mode is set to Aux 1 on 01V-A, the fader
mode on 01V-B is also set to Aux 1, and vice versa. See “Cascading 01Vs” on page 214
for more information.
System Components
• Two 01V Digital Mixing Consoles
• Two MY8-TD Option I/O cards
• Two 8-track digital tape recorders, or 8-track hard disk recorders, such as the Tascam
DA-38 Tascam DA-88, Tascam DA-98, or Akai DD8.
• Two Tascam PW-88D digital audio cables
• Tascam PW-88S sync cable
See “Installing Option I/O Cards” on page 218 for MY8-TD installation instructions.
Wordclock Configuration
For digital audio transfer, digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized (see
“About Wordclocks” on page 206). In this example, digital multitrack recorder A is
wordclock master, while digital multitrack recorder B, the 01Vs, and DAT recorder are
wordclock slaves. Digital multitrack recorder B derives its wordclock from the sync con-
nection with recorder A. The 01Vs derive their wordclocks from their Option I/O dig-
ital inputs, and the DAT, from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V. The wordclock
frequency, which is the same as the sampling rate, is set when the digital multitrack tape
is formatted or first recorded.
For digital recording from the DAT recorder to the digital multitrack recorders, the
DAT recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01Vs and digital multi-
track recorders as wordclock slaves. The sampling rate will be the same as that used
when the DAT tape was recorded. If a CD player is used instead of the DAT, the sam-
pling rate will be fixed at 44.1 kHz, the industry-standard for music CDs.
System Notes
• The TDIF-1 connectors on the MY8-TD cards are connected to the digital multi-
track recorders using Tascam PW-88D digital audio cables.
• MY8-TD cards feature a device selector switch that should be set according to the
type of recorder connected. “EXT: 88” for DA-88. “INT: 38” for DA-38 or other
recorder.
• Although the 01V is a four-bus mixer, a combination of bus outs, aux sends, and
channel direct outputs can be assigned to the digital outputs for eight-track simulta-
neous recording. See “Assigning Option I/O Digital Outputs” on page 219 for more
information.
Two 01Vs & two Tascam-Interface Recorders 249
01V—Owner’s Manual
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL OUT
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL IN
TO HOST
TO HOST
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
Monitors
Personal computer
running MIDI software
Headphones
PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
Power Amp
01V-A
(wordclock slave)
PHANTOM +48V OFF ON PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 GAIN +10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN –20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
Digital multitrack-B
(wordclock slave)
01V-B
(wordclock slave)
DAT
00.00.00.00
OUT
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
IN
Digital in
Digital out
SYNC
OUT
SYNC
IN
DAT recorder
(wordclock slave)
TDIF-1
PW-88D
PW-88S
sync cable
TDIF-1
OPTION I/O
Digital multitrack-A
(wordclock master)
8-TRACK DIGITAL
TDIF-1TDIF-1
OPTION I/O 8-TRACK DIGITAL
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Serial port
MIDI
interface
250 Chapter 18—System Examples
01V—Owner’s Manual
01V & Pro Tools (AES/EBU)
This example shows how the 01V can be used with a Pro Tools system to create a
16-input, 8-track fully digital recording system, with the 16 mic/line inputs and eight
digital tape returns providing up to 24 inputs during mixdown.
A Digidesign 888 I/O Audio Interface connects the 01V to the Pro Tools system, with a
special 50-pin Pro Tools cable between the computer card and 888. The 01V connects
to the 888 via a 25-pin D-sub cable and XLR to 25-pin D-sub splitter box, which pro-
vides eight AES/EBU inputs (four XLRs) and eight AES/EBU outputs (four XLRs).
Pro Tools transport functions can be controlled remotely from the 01V using MIDI
Machine Control (MMC) commands. See “MIDI Machine Control” on page 236 for
more information.
System Components
• 01V Digital Mixing Console
• MY8-AE Option I/O card
• Pro Tools system with Digidesign 888 I/O Audio Interface
• XLR to 25-pin D-sub splitter box (or 25-pin D-sub to XLR break-out cable)
• 25-pin D-sub cable, 50-pin Pro Tools cable
See “Installing Option I/O Cards” on page 218 for MY8-AE installation instructions.
Wordclock Configuration
For digital audio transfer, digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized (see
“About Wordclocks” on page 206). In this example, Pro Tools is wordclock master and
the 01V and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves. The 01V derives its wordclock from the
Option I/O digital input. The DAT derives its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial
Out of the 01V. The wordclock frequency, which is the same as the sampling rate, is set
by Pro Tools.
For digital recording from the DAT recorder to Pro Tools, the DAT recorder must be
configured as wordclock master and the 01V and Pro Tools as wordclock slaves. In this
case, the 01V would derive its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In connection,
and Pro Tools would derive its wordclock from the 01V’s Option I/O connection. The
sampling rate will be the same as that used when the DAT tape was recorded. If a CD
player is used instead of the DAT, the sampling rate will be fixed at 44.1 kHz, the indus-
try-standard for music CDs.
System Notes
• The AES/EBU connector on the MY8-AE card is connected to the XLR to 25-pin
D-sub splitter box using a 25-pin D-sub cable.
• The splitter box is connected to the 888 I/O Audio Interface using AES/EBU compat-
ible XLR cables.
• The 888 I/O Audio Interface is connected to the Pro Tools audio card using a special
50-pin Pro Tools cable.
• The XLR to 25-pin D-sub splitter box is custom made and not available from
Yamaha.
• A 25-pin D-sub to XLR break-out cable could be used instead of the splitter box.
01V & Pro Tools (AES/EBU) 251
01V—Owner’s Manual
PHANTOM +48V
OFF ON
PHANTOM +48V
INPUT (BAL)
2TR PHONES
L
R
IN
LEVEL LEVELGAIN
13/14 15/16 PHONES
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
MONITOR
2TR IN
15/16
2TR IN
13
14
15
16
26dB
1
26dB
2
26dB
3
26dB
4
26dB
5
26dB
6
26dB
7
26dB
8
26dB
9
26dB
10
26dB
11
26dB
12
PAD
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
L STEREO R
CLIP
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
–18
–24
–30
–36
–42
–48
EQ
SOLO
1 RETURN 2
PARAMETER
HIGH
SELECTED CHANNEL
1 RETURN 2
FUNCTION
MEMORY
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
PAN
F
G
PAN
F
G
UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I/O REMOTE
AUX 1
HOME
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
DYNAMICS EQ/ATT Ø/DELAY PAN/
ROUTING
SELSEL
MASTER
STEREO
STEREO
MASTER
SEL
SOLO SOLO
MEMORY
ON
–1/DEC
ENTER
+1/INC
CURSOR
ON ON
0
–5
–10
–15
–20
–30
–40
–50
–70
–
15/16
15/16
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
13/14
13/14
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
12
12
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
11
11
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
10
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
9
9
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
8
8
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
7
7
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
6
6
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
5
5
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
4
4
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
3
3
SEL
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
2
2
SEL 232221201918
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
1
1
SEL
17
SOLO
ON
6
0
5
10
20
40
60
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16 –20+10 100100
GAIN
–20+10
GAIN
+10 –34
–60–16
GAIN
OFF ON
FADER MODE
24
–10dBV (UNBAL)
AES/EBU
OPTION I/O
Monitors
MONITOR
OUT
MIC/LINE inputs 1–16
Vocals Drums
Power Amp
DAT
00.00.00.00
OUT
DIGITAL STEREO
COAXIAL
IN
Digital in
Digital out
DAT recorder
(wordclock slave)
01V
(wordclock slave)
Pro Tools (wordclock master)
25-pin D-sub cable
XLR cables
50-pin Pro Tools cable
888 I/O Audio Interface
XLR to D-sub splitter box
Drum machine
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
To computer
Serial port
MIDI keyboard
Tone generator
MIDI
interface
Guitar processor
Bass processor
Troubleshooting 253
01V—Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Symptom Advice
Cannot turn on the 01V.
Make sure that the power cord is connected to a suitable AC wall out-
let. See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 11 for more informa-
tion.
Make sure that the 01V POWER switch is set to the ON position. See
“Turning On the 01V” on page 11 for more information.
If you still cannot turn on the 01V, contact your Yamaha dealer.
The display is difficult to read. Try adjusting the contrast. See “Display, Selected Channel Controls &
Meters” on page 16 for more information.
Connected a condenser-type
microphone but it doesn’t work.
Make sure that the +48 V phantom power is turned on for that input.
If a phone plug is plugged into the same input channel, the XLR input
is disabled. See “Input Channel Overview” on page 40 for more infor-
mation.
The SELECTED CHANNEL PAN and
EQ F and G controls adjust the
wrong channel.
Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. See “SEL Buttons” on page
32 for more information.
Input channel signal levels are too
low or too high.
Make sure that the GAIN control and PAD switch are set correctly. See
Gain and Pad on page 41.
Use the HOME pages to check signal levels. See “Metering Signal Lev-
els” on page 83 for more information.
Faders don’t function as expected. Make sure that you have selected the right fader mode. See “Faders
(plus Return Rotary Controls)” on page 35 for more information.
[SEL] buttons don’t function as
expected. Make sure that you have selected the correct fader mode. See “SEL
Buttons” on page 32 for more information.
[SOLO] buttons don’t function as
expected. Make sure that you have selected the correct fader mode. See “Solo
Buttons” on page 33 for more information.
[ON] buttons don’t function as
expected. Make sure that you have selected the correct fader mode. See “ON
Buttons” on page 34 for more information.
Effects Return Rotary controls don’t
function as expected Make sure that you have selected the correct fader mode. See “Faders
(plus Return Rotary Controls)” on page 35 for more information.
Cannot access input channels 17
through 24.
Input channels 17 through 24 are available only when an optional
Option I/O card is installed. See “About Option I/O Cards” on page
216 for more information.
Cannot select the HI-MID and
LO-MID EQ bands on input channels
17 through 24.
Input channels 17 through 24 feature 2-band EQ, so these bands can-
not be selected.
Cannot send signals from input
channels 17 through 24 to aux
sends 3 and 4.
This is correct. Input channels 17 through 24 can only be sent to aux
sends 1 and 2. See “About the Aux Sends” on page 94 for more infor-
mation.
Input signals 1 through 8 appear on
input channels 17 through 24. Probably because the inputs have been swapped. See “Swapping
Inputs 1–8 & 17–24” on page 51 for more information.
Input signals are present but the
stereo output is dead.
Raise the STEREO fader and turn on the STEREO [ON] button. Make
sure that the input channels are routed to the stereo output. See
“Routing Input Channels” on page 49 for more information.
254 Troubleshooting
01V—Owner’s Manual
Input signals are present but the
monitor output and phones are
dead.
Make sure that the MONITOR–2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR. See
“Using Monitor” on page 78 for more information.
Make sure a monitor SOURCE is selected on SETUP page 2. See “Mon-
itor Setup” on page 78 for more information.
Make sure that the MONITOR OUT LEVEL (or PHONES LEVEL) control
is turned up. Also check the MONI TRIM parameter on SETUP page 2.
See “Monitor Setup” on page 78 for more information.
Solo mode is selected but nothing
can be heard.
Make sure that the MONITOR–2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR. See
“Two-track Input (2TR IN)” on page 77 for more information.
Make sure that the MONITOR OUT LEVEL (or PHONES LEVEL) control
is turned up, and that the SOLO TRIM control on SETUP page 2 is
turned up. See “Using Solo” on page 81 for more information.
Solo doesn’t function as expected
and the [SOLO] button indicators
light up instead of flashing.
Check whether or not the Solo function is enabled. See “Solo Setup”
on page 80 for more information.
Channels seem to run out of
headroom, especially when EQ
boost is applied.
Use the Attenuator function on the EQ page to reduce the level. See
“Attenuating Input Channel Signals” on page 43 for more informa-
tion.
The Digital Stereo Coaxial In signal
appears on input channels 13 and
14.
Probably because the Digital Stereo Coaxial In is flipped with inputs
13 and 14. See “Digital Stereo In” on page 213 for more information.
Cannot hear signals connected to
inputs 13 and 14.
Probably because these inputs have been flipped with the Digital Ste-
reo Coaxial In on PAN/ROUT page 4. See “Digital Stereo In” on page
213 for more information.
The 2TR IN signal appears on input
channels 15 and 16. Probably because the 15/16–2TR IN switch is set to 2TR IN. See
“Two-track Input (2TR IN)” on page 77 for more information.
Cannot hear signals connected to
inputs 15 and 16. Probably because the 15/16–2TR IN switch is set to 2TR IN. See
“Two-track Input (2TR IN)” on page 77 for more information.
Cannot select the bus out master
faders.
Bus out master levels are set using the virtual faders on PAN/ROUT
page 3. See “Setting Bus Out Master Levels” on page 109 for more
information.
Recordings made via the Digital
Stereo Coaxial Out or Option I/O
sound grainy.
Make sure that the Dither function is set to match the wordlength of
the digital recorder. See “Output Dither” on page 212 for more infor-
mation.
Digital Stereo Coaxial In and Option
I/O digital input signals sound noisy.
Make sure that all digital audio equipment is wordclock synchronized
to a common wordclock source. See “About Wordclocks” on page
206 for more information.
Input channels are configured as a
stereo pair but the signal appears to
be mono.
Make sure that the odd channel is panned hard left and the right
channel is panned hard right. See “Panning Input Channels” on page
47 for more information.
Configured a stereo pair but the
signal sounds out of phase.
Make sure that the phase of both input channels in the stereo pair is
set the same. Phase settings are not linked when channels are paired.
See “Changing the Input Phase” on page 42 for more information.
Signals sound delayed. Make sure that the Channel Delay function is set correctly. See “Delay-
ing Channel Signals” on page 45 for more information.
Added faders to a fader group but
grouping does not work. Make sure that the fader group is enabled. See “Grouping Faders” on
page 55 for more information.
Symptom Advice
Troubleshooting 255
01V—Owner’s Manual
Added channels to a mute group
but group muting does not work. Make sure that the mute group is enabled. See “Grouping Mutes” on
page 56 for more information.
Cannot store an EQ program.
EQ settings cannot be stored to preset programs 1 through 40. Try
storing to user programs 41 through 80. See “Storing EQ Programs”
on page 68 for more information. EQ settings of channel 17 through
24 can not be stored.
Cannot recall EQ programs to input
channels 17 through 24. EQ programs cannot be recalled to input channels 17 through 24.
Cannot locate the aux send
panpots. Aux send panpots are only available when aux sends are paired. See
“Pairing Aux Sends” on page 101 for more information.
The bus master level faders work in
unison. Probably because the bus outs are paired. See “Pairing Bus Outs” on
page 111 for more information.
No output from the OMNI OUTs. Check the OMNI OUT source assignments. See “Assigning Omni
Outs” on page 116 for more information.
Cannot send channel signals to the
effects processors.
If the effects sends are configured post-fader, the regular channel
fader must be raised in addition to the aux send fader. See “Using the
Effects” on page 123 for more information.
The effects send meters indicate
that signals are being sent to the
effects, but the processed sounds
cannot be heard.
Processed signals are returned via the effects returns. See “Returning
Processed Signals” on page 124 for more information.
Cannot store effects programs. Effects settings cannot be stored to preset programs 1 through 42. Try
storing to user programs 43 through 99. See “Storing Effects Pro-
grams” on page 133 for more information.
Cannot recall effects programs 19
and 42 to Effect 1.
These effects programs use the HQ. PITCH and FREEZE type effects
and can only be recalled to Effect 2. See “Preset Effects Programs” on
page 121 for more information.
Cannot feed effects return 1 to
Effect 1, or effects return 2 to Effect
2.
This is to prevent signal loops. See “Using the Effects” on page 123 for
more information.
Cannot store dynamics programs. Dynamics settings cannot be stored to preset programs 1 through 40.
Try storing to user programs 41 through 80. See “Storing Dynamics
Programs” on page 174 for more information.
Cannot store to scene memory 00. Scene memory 00 is a read-only memory. See “Scene Memory 00” on
page 185 for more information.
Cannot store mix scenes. Is the selected scene memory protected? See “Protecting Scene Mem-
ories” on page 189 for more information.
Cannot recall mix scenes. Only scene memories that contain data can be recalled.
Help! I recalled a mix scene by
mistake. Use the Undo function to return to the previous mix settings. See
“Undoing Mix Scene Recalls” on page 189 for more information.
The scene memory number keeps
flashing.
This is because a scene memory other than the one last recalled has
been selected but not recalled. See “Scene Memory Display Area” on
page 185 for more information.
Recalling a mix scene doesn’t
update some channels. Perhaps these channels are safe channels? See “Recalling Scene Data
Safely” on page 192 for more information.
The specified fade time has no
effect. Fade Time settings must be stored in mix scenes before they take
effect. See “Setting a Fade Time” on page 191 for more information.
Symptom Advice
256 Troubleshooting
01V—Owner’s Manual
Fader movements are inconsistent. Try calibrating the faders. See “Calibrating the Faders” on page 204
for more information.
DIGITAL IN Sync Error message
appears.
This warning message appears if digital signals from the Digital Stereo
Coaxial In or Option I/O inputs are not wordclock synchronized with
the 01V. Make sure that all digital equipment is wordclock synchro-
nized to a common wordclock source. See “Setting the Wordclock”
on page 209 for more information.
UNLOCK appears in the Fs window
of SETUP page 1.
Make sure the external wordclock source is turned on and that the
cable carrying the wordclock signal has not been disconnected. See
“Setting the Wordclock” on page 209 for more information.
Cannot transmit or receive MIDI
messages.
On MIDI page 1, check the following settings: PORT, Tx CH, Rx CH,
and the Tx and Rx switches for Program Change, Control Change,
etc. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information.
MIDI Program Change messages
don’t recall mix scenes.
Make sure that the 01V is configured to receive Program Change mes-
sages and that the MIDI Channels of the 01V and transmitting device
match. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information.
Perhaps the Program Change being transmitted is not assigned to an
01V scene memory? Check the mix scene to Program Change assign-
ment table. See “Program Change Scene Recall” on page 227 for
more information.
If the scene memory assigned to the received Program Change con-
tains no data, it cannot be recalled.
MIDI Control Change messages
don’t control mix parameters.
Make sure that the 01V is configured to receive Control Change mes-
sages and that the MIDI Channels of the 01V and transmitting device
match. See “MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information.
Perhaps the Control Change being transmitted is not assigned to an
01V parameter? Check the parameter to Control Change assignment
table. See “Control Change Parameter Control” on page 229 for more
information.
Cannot receive MIDI Bulk Dump
data. Make sure that the BULK Rx switch on MIDI page 1 is turned on. See
“MIDI Setup” on page 224 for more information.
Controls have no effect on the 01V. Perhaps the Local Control function on MIDI page 5 is turned off? See
“Local Control” on page 234 for more information.
MMC commands have no effect. Make sure the device number matches that of the MMC-compatible
recorder. See “MIDI Machine Control” on page 236 for more informa-
tion.
Symptom Advice
01V Level Diagram 257
01V—Owner’s Manual
Appendix A: General
01V Level Diagram
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Digital
Bit
34
35
36
0
–10
–20
–30
–40
–50
–60
–70
–80
–90
–100
–110
–120
–130
–140
–150
–160
–170
–190
–200
–210
PHASE EQ LEVEL PAN STEREO EQON/OFF METER DAC
DSP Noise Floor
PAD GAIN ADC
+20
+10
0
–10
–20
–30
–40
–50
–60
–70
–80
–90
–100
–110
–120
–130
–140
–150
–160
dB
+24
+4
–170
–180
–190
Analog
dB
Digital
Analog Digital Analog
DYNAMICS DYNAMICS
METER
Nominal Input
Stereo Out
Monitor Out
OMNI1–4 Out
–180
Nominal
Input
Input
Max.
ATT MASTER
LEVEL MASTER
BALANCE ON/OFF
MASTER
Clipping Level
DELAY
[+24dB]
[+10dB]
[–60dB]
GAIN MINI,
PAD ON
GAIN MAX,PAD OFF
Nominal
Output
Output
Max. [+18dB]
[+4dB]
BUS
258 Appendix A: General
01V—Owner’s Manual
Display Messages
Message Meaning
BULK: Byte Count Mismatch! The byte count of the received Bulk Dump data is not cor-
rect.
BULK: Check Sum Error! The check sum of the received Bulk Dump data is not cor-
rect.
BULK: Memory Protected! The Bulk Dump data cannot be stored because the desti-
nation is write-protected.
DIGITAL IN Sync Error!
This warning message appears if the Digital Stereo Coaxial
In signal is not wordclock synchronized with the 01V.
Make sure that all digital equipment is wordclock synchro-
nized to a common wordclock source. See “Setting the
Wordclock” on page 209 for more information. This warn-
ing message can be disabled by turning off the DIGITAL IN
SYNC CAUTION option in the preferences (“Setting 01V
Preferences” on page 203).
For Effect2 Only. The selected effect program can be recalled only to
Effect 2.
LOW BATTERY!! The internal battery voltage is getting very low. Back up
the Setup data (“Bulk Dump” on page 232), and ask your
dealer to replace the battery.
Memory Protected Cannot execute as selected scene memory is protected.
MIDI IN: Framing Error! An incorrect signal may have been input to the MIDI IN.
MIDI IN: Data Overrun! An incorrect signal may have been input to the MIDI IN.
MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! The 01V is probably receiving too much MIDI data.
MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! The 01V is probably transmitting too much MIDI data.
NO DATA Cannot execute as no data has been stored.
Now Fading(Fade Time). Local Control cannot be turned off while a mix-scene fade
is in progress (Fade Time).
OPTION IN Sync Error!
This warning message appears if the Option I/O input dig-
ital signal is not wordclock synchronized with the 01V.
Make sure that all digital equipment is wordclock synchro-
nized to a common wordclock source. See “Setting the
Wordclock” on page 209 for more information. This warn-
ing message can be disabled by turning off the DIGITAL IN
SYNC CAUTION option in the preferences (“Setting 01V
Preferences” on page 203).
Read Only Cannot execute as selected scene memory is read only.
Selected channel: CHxx CHxx is the selected channel.
Preparing to LOCAL OFF... The MIDI Local Control function is preparing for use.
TO HOST: Framing Error! An incorrect signal may have been input to the TO HOST
connector.
TO HOST: Data Overrun! An incorrect signal may have been input to the TO HOST
connector.
TO HOST: Data Parity Error! An incorrect signal may have been input to the TO HOST
connector.
TO HOST: Rx Buffer Full! The 01V is probably receiving too much MIDI data at the
TO HOST connector.
TO HOST: Tx Buffer Full! The 01V is probably transmitting too much MIDI data
from the TO HOST connector.
WRONG WORD CLOCK! The received wordclock is not correct and the 01V cannot
synchronize correctly. Select a suitable wordclock, or use
the AUTO NAVIGATE function on the SETUP page 1.
Security Cover 259
01V—Owner’s Manual
Security Cover
For certain applications you may wish to fit a protective cover over the 01V’s GAIN con-
trols and PAD switches. Although Yamaha do not make such a cover, the 01V has four
fixing holes to affix a custom-made cover. If you fit such a cover, make sure that the fix-
ing screws do not protrude inside the 01V by more than 10 mm. The fixing holes accept
M3-size machine screws, and are spaced 40.0 mm vertically, 414 mm horizontally.
Rack-mounting Kit
The 01V can be rack mounted using the optional RK124 Rack Mount Kit. See your
Yamaha dealer for details.
Attach the rack-mount brackets as shown below.
General 261
01V—Owner’s Manual
Appendix B: Specifications
General
Sampling rate Internal 44.1 kHz
External 44.1 kHz (–10%) to 48 kHz (+6%)
Signal delay Less than 2.5 ms, fs=44.1 kHz, CH IN to ST OUT
Fader 15 × 60 mm motorized
Fader resolution
Master faders except ST OUT 0 to –72, –∞ dB (128 steps/60 mm)
Other faders +6 to –72, –∞ dB (128 steps/60 mm)
ST OUT fader 0 to –96, –∞ dB (128 steps/60 mm)
Total harmonic distortion
(Input gain min.)
Less than 0.1%, 20 Hz–20 kHz, +14 dB into
600Ω
Less than 0.02%, 1 kHz, +18 dB into 600Ω, CH
IN to ST OUT
Frequency response 20 Hz–20 kHz +1, –3 dB, +4 dB into 600Ω
Dynamic range
(maximum signal
to noise level ratio)
D/A converter (ST OUT) 110 dB typ.
A/D+D/A (to ST OUT) 105 dB typ.
Hum & Noise
(20 Hz–20 kHz) Rs 150Ω, Input gain max., Input pad
0 dB, Input sensitivity –60 dB
Measured with a 6 dB/oct filter at 12.7 kHz;
equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with an infinite
dB/oct attenuation
–128 dB equivalent input noise
–94 dB residual output noise, ST OUT off
–94 dB (98 dB S/N) ST OUT, ST fader at nominal
level and all CH IN faders at min.
–64 dB (68 dB S/N) ST OUT fader at nominal
level and one CH IN fader at nominal level.
Maximum
voltage gain
CH IN (CH 1–12) to ST
OUT/OMNI (BUS) OUT 70 dB
CH IN (CH 1–12) to OMNI
(AUX) OUT (pre input fader) 70 dB
CH IN (CH 13–16) to ST OUT 30 dB
CH IN (CH 1–12) to MONI-
TOR OUT (via ST bus) 76 dB
Crosstalk
(at 1 kHz)
Adjacent input channels
(CH 1–12)
–70 dB
Adjacent input channels
(CH 13–16)
–60 dB
Input to output –70 dB
262 Appendix B: Specifications
01V—Owner’s Manual
Analog controls
INPUT (1–12)
PAD (0/26 dB)
GAIN (–16 to –60)
PHANTOM +48 V switched (CH 1–6, 7–12)
INPUT (13/14) GAIN (+10 to –20)
INPUT (15/16) GAIN (+10 to –20)
INPUT SELECT (15/16, 2TR IN)
OUTPUT
MONITOR SELECT (2TR IN, MONITOR)
MONITOR LEVEL CONTROL
PHONES LEVEL CONTROL
Digital controls
ON & SEL buttons
CH 1–12
CH 13/14
CH 15/16
STEREO/MASTER (AUX 1–4, EFFECT 1, 2)
RETURN 1, 2
Faders
CH 1–12
CH 13/14
CH 15/16
STEREO/MASTER (AUX 1–4, EFFECT 1, 2)
Encoders RETURN 1, 2
SOLO buttons
CH 1–12
CH 13/14
CH 15/16
RETURN 1, 2
FADER MODE buttons HOME, EFFECT 1, EFFECT 2, OPTION I/O,
REMOTE, AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3, AUX 4
SELECTED CHANNEL
EQ buttons
Encoders
HIGH, HI-MID, LO-MID, LOW
PAN, F (EQ), G (EQ)
Input control buttons EQ/ATT, Ø/DELAY, DYNAMICS, PAN/ROUTING,
VIEW
Setup buttons UTILITY, MIDI, SETUP, MEMORY
Data entry
Encoder
Buttons
PARAMETER (24 detents)
+1/INC, –1/DEC, ENTER
CURSOR buttons LEFT, RIGHT, UP, DOWN
Display
LCD 320 × 80 dot
Graphic LCD w/backlight and contrast control
LED ST OUT meters, 12 elements × 2
SOLO mode indicator
Power requirements U.S.A. & Canada 120 V AC, 60 Hz
Europe 230 V AC, 50 Hz
Power consumption 70 W
Dimensions (W
×
H
×
D) 430 × 148 × 520 mm (16.9 x 5.8 x 20.4 inches)
Weight 12.5 kg (27.5 lbs)
Free-air operating temperature range 10˚ C to 35˚ C (50˚ F to 95˚ F)
Security cover Four M3 fixing holes for custom-made cover
Options Digital interface card (MY8, MY4 series),
Rack-Mount Kit (RK124)
Input Channels 1–16 263
01V—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels 1–16
PHANTOM switch +48 V, CH 1-6, CH 7-12
GAIN control 44 dB (–60 to –16 dB), CH 1–12 detented
30 dB (–20 to +10 dB); CH 13/14, 15/16
PAD switch 0/26 dB attenuation CH 1–12
AD converter 20-bit linear 128-times oversampling
Phase Normal/Reverse
Input swap Normal (CH 1–8)/Swap (OPTION INPUT CH 17–24)
Input flip Normal (CH 13/14)/Flip (DIGITAL STEREO IN)
Input select switch CH 15/16–2TR IN
Attenuator 0 to –96 dB (1 dB steps)
EQ 4-band PEQ (Low, Lo-Mid, Hi-Mid, High)
Dynamics Compressor, Gate, Ducking, Expander, Compander
Delay 0–250 ms, fs=44.1 kHz
ON/OFF
Fader 60 mm motorized
INPUT, AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3, AUX 4, EFFECT 1, EFFECT 2
AUX, EFFECT send AUX 1–4, EFFECT 1, EFFECT 2 (pre/post fader)
Solo ON/OFF
AFL/PFL
Pan 33 positions (L1–16, CENTER, R1–16)
Routing STEREO, BUS 1–4
Direct out (OMNI OUT 1–4, OPTION OUT via OUTPUT SELECT)
Metering Displayed on LCD
Peak hold ON/OFF
264 Appendix B: Specifications
01V—Owner’s Manual
Option I/O Inputs 17–24 (need optional card)
Digital Stereo In
Return 1, 2 (Internal Effect 1, 2)
De-emphasis Automatic de-emphasis filter (15 µs/50 µs)
Input swap Normal (CH 17–24)/Swap (CH 1–8)
Attenuator 0 to –96 dB (1 dB steps)
EQ 2-band PEQ (Low, High)
ON/OFF
Fader 60 mm motorized
AUX, EFFECT send AUX 1, AUX 2, EFFECT 1, EFFECT 2 (pre/post fader)
Solo ON/OFF
AFL/PFL
Pan 33 positions (L1–16, CENTER, R1–16)
Routing STEREO, BUS 1–4
Metering Displayed on LCD
Peak hold ON/OFF
De-emphasis Automatic de-emphasis filter (15 µs/50 µs)
Input select Normal (CH 13/14) / Flip (DIGITAL STEREO IN)
Cascade in ON/OFF (to STEREO BUS)
EQ 4-band PEQ
ON/OFF
Level control Rotary encoder
INPUT, AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3, AUX 4, EFFECT 1, 2
AUX, EFFECT send AUX 1–4, EFFECT 1, 2 (pre/post)
Solo ON/OFF
AFL/PFL
Pan 33 positions (L1–16, CENTER, R1–16)
Routing STEREO, BUS 1–4
Metering Displayed on LCD
Peak hold ON/OFF
Bus 1–4265
01V—Owner’s Manual
Bus 1–4
Aux 1–4
Stereo Out
Omni Out 1–4
Master level
ON/OFF
Monitor ON/OFF
AFL/PFL
BUS to STEREO ON/OFF
PAN to STEREO 33 positions (L1–16, CENTER, R1–16)
Metering Displayed on LCD
Peak hold ON/OFF
EQ 4-band PEQ (Low, Lo-Mid, Hi-Mid, High)
Dynamics Compressor, Gate, Ducking, Expander, Compander
Fader 60 mm motorized
ON/OFF
Monitor ON/OFF
AFL/PFL
Metering Displayed on LCD
Peak hold ON/OFF
EQ 4-band PEQ (Low, Lo-Mid, Hi-Mid, High)
Fader 60 mm motorized
Balance
Dynamics Compressor, Gate, Ducking, Expander, Compander
ON/OFF
Delay 0–300 ms, fs=44.1 kHz
Monitor ON/OFF
AFL/PFL
Metering 12-element × 2 LED meters. (post fader) and displayed on LCD
DA converter 20-bit linear 8-times oversampling
Output select CH 1–16, BUS 1–4, AUX 1–4, STEREO L, STEREO R
Delay 0–300 ms, fs=44.1 kHz
DA converter 18-bit linear 8-times oversampling
266 Appendix B: Specifications
01V—Owner’s Manual
Monitor Out (Solo)
Digital Stereo Out
Option I/O Output (need optional card)
Memories & Libraries
Solo trim +6 to –60 dB (1 dB steps)
Mono
DA converter 18-bit linear 8-times oversampling
SELECT switch MONITOR/2TR IN
Level control Analog rotary control
Phones level Analog rotary control
Dither ON/OFF
Word length: 16–24 bit
Output select
(MY8-AE, TD, AT)
OPTION OUT 1: BUS 1, CH 1, CH 9, AUX 1, ST OUT L
OPTION OUT 2: BUS 2, CH 2, CH 10, AUX 2, ST OUT R
OPTION OUT 3: BUS 3, CH 3, CH 11, AUX 3, ST OUT L
OPTION OUT 4: BUS 4, CH 4, CH 12, AUX 4, ST OUT R
OPTION OUT 5: BUS 1, CH 5, CH 13, AUX 1, ST OUT L
OPTION OUT 6: BUS 2, CH 6, CH 14, AUX 2, ST OUT R
OPTION OUT 7: BUS 3, CH 7, CH 15, AUX 3, ST OUT L
OPTION OUT 8: BUS 4, CH 8, CH 16, AUX 4, ST OUT R
Output select
(MY4-DA)
OPTION OUT 1: BUS 1, CH 1, CH 5, CH 9, CH 13, AUX 1, ST OUT L
OPTION OUT 2: BUS 2, CH 2, CH 6, CH 10, CH 14, AUX 2, ST OUT R
OPTION OUT 3: BUS 3, CH 3, CH 7, CH 11, CH 15, AUX 3, ST OUT L
OPTION OUT 4: BUS 4, CH 4, CH 8, CH 12, CH 16, AUX 4, ST OUT R
Dither ON/OFF
Word length: 16–24 bit
Type Total Preset User
Scene Memories 100 1 99
Effects Library 99 42 57
Dynamics Library 80 40 40
EQ Library 80 40 40
EQ 267
01V—Owner’s Manual
EQ
*1. 4-band EQs only (low and high bands only on input channels 17 through 24).
*2. When the low and high EQ bands are configured as HPF and LPF, their gain controls function
as filter on and off switches.
Low Lo-Mid*1 Hi-Mid1High
Gain (G) –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)*2
Frequency (F) 21 Hz–20.1 kHz (1/12 octave steps, 120 steps)
QHPF, 10.0–0.10
(41 steps),
L.SHELF
10.0–0.10 (41 steps)
LPF, 10.0–0.10
(41 steps),
H.SHELF
268 Appendix B: Specifications
01V—Owner’s Manual
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
*1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when
the 01V is set to maximum gain (all faders and level controls at maximum positions).
*2. Input channel XLR-type connectors are balanced (pin 1 = ground, pin 2 = hot, pin 3 = cold).
*3. Input channel phone jacks are balanced (tip = hot, ring = cold, sleeve = ground).
* Where dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 V rms.
* For 2TR IN levels, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 V rms.
* Input channels 1–16 and ST IN use linear 20-bit 128-times oversampling A/D converters.
* +48 V DC phantom powering switched in 6-channel blocks (1-6, 7-12) available via the XLR-type connectors
of input channels 1–12
*1. STEREO OUT XLR-type connectors are balanced (pin 1 = ground, pin 2 = hot, pin 3 = cold).
*2. OMNI/MONITOR OUT TRS phone jacks are balanced (tip = hot, ring = cold, sleeve = ground).
*3. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (tip = send, ring = return, sleeve = ground).
* For 2TR OUT, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 V rms.
* Where dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 V rms.
* STEREO OUT uses 20-bit 8-times oversampling D/A converters.
* OMNI OUT 1–4 and MONITOR OUT use 18-bit 8-times oversampling D/A converters.
Connection PAD GAIN
Actual
Load
Impedance
For Use
With
Nominal
Input level Connector in
Console
Sensitivity*1 Nominal Max.
Before Clip
Input chan-
nels 1–12
0–60
3 kΩ
50–600 Ω
Mics
&
600 Ω Lines
–66 dB
(388 µV)
–60 dB
(775 µV)
–46 dB
(3.88 mV) XLR-3-31 type
(balanced)*2
&
TRS phone jack
(balanced)*3
0
–16
–22 dB
(61.6 mV)
–16 dB
(123 mV)
–2 dB
(616 mV)
26 +4 dB
(1.23 V)
+10 dB
(2.45 V)
+24 dB
(12.3 V)
Input channels
13–16
–20
10 kΩ600 Ω Lines
–26 dB
(38.8 mV)
–20 dB
(77.5 mV)
–6 dB
(388 mV) TRS phone jack
(balanced)3
+10 +4 dB
(1.23 V)
+10 dB
(2.45 V)
+24 dB
(12.3 V)
2TR IN (L, R) 10 kΩ600 Ω Lines –10 dBV
(316 mV)
–10 dBV
(316 mV)
+4 dBV
(1.58 V)
Phono
(unbalanced)
Connection
Actual
Source
Impedance
For Use
With
Nominal
Output Level
Connector in Console
Nominal Max. Before
Clip
STEREO OUT (L, R) 150 Ω600 Ω Lines +4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
XLR-3-32 type
(balanced)*1
OMNI OUT (1–4) 150 Ω10 kΩ Lines +4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
TRS phone jack
(balanced)*2
2TR OUT (L, R) 600 Ω10 kΩ Lines –10 dBV
(316 mV)
+4 dBV
(1.58 V) Phono (unbalanced)
MONITOR OUT (L, R) 150 Ω10 kΩ Lines +4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
TRS phone jack
(balanced)2
PHONES 100 Ω8 Ω phones 4 mW 25 mW Stereo phone jack
(unbalanced)*3
40 Ω phones 12 mW 75 mW
Digital Audio Inputs 269
01V—Owner’s Manual
Digital Audio Inputs
Digital Audio Outputs
Option I/O Cards
*1. De-emphasis is automatically processed when input signal contains emphasis.
*1. Channel status
Type: 2 audio channels
Category code: 2 channel PCM encoder/decoder
Copy prohibit: No
Emphasis: No
Clock accuracy: Level II (1,000 ppm)
Sampling rate: depends on internal configuration
*2. Dither: wordlength 16–24 bit
Connection Format Wordlength Level Connector
DIGITAL
STEREO IN*1 COAXIAL IEC-60958 24 bit 0.5 V pp
(75 Ω)Phono
Connection Format Wordlength Level Connector
DIGITAL
STEREO OUT COAXIAL IEC-60958*1
Consumer Use 24 bit*2 0.5 V pp
(75 Ω)Phono
Card Format Inputs Outputs
MY8-AT ADAT 8 IN (CH 17–24) 8 OUT (BUS, AUX, ST, CH direct)
MY8-TD TASCAM 8 IN (CH 17–24) 8 OUT (BUS, AUX, ST, CH direct)
MY8-AE AES/EBU 8 IN (CH 17–24) 8 OUT (BUS, AUX, ST, CH direct)
MY4-DA Analog out —4 OUT (BUS, AUX, ST, CH direct)
MY8-AD Analog in 8 IN (CH 17–24) —
MY4-AD Analog in 4 IN (CH 17–20) —
270 Appendix B: Specifications
01V—Owner’s Manual
Control I/O
Connection Format Level Connector
TO HOST —RS-422 8-pin mini DIN
MIDI IN MIDI —5-pin DIN
MIDI THRU MIDI —5-pin DIN
MIDI OUT MIDI —5-pin DIN
01V Dimensions 271
01V—Owner’s Manual
01V Dimensions
Specifications and external appearance are subject to change without notice.
For European Model
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 4A
Conformed Environment: E1, E2, E3 and E4
W:430
H:148
D:520
Scene Memory to Program Change Table 273
01V—Owner’s Manual
Appendix C: MIDI
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
Program
Change #
Initial
Scene #
User
Scene #
Program
Change #
Initial
Scene #
User
Scene #
Program
Change#
Initial
Scene #
User
Scene #
1 01 4444 8787
2 02 4545 8888
3 03 4646 8989
4 04 4747 9090
5 05 4848 9191
6 06 4949 9292
7 07 5050 9393
8 08 5151 9494
9 09 5252 9595
10 10 53 53 96 96
11 11 54 54 97 97
12 12 55 55 98 98
13 13 56 56 99 99
14 14 57 57 100 00
15 15 58 58 101 —
16 16 59 59 102 —
17 17 60 60 103 —
18 18 61 61 104 —
19 19 62 62 105 —
20 20 63 63 106 —
21 21 64 64 107 —
22 22 65 65 108 —
23 23 66 66 109 —
24 24 67 67 110 —
25 25 68 68 111 —
26 26 69 69 112 —
27 27 70 70 113 —
28 28 71 71 114 —
29 29 72 72 115 —
30 30 73 73 116 —
31 31 74 74 117 —
32 32 75 75 118 —
33 33 76 76 119 —
34 34 77 77 120 —
35 35 78 78 121 —
36 36 79 79 122 —
37 37 80 80 123 —
38 38 81 81 124 —
39 39 82 82 125 —
40 40 83 83 126 —
41 41 84 84 127 —
42 42 85 85 128 —
43 43 86 86
274 Appendix C: MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
01V Parameter to Control Change Table
Control
Change #
Parameter
01V Initial (Default) User
0 NO ASSIGN
1 FADER CHANNEL CH1
2 FADER CHANNEL CH2
3 FADER CHANNEL CH3
4 FADER CHANNEL CH4
5 FADER CHANNEL CH5
6 FADER CHANNEL CH6
7 FADER CHANNEL CH7
8 FADER CHANNEL CH8
9 FADER CHANNEL CH9
10 FADER CHANNEL CH10
11 FADER CHANNEL CH11
12 FADER CHANNEL CH12
13 FADER CHANNEL CH13-14
14 FADER CHANNEL CH15-16
15 FADER CHANNEL RETURN1
16 FADER CHANNEL RETURN2
17 FADER MASTER AUX1
18 FADER MASTER AUX2
19 FADER MASTER AUX3
20 FADER MASTER AUX4
21 FADER MASTER BUS1
22 FADER MASTER BUS2
23 FADER MASTER BUS3
24 FADER MASTER BUS4
25 FADER MASTER EFFECT1
26 FADER MASTER EFFECT2
27 FADER MASTER ST OUT
28 ON CHANNEL CH1
29 ON CHANNEL CH2
30 ON CHANNEL CH3
31 ON CHANNEL CH4
32 NO ASSIGN
33 ON CHANNEL CH5
34 ON CHANNEL CH6
35 ON CHANNEL CH7
36 ON CHANNEL CH8
37 ON CHANNEL CH9
01V Parameter to Control Change Table 275
01V—Owner’s Manual
Control
Change #
Parameter
01V Initial (Default) User
38 ON CHANNEL CH10
39 ON CHANNEL CH11
40 ON CHANNEL CH12
41 ON CHANNEL CH13-14
42 ON CHANNEL CH15-16
43 ON CHANNEL RETURN1
44 ON CHANNEL RETURN2
45 ON MASTER AUX1
46 ON MASTER AUX2
47 ON MASTER AUX3
48 ON MASTER AUX4
49 ON MASTER BUS1
50 ON MASTER BUS2
51 ON MASTER BUS3
52 ON MASTER BUS4
53 ON MASTER EFFECT1
54 ON MASTER EFFECT2
55 ON MASTER ST OUT
56 PAN CHANNEL CH1
57 PAN CHANNEL CH2
58 PAN CHANNEL CH3
59 PAN CHANNEL CH4
60 PAN CHANNEL CH5
61 PAN CHANNEL CH6
62 PAN CHANNEL CH7
63 PAN CHANNEL CH8
64 PAN CHANNEL CH9
65 PAN CHANNEL CH10
66 PAN CHANNEL CH11
67 PAN CHANNEL CH12
68 PAN CHANNEL CH13
69 PAN CHANNEL CH14
70 PAN CHANNEL CH15
71 PAN CHANNEL CH16
72 PAN CHANNEL RETURN1 L
73 PAN CHANNEL RETURN1 R
74 PAN CHANNEL RETURN2 L
75 PAN CHANNEL RETURN2 R
76 PAN BALANCE ST OUT
77 FADER EFF1 SEND CH1
78 FADER EFF1 SEND CH2
79 FADER EFF1 SEND CH3
276 Appendix C: MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
Control
Change #
Parameter
01V Initial (Default) User
80 FADER EFF1 SEND CH4
81 FADER EFF1 SEND CH5
82 FADER EFF1 SEND CH6
83 FADER EFF1 SEND CH7
84 FADER EFF1 SEND CH8
85 FADER EFF1 SEND CH9
86 FADER EFF1 SEND CH10
87 FADER EFF1 SEND CH11
88 FADER EFF1 SEND CH12
89 FADER EFF1 SEND CH13-14
90 FADER EFF1 SEND CH15-16
91 FADER EFF2 SEND CH1
92 FADER EFF2 SEND CH2
93 FADER EFF2 SEND CH3
94 FADER EFF2 SEND CH4
95 FADER EFF2 SEND CH5
102 FADER EFF2 SEND CH6
103 FADER EFF2 SEND CH7
104 FADER EFF2 SEND CH8
105 FADER EFF2 SEND CH9
106 FADER EFF2 SEND CH10
107 FADER EFF2 SEND CH11
108 FADER EFF2 SEND CH12
109 FADER EFF2 SEND CH13-14
110 FADER EFF2 SEND CH15-16
111 FADER CHANNEL CH17
112 FADER CHANNEL CH18
113 FADER CHANNEL CH19
114 FADER CHANNEL CH20
115 FADER CHANNEL CH21
116 FADER CHANNEL CH22
117 FADER CHANNEL CH23
118 FADER CHANNEL CH24
119 NO ASSIGN
03D & Programmable Mixer 01 Parameter to Control Change Table 277
01V—Owner’s Manual
03D & Programmable Mixer 01 Parameter to
Control Change Table
Control
Change #
Parameter
03D Arrangement Programmable Mixer 01 Arrangement
0 NO ASSIGN FADER CHANNEL CH1
1 FADER CHANNEL CH1 FADER CHANNEL CH2
2 FADER CHANNEL CH2 FADER CHANNEL CH3
3 FADER CHANNEL CH3 FADER CHANNEL CH4
4 FADER CHANNEL CH4 FADER CHANNEL CH5
5 FADER CHANNEL CH5 FADER CHANNEL CH6
6 FADER CHANNEL CH6 FADER CHANNEL CH7
7 FADER CHANNEL CH7 FADER CHANNEL CH8
8 FADER CHANNEL CH8 FADER CHANNEL CH9
9 FADER CHANNEL CH9 FADER CHANNEL CH10
10 FADER CHANNEL CH10 FADER CHANNEL CH11
11 FADER CHANNEL CH11 FADER CHANNEL CH12
12 FADER CHANNEL CH12 FADER CHANNEL CH17
13 NO ASSIGN FADER CHANNEL CH18
14 NO ASSIGN FADER CHANNEL CH19
15 NO ASSIGN FADER CHANNEL CH20
16 NO ASSIGN FADER CHANNEL CH13-14
17 FADER CHANNEL CH17 FADER CHANNEL RETURN1
18 FADER CHANNEL CH18 FADER CHANNEL RETURN2
19 FADER CHANNEL CH19 FADER MASTER AUX1
20 FADER CHANNEL CH20 FADER MASTER AUX2
21 FADER CHANNEL CH21 FADER MASTER ST OUT
22 FADER CHANNEL CH22 ON CHANNEL CH1
23 FADER CHANNEL CH23 ON CHANNEL CH2
24 FADER CHANNEL CH24 ON CHANNEL CH3
25 FADER CHANNEL CH13-14 ON CHANNEL CH4
26 FADER CHANNEL RETURN1 ON CHANNEL CH5
27 FADER CHANNEL RETURN2 ON CHANNEL CH6
28 FADER MASTER AUX1 ON CHANNEL CH7
29 FADER MASTER AUX2 ON CHANNEL CH8
30 FADER MASTER AUX3 ON CHANNEL CH9
31 FADER MASTER AUX4 ON CHANNEL CH10
32 NO ASSIGN ON CHANNEL CH11
33 FADER MASTER BUS1 ON CHANNEL CH12
34 FADER MASTER BUS2 ON CHANNEL CH17
35 FADER MASTER BUS3 ON CHANNEL CH18
36 FADER MASTER BUS4 ON CHANNEL CH19
37 FADER MASTER ST OUT ON CHANNEL CH20
278 Appendix C: MIDI
01V—Owner’s Manual
Control
Change #
Parameter
03D Arrangement Programmable Mixer 01 Arrangement
38 PAN CHANNEL CH1 ON CHANNEL CH13-14
39 PAN CHANNEL CH2 ON CHANNEL RETURN1
40 PAN CHANNEL CH3 ON CHANNEL RETURN2
41 PAN CHANNEL CH4 ON MASTER AUX1
42 PAN CHANNEL CH5 ON MASTER AUX2
43 PAN CHANNEL CH6 ON MASTER ST OUT
44 PAN CHANNEL CH7 PAN CHANNEL CH1
45 PAN CHANNEL CH8 PAN CHANNEL CH2
46 PAN CHANNEL CH9 PAN CHANNEL CH3
47 PAN CHANNEL CH10 PAN CHANNEL CH4
48 PAN CHANNEL CH11 PAN CHANNEL CH5
49 PAN CHANNEL CH12 PAN CHANNEL CH6
50 NO ASSIGN PAN CHANNEL CH7
51 NO ASSIGN PAN CHANNEL CH8
52 NO ASSIGN PAN CHANNEL CH9
53 NO ASSIGN PAN CHANNEL CH10
54 PAN CHANNEL CH17 PAN CHANNEL CH11
55 PAN CHANNEL CH18 PAN CHANNEL CH12
56 PAN CHANNEL CH19 PAN CHANNEL CH17
57 PAN CHANNEL CH20 PAN CHANNEL CH18
58 PAN CHANNEL CH21 PAN CHANNEL CH19
59 PAN CHANNEL CH22 PAN CHANNEL CH20
60 PAN CHANNEL CH23 PAN CHANNEL CH13
61 PAN CHANNEL CH24 PAN CHANNEL CH14
62 PAN CHANNEL CH13 PAN CHANNEL RETURN1 L
63 PAN CHANNEL CH14 PAN CHANNEL RETURN1 R
64 ON CHANNEL CH1 PAN CHANNEL RETURN2 L
65 ON CHANNEL CH2 PAN CHANNEL RETURN2 R
66 ON CHANNEL CH3 NO ASSIGN
67 ON CHANNEL CH4 PAN BALANCE ST OUT
68 ON CHANNEL CH5 FADER EFF1 SEND CH1
69 ON CHANNEL CH6 FADER EFF1 SEND CH2
70 ON CHANNEL CH7 FADER EFF1 SEND CH3
71 ON CHANNEL CH8 FADER EFF1 SEND CH4
72 ON CHANNEL CH9 FADER EFF1 SEND CH5
73 ON CHANNEL CH10 FADER EFF1 SEND CH6
74 ON CHANNEL CH11 FADER EFF1 SEND CH7
75 ON CHANNEL CH12 FADER EFF1 SEND CH8
76 NO ASSIGN FADER EFF1 SEND CH9
77 NO ASSIGN FADER EFF1 SEND CH10
78 NO ASSIGN FADER EFF1 SEND CH11
79 NO ASSIGN FADER EFF1 SEND CH12
03D & Programmable Mixer 01 Parameter to Control Change Table 279
01V—Owner’s Manual
Control
Change #
Parameter
03D Arrangement Programmable Mixer 01 Arrangement
80 ON CHANNEL CH17 FADER EFF1 SEND CH17
81 ON CHANNEL CH18 FADER EFF1 SEND CH18
82 ON CHANNEL CH19 FADER EFF1 SEND CH19
83 ON CHANNEL CH20 FADER EFF1 SEND CH20
84 ON CHANNEL CH21 FADER EFF1 SEND CH13-14
85 ON CHANNEL CH22 FADER EFF2 SEND CH1
86 ON CHANNEL CH23 FADER EFF2 SEND CH2
87 ON CHANNEL CH24 FADER EFF2 SEND CH3
88 ON CHANNEL CH13-14 FADER EFF2 SEND CH4
89 ON CHANNEL RETURN1 FADER EFF2 SEND CH5
90 ON CHANNEL RETURN2 FADER EFF2 SEND CH6
91 ON MASTER AUX1 FADER EFF2 SEND CH7
92 ON MASTER AUX2 FADER EFF2 SEND CH8
93 ON MASTER AUX3 FADER EFF2 SEND CH9
94 ON MASTER AUX4 FADER EFF2 SEND CH10
95 ON MASTER ST OUT FADER EFF2 SEND CH11
102 FADER EFF1 SEND CH1 FADER AUX1 SEND CH1
103 FADER EFF1 SEND CH2 FADER AUX1 SEND CH2
104 FADER EFF1 SEND CH3 FADER AUX1 SEND CH3
105 FADER EFF1 SEND CH4 FADER AUX1 SEND CH4
106 FADER EFF1 SEND CH5 FADER AUX1 SEND CH5
107 FADER EFF1 SEND CH6 FADER AUX1 SEND CH6
108 FADER EFF1 SEND CH7 FADER AUX1 SEND CH7
109 FADER EFF1 SEND CH8 FADER AUX1 SEND CH8
110 FADER EFF1 SEND CH9 FADER AUX1 SEND CH9
111 FADER EFF1 SEND CH10 FADER AUX1 SEND CH10
112 FADER EFF1 SEND CH11 FADER AUX1 SEND CH11
113 FADER EFF1 SEND CH12 FADER AUX1 SEND CH12
114 NO ASSIGN FADER AUX1 SEND CH17
115 NO ASSIGN FADER AUX1 SEND CH18
116 NO ASSIGN FADER AUX1 SEND CH19
117 NO ASSIGN FADER AUX1 SEND CH20
118 FADER EFF1 SEND CH13-14 FADER AUX1 SEND CH13-14
119 FADER BALANCE ST OUT NO ASSIGN
280 MIDI Data Format
01V—Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
1. TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA
1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
1.1.1 NOTE OFF (8n)
Reception
Received if [Rx CH] matches.
Used for EFFECT control. See below for details.
1.1.2 NOTE ON (9n)
Reception
Received if [Rx CH] matches.
Used for EFFECT control. See below for details.
A velocity of 0x00 is the same as NOTE OFF.
* Using Note data for EFFECT control
1: Dynamic Flange/Dynamic Phase/Dynamic Filter
When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI, Velocity will be used
together with Note On/Off to control the frequency width of Modu-
lation.
2: Freeze
When PLAY MODE is MOMENT or CONTINUE, a Note On mes-
sage will start play. However, this is only when the note number spec-
ified for MIDI TRG is received. Also, play will not occur if there is no
recorded data.
Regardless of the Note Number, a Note Off message will stop play if
PLAY MODE is MOMENT.
1.1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)
Reception
Received when [Control Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH]
matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, this message is received regard-
less of the channel.
When [Control Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be echoed.
Parameters will be controlled according to the settings of the [control
assign table].
Control of specific faders can be disabled by the [midi fader control
input mute] settings.
If this message is received while the [control assign table] page is dis-
played, the cursor location will move to that control number.
Transmission
If [Control Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted on the [Tx
CH] whenever a parameter specified in the [control assign table] is
operated.
If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages will be merged
with the unit's own output while taking advantage of running status.
The control value is converted to the parameter value according to
the following equation.
C = 128 (byte parameter)
16384 (word parameter)
S = number of total possible steps for the parameter
C / S = X remainder Y
INT((Y+1)/2) = Z
If (MIDI DATA - Z) < 0 then -> param = 0
If ((MIDI DATA - Z)/X) > MAX then -> param = MAX
In other cases -> param =
INT((MIDI DATA -Z)/X)
1.1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)
Reception
Received when [Program Change RX] is ON if the [Rx CH] matches.
However if [OMNI] is ON, this is received regardless of the channel.
This is echoed if [Program Change ECHO] is ON.
A scene memory will be recalled according to the settings of the [Pro-
gram change table].
Transmission
If [Program Change TX] is ON, this is transmitted on the [Tx CH]
channel when a scene memory is recalled.
If two or more program numbers have been assigned to the memory
number which was recalled, the lowest numbered program number
will be transmitted.
This message is echoed if [Program Change ECHO] is ON. (If a
memory number which is not specified in the [Midi Program
Change Assign Table] is recalled, the Parameter Change (Function
Call) described below will be transmitted.)
1.2 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0-F7)
1.2.1 MOTION CONTROL STATE (MCS)
MMC STOP/PLAY/FORWARD/REWIND/RECORD/
PAUSE
Transmission
In the [REMOTE-MMC] page, this is transmitted by key operations.
The [DEVICE NO.] specifies the transmission destination.
1.2.2 MOTION CONTROL PROCESS (MCP)
MMC LOCATE (target)
Transmission
In the [REMOTE-MMC] page, this is transmitted by key operations.
The [DEVICE NO.] specifies the transmission destination. (The ID
of the receiving device must be set.)
STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note Off Message
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Note No.
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity ( ignored)
STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note On Message
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Note No.
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity ( 1-127:On, 0:off)
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change
DATA 0ccccccc cc Control No. ( 0-95, 102-119)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Program No. ( 0-127)
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(mcc) sub-id
0ccccccc cc Command String
[1]:Stop
[2]:Play
[4]:Fast Forward
[5]:Rewind
[6]:Record Strobe
[9]:Pause
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(mcc) sub-id
01000100 44 Locate
00000110 06 byte count
00000001 01 "target" sub command
0hhhhhhh hh hour
0mmmmmmm mm minute
0sssssss ss second
0fffffff ff frame
0sssssss ss sub-frame( only '0')
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
MIDI Data Format 281
01V—Owner’s Manual
1.3 ACTIVE SENSING (Fe)
Reception
Once this message has been received, an interval of 300ms or more
during which no message is received will cause MIDI communica-
tions to be initialized, clearing Running Status etc.
2. TRANSMISSION CONDITION
3. RECEIVE CONDITION
4. PARAMETER CHANGE
BASIC FORMAT
PARAMETER CHANGE (byte operation for type
0x00:edit buffer)
Reception
This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON and the [Rx
CH] matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this will be echoed.
The specified parameter will be controlled when this message is
received.
Transmission
If [Parameter Change TX] is ON, this message will be transmitted on
the [Tx CH] Device Channel when a parameter that is not specified
in the [Control Assign Table] is modified.
The valid range of addresses is 0x0000 - 0x03FF
STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing
PGM ECHO ON
CTL ECHO ON
PARAM ECHO ON
MIDI IN
MIDI TX CH?
PARAM Tx ON
CTL Tx ON
PGM Tx ON
CONTROL CHANGE $BnH
BULK REQUEST $F0H, $43H, $2nH
PROGRAM CHANGE $CnH
(RESPONSE FOR
PARAMETER REQUEST)
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
PARAMETER CHANGE
$F0H, $43H, $1nH
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
BULK DUMP $F0H, $43H, $0nH
USER DEFINE
MMC $F0H, $7FH, nnH, 06H MIDI OUT
CTL Rx ON
PGM Rx ON
PARAM Rx ON
BULK Rx ON
PGM OMNI ON
CTL OMNI ON
PARAM OMNI ON
PGM ECHO ON
CTL ECHO ON
PARAM ECHO ON
$8nH NOTE OFF
$9nH NOTE ON/OFF
$BnH CONTROL CHANGE
$CnH PROGRAM CHANGE
$F0H, $43H, $2nH, BULK REQUEST
$F0H, $43H, $3nH
PARAMETER REQUEST
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
$F0H, $43H, $1nH
PARAMETER CHANGE
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
$F0H, $43H, $0nH, BULK DUMP
MIDI OUT
MIDI Rx CH?
MIDI IN
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn pn p=mode 1:parameter change or response
for request, 3:parameter request
n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
GROUP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID (digital mixer)
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 0ttttttt tt (type)
DATA 0ddddddd dd0 data 0
: :
0ddddddd ddn data n
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0x00 edit buffer ...byte operation format
0x01 system memory (setup, backup) ...byte operation format
0x02 function call (mem/lib recall, mem/lib store, clear, title)
0x03 controller (LCD/fader mode)...byte operation format
0x04 multiple link (fader mode, solo mode, title,,,)
0x05 remote meter (meter data)
0x10 edit buffer ...7bit operation format
0x40 edit buffer ...bit operation format
0x41 system memory (setup, backup) ...bit operation format
0x43 controller (key remote) ...bit operation format
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or response
n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00000000 00 byte operation for edit buffer (type)
DATA 0aaaaaaa dd1 address( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits address
0aaaaaaa dd2 address( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits address
0000dddd dd3 data( H) high 4 bits of 8 bits data
0000dddd dd4 data( L) low 4 bits of 8 bits data
: : : continuous address datas
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
282 MIDI Data Format
01V—Owner’s Manual
PARAMETER CHANGE (7bit operation for type
0x10:edit buffer)
Reception
This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON and the [Rx
CH] matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
Transmission
If [Parameter Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted on the
[Tx CH] Device Channel when a parameter not specified in the
[Control Assign Table] is modified.
The valid range of addresses is 0x0000 - 0x03FF
PARAMETER CHANGE (bit operation for type
0x40:edit buffer)
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON, this message is received if the
[Rx CH] matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be echoed.
When this message is received, the specified parameter will be con-
trolled.
Transmission
If [Parameter Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted on the
[Tx CH] Device Channel when a parameter not specified in the
[Control Assign Table] is modified.
The valid range of addresses is 0x0000 - 0x03FF
PARAMETER CHANGE (byte operation for type
0x01:system memory)
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON, this message is received if the
[Rx CH] matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this is echoed.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
The system memory will depend on the address, as follows.
PARAMETER CHANGE (bit operation for type
0x41:system memory)
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON, this message is received if the
[Rx CH] matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this is echoed.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
The system memory will depend on the address, as follows.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-15(Device Chan-
nel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00010000 10 7bit operation for edit buffer (type)
DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits address
0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits address
0ddddddd dd2 data 7bit
: :
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-15(Device Chan-
nel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 01000000 40 bit operation for edit buffer (type)
DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits address
0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits address
0ddddddd dd2 data(bit0-2:change bit no.0-7, bit3:0=reset
1=set)
: :
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or response
n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00000001 01 byte operation for system memory (type)
DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits address
0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits address
0000dddd dd2 data( H) high 4 bits of 8 bits data
0000dddd dd3 data( L) low 4 bits of 8 bits data
: : continuous address datas
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
0x0000 - 0x007F : setup memory(128byte)
0x0080 - 0x0147 : backup memory(200byte)
0x0200 : card type(1byte)
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or response
n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 01000001 41 bit operation for system memory (type)
DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits address
0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits address
0ddddddd dd2 data(bit0-2:change bit no.0-7, bit3:0=reset
1=set)
: :
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
0x0000 - 0x007F : setup memory(128byte)
0x0080 - 0x0147 : backup memory(200byte)
MIDI Data Format 283
01V—Owner’s Manual
PARAMETER VALUE REQUEST (type 0x00:edit
buffer, 0x01:sysytem memory)
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON, this message is received if the
[Rx CH] matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be echoed
if the device itself did not receive the message.
When this message is received, the value of the specified parameter
will be transmitted as a Parameter Change message.
Transmission
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be trans-
mitted without change if the device itself did not receive the message.
The system memory will depend on the address, as follows.
PARAMETER CHANGE (type 0x02:function call)
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON, this message is received if the
[Rx CH] matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be ech-
oed.
When this message is received, the corresponding mem-
ory/library/table will be recalled/stored/cleared.
* [0x00:scene recall] is transmitted only when a program which is not
assigned to the program change table has been recalled. In other
cases, a program change will normally be transmitted.
PARAMETER CHANGE (type 0x02:function
call(title))
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS, this message will be
received.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be ech-
oed.
When this message is received, the title of the corresponding mem-
ory/library will be modified.
Transmission
Parameter Change messages are transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel
in response to a request.
If 01V receives a bulk request for an empty memory, TITLEs are not
transmitted.
PARAMETER VALUE REQUEST (type 0x02:function
call(title))
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS, this message will be
received.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON and the 01V itself did not
receive the message, the message will be echoed.
When this is received, the title of the corresponding memory/library
will be transmitted.
Transmission
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON and the 01V itself did not
receive the message, the message will be echoed.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n parameter request n=0-15(Device Chan-
nel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00tttttt tt 00:edit buffer, 01:system memory (type)
DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits address
0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits address
0ddddddd dd count
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
0x0000 - 0x007F : setup memory(128byte)
0x0080 - 0x0147 : backup memory(200byte)
0x0200 : card type(1byte)
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-15(Device Chan-
nel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00000010 02 function call
DATA 0ddddddd dd0 function
0ddddddd dd1 number
0ddddddd dd2 channel
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
function number channel Tx/Rx
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0x00 scene recall 0-99(memory 0-99) 0x7f Tx* /Rx
0x01 eq lib recall 0-79(library 1-80) 0-19,22 Tx/Rx
0x02 dyn lib recall 0-79(library 1-80) 0-13,16-19,22 Tx/Rx
0x03 eff lib recall 0-98(library 1-99) 0,1 Tx/Rx
0x10 scene store 1-99(memory 1-99) 0x7f Rx only
0x11 eq lib store 40-79(library 41-80) 0-19,22 Rx only
0x12 dyn lib store 40-79(library 41-80) 0-13,16-19,22 Rx only
0x13 eff lib store 42-98(library 43-99) 0,1 Rx only
Channel 0-11(ch1-12), 12-13(13/14-15/16), 14-15(return 1-2),
16-19(aux 1-4), 22(st mas), 23-30(ch17-24)
0,1(EFF1,2 for eff lib recall/store), 0x7f(current/edit
buffer)
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or response
n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00000010 02 function call
DATA 0ddddddd dd0 function
0ddddddd dd1 number
0ddddddd dd2 title1(If data is empty, TITLEs are not
transmitted.)
: :
0ddddddd ddn title-n
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
function number
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0x30 scene title 0-99(mem 0-99),0x7f(edit buffer) for response
1-99(mem 1-99),0x7f(edit buffer) for Rx
0x31 eq lib title 0-79(library 1-80) for response
40-79(library 41-80) for Rx
0x32 dynamics lib title 0-79(library 1-80) for response
40-79(library 41-80) for Rx
0x33 eff lib title 0-98(library 1-99) for response
42-98(library 43-99) for Rx
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n parameter request n=0-15(Device Chan-
nel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00000010 02 function call
DATA 0ddddddd dd0 function
0ddddddd dd1 number
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
function number
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0x30 scene title 0-99(mem 0-99),0x7f(edit buffer)
0x31 eq lib title 0-79(library 1-80)
0x32 dynamics lib title 0-79(library 1-80)
0x33 eff lib title 0-98(library 1-99)
284 MIDI Data Format
01V—Owner’s Manual
PARAMETER CHANGE (type operation for type
0x03:controller(LCD-Fader mode))
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS, the message will be
received.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be ech-
oed.
When this message is received, the LCD screen, the corresponding
Fader Mode, and the specified channel will be selected.
PARAMETER CHANGE (bit operation for type
0x43:controller(key remote))
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS, this message will be
received.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be ech-
oed.
When this message is received, the same processing will be performed
as when the specified key (refer to the table below) is pressed
(released).
Transmission
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be trans-
mitted without change.
* Normally, data should be transmitted as "set(bit3=1)." In this case,
the 01V will determine that that switch has been pressed and then
immediately released, and will perform the appropriate processing.
This means that you will not have to transmit "reset(bit3=0)" sepa-
rately.
* The keys followed by 100 are virtual key, it would be the keys on
LCD.
PARAMETER CHANGE (type 0x04:multiple linking)
This message is valid only for the connector that has been specified as
the LINK PORT.
When two '01V' units have been connected by a cable, some of the
functions (refer to the following table) will be linked.
The same LINK PORT connector settings must be made on both
units.
Reception
This message is always received, and will execute the LINK function
(refer to the following table). (This is not dependent on
MIDI-SETUP.)
Transmission
This message is transmitted when LINK-related functions (refer to
following table) are performed. (This is not dependent on
MIDI-SETUP.)
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is transmitted
without change.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-15(Device Chan-
nel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 01000011 03 controller (type)
DATA 00000001 01 control No.(LCD-Fader mode)
0ddddddd dd channel select(0-30)
0ddddddd dd LCD select No.(0-17)
0000dddd dd PAGE No.(0-4)
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-15(Device Chan-
nel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 01000011 43 controller
DATA 00000000 00 control no.(0:key remote)
0ddddddd dd No. 0-10,99-102(key 1-11,100-103)
0000dddd dd data(bit0-2:change bit no.0-7,
bit3:0=reset 1=set)
: :
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
KEY key no.bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6 bit7
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
key1 0 ON1 ON2 ON3 ON4 ON5 ON6 ON7 ON8
key2 1 ON9 ON10 ON11 ON12 ON13-14 ON15-16 ONSTOUT ------
key3 2 SOLO1 SOLO2 SOLO3 SOLO4 SOLO5 SOLO6 SOLO7 SOLO8
key4 3 SOLO9 SOLO10 SOLO11 SOLO12 SOLO13-14SOLO15-16 ------ ------
key5 4 SEL1 SEL2 SEL3 SEL4 SEL5 SEL6 SEL7 SEL8
key6 5 SEL9 SEL10 SEL11 SEL12 SEL13-14 SEL15-16 SEL STO ------
key7 6 ONRTN1 ONRTN2 SOLORT1 SOLORT2 SELRTN1 SELRTN2 HOME MEMORY
key8 7 AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 EFFECT1 EFFECT2 OPTION REMOTE
key9 8 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH ------ ------ ------ ------
key10 9 UP LEFT RIGHT DOWN ENTER INC DEC ------
key11 10 DYNAMIX EQ DELAY PAN UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW
key100 99 FRZ-REC FRZ-PLAY ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
key101 100 SOLO1 SOLO2 SOLO3 SOLO4 SOLO5 SOLO6 SOLO7 SOLO8
key102 101 SOLO9 SOLO10 SOLO11 SOLO12 SOLO13-14SOLO15-16 SOLO-RTN1 SOLO-RTN2
key103 102 SOLO17 SOLO18 SOLO19 SOLO20 SOLO21 SOLO22 SOLO23 SOLO24
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15(Tx/Rx Channel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00000100 04 multiple linking
DATA 0mmfffff mf data format (bit6-5:status, bit4-0:contents)
0ddddddd dd0 data #0
0ddddddd dd1 data #1
: :
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
Status Function Note
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0x00 scene recall Recall the specified memory number
0x01 scene store Store to the specified memory number with title
(Assign the same title to all)
0x02 scene title edit If the title was modified, make it the same, make it
match
0x48 solo mode Match the solo mode
bit6: enable/disable
bit5: on/off
bit2: recording/mixdown
bit1: sel mix/last
bit0: after fader/pre fader
0x60 display call When the screen (Fader Mode) is changed, make it
match
0x61 metering point Make the meter points match
0x62 peak hold Make the meter Peak Hold ON/OFF match
MIDI Data Format 285
01V—Owner’s Manual
PARAMETER CHANGE(type 0x05:remote meter)
When the following request is received to enable transmission, the
specified parameter data will be transmitted at 30 msec intervals for
five seconds. If you want meter data to be transmitted continuously,
you must continue transmitting requests less than five seconds apart.
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
Device Channel that is included in the SUB STATUS, this message is
received.
When [LOCAL OFF] is ON, the incoming meter data will be dis-
played. In other cases it will be ignored.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by a request, this will be transmitted
every 30msec on the [Rx CH] channel, for five seconds.
Transmission will be disabled when the power is turned on, and when
PORT settings have been modified.
In the Meter no., bit 6 is the special bit, and bit 5 is the gr bit.
When the Gr bit is on, the single byte gr will be added uniformly to
the end of the data string.
When the Special bit is on, the two bytes stLED L/R will be added uni-
formly to the end of the data string.
When both are on, gr comes first, and stLED L/R come later.
PARAMETER VALUE REQUEST(type 0x05:remote
meter)
This message is used to obtain meter data from the 01V. It is used in
LOCAL OFF MODE to display the meter of the remote device, or to
display the meter on the screen of a personal computer, etc.
In order to obtain meter data, the meter whose data is required must
be displayed in the LCD of the remote device. This means that before
transmitting this request, you must first transmit the
above-described "4.6.4.11 PARAMETER CHANGE (type 0x03:bit
operation for controller(LCD-Fader mode))" to display the appro-
priate meter in the LCD screen of the remote device.
Reception
When [Parameter Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
Device Channel included in SUB STATUS, this message will be
received.
When this message is received, Parameter Change (remote meter)
messages will begin to be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel.
Transmission
When [LOCAL OFF] is ON, transmit a meter data request for the
currently displayed meter on the [Tx CH]. For each request, meter
data will be transmitted for five seconds. If you want meter data con-
tinuously for longer than this, you will need to transmit requests at
intervals of five seconds or less. When the 01V is in LOCAL OFF
MODE, transmit requests at approximately one-second intervals.
When [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON and the 01V itself did not
receive this message, the message will be echoed.
Table of signal levels and codes
5. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
MESSAGE (Bulk Dump) &
REQUEST
These messages input and output the contents of various types of
internal memory.
The unique header identifies whether or not the data is for the 01V.
The CHECK SUM is calculated by adding the data following the
BYTE COUNT(LOW) until the data preceding the CHECK SUM,
then inverting the bits (2's complement), and setting bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = ( -sum) & 0x7F
Reception
This is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
Device Channel that is included in SUB STATUS.
When a BULK DUMP is received, it will immediately be written into
the specified memory.
When a BULK DUMP REQUEST is received, a bulk dump will be
transmitted immediately.
Transmission
In the [MIDI-BULK] page, this is transmitted on the [Tx CH] chan-
nel by key operations.
In response to a Bulk Dump Request, a Bulk Dump Message is trans-
mitted on the [Rx CH] channel.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15(Tx/Rx Channel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00000101 05 remote meter
DATA 0sgttttt tt meter no.(s:special bit, g:gr bit)
0mmmmmmm mm0
0mmmmmmm mm1
: :
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15(Tx/Rx Channel No.1-16)
GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID
MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code (01V)
PARAM TYPE 00000101 05 remote meter
DATA 0sgttttt tt meter no.(s:special bit, g:gr bit)
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
Level code Level code Level code
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-72dB 0x1F -30dB 0x57 -9dB 0x72
-68dB 0x24 -27dB 0x5A -8dB 0x73
-64dB 0x29 -24dB 0x5F -7dB 0x75
-60dB 0x2F -21dB 0x62 -6dB 0x77
-56dB 0x33 -18dB 0x67 -5dB 0x78
-51dB 0x3A -16dB 0x69 -4dB 0x79
-48dB 0x3F -15dB 0x6A -3dB 0x7A
-46dB 0x41 -14dB 0x6B -2dB 0x7B
-42dB 0x47 -13dB 0x6D -1dB 0x7D
-39dB 0x4A -12dB 0x6F 0dB 0x7E
-36dB 0x4F -11dB 0x70 CLIP 0x7F
-33dB 0x52 -10dB 0x71
data name rx/tx function
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
'M' rx/tx Scene Memory & Request
'S' rx/tx Setup Memory & Request
'I' rx/tx Remote(Internal Parameter) Memory & Request
'L' rx/tx Remote(MMC) Memory & Request
'U' rx/tx Remote(User Define) Memory & Request
'C' rx/tx Control Change Assign Table & Request
'P' rx/tx Program Change Assign Table & Request
'Q' rx/tx Equalizer Library & Request
'Y' rx/tx Dynamics Library & Request
'E' rx/tx Effect Library & Request
286 MIDI Data Format
01V—Owner’s Manual
SCENE MEMORY BULK DUMP FORMAT
The ten bytes at the beginning are the ID + title, and are 7 bit data.
The subsequent 1014 bytes are all split into 4 bit data.
SCENE MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT
SETUP MEMORY BULK DUMP FORMAT
All data is split into 4 bit.
SETUP MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT
REMOTE(Internal Parameter) MEMORY BULK
DUMP FORMAT
All data is 7 bit data.
REMOTE(Internal Parameter) MEMORY BULK
DUMP REQUEST FORMAT
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00010000 10 2048(2038+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 00001010 00
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01001101 4D 'M'
0mmmmmmm mm m=0-99,127(Scene Memory No.0-99,
edit buffer)
Receive is effective No.1-99,127
DATA 0ddddddd ds Scene Memory(10+(1014*2) bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01001101 4D 'M'
0mmmmmmm mm m=0-99,127(Scene Memory No.0-99,cur-
rent)
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00000010 02 266(256+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 00001010 0A
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01010011 53 'S'
00100000 20 ' '
DATA 0ddddddd ds Setup Memory(128*2bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01010011 53 'S'
00100000 20 ' '
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00000000 00 100(90+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 01100100 64
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01001001 49 'I'
0bbbbbbb bb b = 0-3(bank no.1-4)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Remote(Internal Parameter) Mem-
ory(90bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01001001 49 'I'
0bbbbbbb bb b = 0-3(bank no.1-4)
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
MIDI Data Format 287
01V—Owner’s Manual
REMOTE(MMC) MEMORY BULK DUMP FORMAT
All data is 7 bit data.
REMOTE(MMC) MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST
FORMAT
REMOTE(User Define) MEMORY BULK DUMP
FORMAT
All data (word) is split into 7 bit.
REMOTE(User Define) MEMORY BULK DUMP
REQUEST FORMAT
EQUALIZER LIBRARY BULK DUMP FORMAT
The twelve bytes at the beginning are the title, and are 7 bit data. The
following twelve bytes are all split into 4 bit data.
EQUALIZER LIBRARY BULK DUMP REQUEST
FORMAT
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00000000 00 34(24+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 00100010 22
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01001100 4C 'L'
00100000 20 ' '
DATA 0ddddddd ds Remote(MMC) Memory(24bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01001100 4C 'L'
00100000 20 ' '
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00001011 0B 1450(1440+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 00101010 2A
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01010101 55 'U'
0bbbbbbb bb bb = 0-3(bank no. 1-4)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Remote(User Define) Memory(1440bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01010101 55 'U'
0bbbbbbb bb bb = 0-3(bank no. 1-4)
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00000000 00 46(36+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 00101110 2E
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01010001 51 'Q'
0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-79 (Equalizer Library No.1-80)
96-124(ch1-12,13/14,15/16,RTN1/2,AUX
1-4,ST MAS,ch17-24)
Receive is effective No.40-79,96-125
DATA 0ddddddd ds Equalizer Library Mem-
ory(12+(12*2)bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01010001 51 'Q'
0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-79 (Equalizer Library No.1-80)
96-124(ch1-12,13/14,15/16,RTN1/2,AUX
1-4,ST MAS,ch17-24)
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
288 MIDI Data Format
01V—Owner’s Manual
DYNAMICS LIBRARY BULK DUMP FORMAT
The first twelve bytes are the title, and are 7 bit data. The following
seven bytes are all split into 4 bit data.
DYNAMICS LIBRARY BULK DUMP REQUEST
FORMAT
EFFECT LIBRARY BULK DUMP FORMAT
The first twelve bytes are the title, and are 7 bit data. The following 41
bytes are all split into 4 bit data.
EFFECT LIBRARY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00000000 00 36(26+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 00100100 24
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01011001 59 'Y'
0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-79 (Dynamics Library No.1-80)
96-114(ch1-12,13/14,15/16,AUX1-4,ST
MAS)
Receive is effective No.40-79,96-115
DATA 0ddddddd ds Dynamics Library Mem-
ory(12+(7*2)bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01011001 59 'Y'
0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-79 (Dynamics Library No.1-80)
96-114(ch1-12,13/14,15/16,AUX1-4,ST
MAS)
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00000000 00 104(94+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 01101000 68
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01000101 45 'E'
0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-98 (Effect Library No.1-99)
112-113(Effct1, Effect2)
Receive is effective 42-98,112-113
DATA 0ddddddd ds Effect Library Memory(12+(41*2)bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01000101 45 'E'
0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-98 (Effect Library No.1-99)
112-113(Effect1, Effect2)
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
MIDI Data Format 289
01V—Owner’s Manual
PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGNMENT TABLE BULK
DUMP FORMAT
All data is 7 bit data.
PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGNMENT TABLE BULK
DUMP REQUEST FORMAT
Control Change Assignment Table Bulk Dump
Format
All data is 7 bit data.
CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGNMENT TABLE BULK
DUMP REQUEST FORMAT
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00000001 01 138(128+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 00001010 0A
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01010000 50 'P'
00100000 20 ' '
DATA 0ddddddd ds Program Change Table(128bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01010000 50 'P'
00100000 20 ' '
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID No.(YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
BYTE COUNT(HIGH) 00000010 02 352(342+10)bytes
BYTE COUNT(LOW) 01100000 60
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01000011 43 'C'
00100000 20 ' '
DATA 0ddddddd ds Control Change Table(114x3bytes)
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds+...+de)+1)
AND 7Fh
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16)
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump
01001100 4C 'L'
01001101 4D 'M'
00100000 20 ' '
00100000 20 ' '
00111000 38 '8'
01000010 42 'B'
00110011 33 '3'
00110100 34 '4'
DATA NAME 01000011 43 'C'
00100000 20 ' '
EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive
YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console—Internal Parameters] Date: 01 Feb. 1998
Model: 01V MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.0
Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1–16
1–16
1–16
1–16 Memorized
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
**************
OMNI off/OMNI on
X
X
Memorized
Note
Number True Voice
X
**************
0–127
X
Velocity Note On
Note Off
X
X
O
O
After
Touch
Keys
Ch’s
X
X
X
X
Pitch bend X X
Control
Change 0–95, 102–119 O O Assignable
Prog
Change :True#
0–127
**************
0–127
0–99
Assignable
System Exclusive O O *1
System
Common
:Song Pos
:Song Sel
:Tune
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
X
X
X
X
Aux
Messages
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
Notes
MTC quarter frame message is recognized
*1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC.
For MIDI Remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
Appendix D: Resources 291
01V—Owner’s Manual
Appendix D: Resources
Books
•Introducing Digital Audio, Ian R Sinclair, second edition, PC Publishing, 1992. A
good all-around introduction to digital audio. Second edition explains oversampling
and bitstream techniques.
•Principles of Digital Audio, Ken C. Pohlmann, Howard W.Sams & Co, 1989. Covering
all aspects of digital audio, this book is ideal for newcomers who want to know the
basics plus a bit more.
•The Art of digital Audio, John Watkinson, Focal Press (Butterworth Group), 1990. An
essential read for digital audio professionals—but only for the serious!
•The MIDI Ins, Outs & Thrus, Jeff Rona, Hal Leonard Publishing, 1992. An excellent
introduction to MIDI with many illustrations for easy understanding.
•MIDI Systems & Control, Francis Rumsey, second edition, Focal Press, 1994. Covers
all MIDI topics in detail and looks at how MIDI can be used to control systems (i.e.,
digital mixers, synths).
•THE MIDI BOOK, Steve DeFuria with Joe Scacciaferro, Hal Leonard Books. A good
introduction for anyone new to MIDI.
•THE MIDI RESOURCE BOOK, Steve DeFuria with Joe Scacciaferro, Hal Leonard
Books, 1988. Following on from THE MIDI BOOK, this one looks at the real nuts
and bolts of MIDI including the MIDI specification and how to read MIDI Imple-
mentation Charts.
•Yamaha Sound Reinforcement Handbook, Gary Davis and Ralph Jones, second edi-
tion, Hal Leonard Publishing Corporation, 1990. Although primarily concerned
with sound reinforcement, many of the subjects covered also apply to studio audio
applications. The second edition also includes a comprehensive section on MIDI.
Yamaha Web Site
Information on Yamaha professional audio products can be found at the Yamaha Pro-
fessional Audio Web site.
<http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/homeenglish/>
Glossary 293
01V—Owner’s Manual
Glossary
A/D converter—An electronic device for converting analog signals to digital signals.
AFL (After Fader Listen)—Monitoring signals after the channel fader. Contrast with
PFL.
Aliasing—A type of signal distortion that occurs during A/D conversion if the sam-
pling rate is less than twice that of the highest audio frequency. A/D converters employ
aliasing filters to remove audio frequencies higher than half the sampling rate. See also
Nyquist Sampling Theorem.
Anti-aliasing—In digital audio, a technique used to prevent aliasing in the form of an
anti-aliasing filter before A/D conversion. This filter removes audio frequencies that are
higher than half the sampling frequency (e.g., for a 32 kHz sampling rate, audio fre-
quencies above 16 kHz are filtered).
Balancing—A technique for reducing interference in audio cables by using two con-
ductors, known as the hot (+) and cold (–), to carry two versions of the audio signal,
180 degrees out of phase with each other. Since any interference picked up will be in the
same phase on both conductors, the differential amplifier at the balanced input cancels
out the noise, but amplifies the audio signal.
Bulk Dump—A MIDI function for transferring data between MIDI equipment. Data
is transmitted as MIDI System Exclusive messages.
Bus—A common conductor used to collect and distribute audio signals.
Cascade—A technique for increasing the number of available inputs by connecting
two or more audio mixers together.
CH—Abbreviation for channel.
Clipping—The unwanted distortion effect caused by inputting too large a signal to an
audio circuit.
Coaxial—The electrical connection for transmitting and receiving consumer format
digital audio, typically using phono connectors. See also Consumer format.
Consumer format—The consumer digital audio format, developed by Sony and
Philips, for transferring digital audio data between consumer-type digital audio equip-
ment, such as CD players, DAT, DCC, and MiniDisc decks. Two channels of digital
audio (left & right) are carried in one connection, usually a phono connection. This
format is also referred to as IEC60958 (formerly 958) and S/PDIF. See also Coaxial.
Control Change—A type of MIDI message providing real-time parameter control.
Typical Control Changes include Modulation, Volume, Pan, and Portamento.
D/A converter—An electronic device for converting digital signals to analog signals.
De-emphasis—See Emphasis.
DIO—Abbreviation for digital input and output.
Dither—The process of adding low-level random noise to audio signals in order to
reduce A/D converter quantization noise. Dither techniques are also used for digital
audio wordlength reduction (e.g., 20 to 16-bit conversion).
DSP (Digital Signal Processor)—A chip designed specifically for processing large
amounts of data at high speed and in real time. This type of processor is ideal for han-
dling digital audio data.
Dynamic range—The difference between the loudest and quietest signal levels in a
system. In an audio device, usually the difference between the maximum output level
and the residual noise floor. In a digital system, the available dynamic range is deter-
294 Glossary
01V—Owner’s Manual
mined by the data resolution, about 6 dB per digital bit. Hence, a 16-bit system theo-
retically provides a 96 dB dynamic range.
Edit buffer—The memory area used to store the current mix settings. When a mix
scene is stored, the Edit Buffer data is stored to the selected scene memory. When a mix
scene is recalled, the data of the selected scene memory is copied into the Edit Buffer.
EFF—Abbreviation for effect.
Emphasis—A technique used to improve the noise performance of first generation
AD/DA converters by boosting analog signals above 3.5 kHz by 6 dB/octave prior to
A/D conversion. Emphasis was subsequently detected by the D/A converter and
de-emphasis applied after D/A conversion. Although not used anymore, emphasis
functions are often provided for compatibility with old digital recordings.
EQ snapshot—A set of EQ settings.
Fade time—The time it takes faders to move to new positions when a mix scene is
recalled. Can be used for crossfading between channels.
Fs—Abbreviation for sampling frequency.
General MIDI (GM)—An extension to the MIDI Standard that, among other things,
states that a General MIDI tone generator must be at least 24-note polyphonic, have 16
parts, and 128 specific preset voices.
GR—Abbreviation for gain reduction.
Initial settings—The settings used when a device is first turned on after leaving the
factory. Also known as the default, or factory settings.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)—A type of display device that uses liquid crystals to
generate characters and graphics.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)—A type of diode that lights up when an electric cur-
rent is applied.
Line-Level Signal—A high-level signal in the range from –20 dB to +20 dB. Most
audio equipment outputs signals at line level. Contrast with Low-Level Signal.
Low-Level Signal—A signal in the range from –100 dB to –20 dB. Microphone and
electric guitar signals are in this range. Contrast with Line-Level Signal.
LSB (Least Significant Byte)—The byte of a digital word that represents the lowest
value. Contrast with MSB.
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface)—An internationally agreed stan-
dard that allows electronic musical instruments and audio equipment to communicate.
MIDI Device Number—A numbering scheme used to identify individual devices in
a MIDI system, commonly used for transmitting System Exclusive data.
Mix scene—A set of mixer settings. Just like a play, a piece of music consists of various
scenes, each requiring different mixer settings. Mix scenes are stored in scene memo-
ries, and can be recalled manually or using MIDI Program Changes, which can be sent
from a computer, MIDI footswitch, keyboard, or sequencer. See also Scene memories.
MMC (MIDI Machine Control)— A set of MIDI messages for controlling record-
ers, video tape machines, and other studio equipment. Typical MMC commands
include Stop, Play, Rewind, and Pause.
Mdulation—A technique for controlling a signal’s frequency (pitch) or amplitude
(level) using an LFO (low frequency oscillator). The LFO frequency is set using modu-
lation speed parameters and the amount of LFO control is set using modulation depth
parameters.
Glossary 295
01V—Owner’s Manual
MSB (Most Significant Byte)—The byte of a digital word that represents the high-
est value. Contrast with LSB
Noise gate—An electronic switch that opens if the trigger signal falls below a speci-
fied threshold and closes if the trigger signal exceeds the threshold. Typically used to
shut off unwanted hiss and noise.
Nominal level—See Operating Level.
Nyquist theorem—The Nyquist theorem states that the sampling rate of a digital
audio system must be at least twice that of the highest audio frequency, otherwise wave-
form distortion know as aliasing will occur. See also Aliasing.
OMNI—The MIDI mode in which a device responds to MIDI data on all 16 channels.
Operating level—This is the signal level at which a piece of audio equipment is
designed to operate. The two most common operating levels are –10 dBV (316 mV),
which is used by semiprofessional equipment, and +4 dBu (1.23 V), which is used by
professional equipment.
Oversampling—Sampling an audio signal at a rate higher than the actual sampling
rate to reduce noise caused by quantization errors.
PAM (Pulse Amplitude Modulation)—In the first part of the A/D conversion
process, pulses occurring at the sampling rate are modulated by an analog audio signal.
See also PCM.
PC—Originally, the abbreviation for personal computer. Although today it’s used as
the generic name for any IBM-compatible personal computer, usually running a ver-
sion of the Microsoft Windows operating system.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)—In the second part of the A/D conversion pro-
cess, the pulses derived using PAM are converted into binary data words using PCM.
See also PAM.
Peaking—A type of EQ circuit used to cut and boost a band of frequencies, producing
a mountain-peak type response. The width of the band is called the Q. Midband EQ is
usually of the peaking type. Compare with Shelving.
PEQ—An abbreviation for parametric EQ.
PFL (Pre Fader Listen)—Monitoring signals before the channel fader. Contrast with
AFL.
Phantom powering—The technique for supplying condenser-type microphones a
DC voltage via the signal carrying conductors of a balanced cable.
Pink noise—A type of random noise that contains an equal amount of energy per
octave. For example, the bands 100–200, 800–1600, and 3000–6000 all contain the same
amount of energy. White noise, on the other hand, has an equal amount of energy per
frequency band. That is, 100–200, 800–900, and 3000–3100.
Post fader—The point in the signal path after the fader. Aux sends are often config-
ured as post-fader sends, which means the aux send signal is sourced after the channel
fader. The advantage of this is that the aux send signal can be controlled at the same
time as the main channel signal using the same fader. Post-fader aux sends are typically
used to feed effects processors. See also AFL.
Pre fader—The point in the signal path before the fader. Aux sends are often config-
ured as pre-fader sends, which means the aux send signal is sourced before the channel
fader. The advantage of this is that the aux send signal can be controlled independently
of the main channel signal. Pre-fader aux sends are often used for foldback mixes. See
also PFL.
Program Change—A type of MIDI message for selecting programs.
296 Glossary
01V—Owner’s Manual
Q—The unit used to express a filter’s selectivity. High values imply a narrow frequency
band, low values, a wide frequency band.
Quantization—The PCM process in which PAM pulses are approximated to the
nearest binary value available.
S/PDIF format—See Coaxial format.
Sampling rate — The number of times per second analog audio signals are sampled
(i.e., measured) during A/D conversion. Common digital audio sampling rates are
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
Scene memories—Memory locations used to store mix scenes. See also Mix scene.
Shelving—A type of EQ circuit used to cut and boost frequencies above or below a set
frequency. It produces a shelf-looking response curve. High and low EQs are usually of
the shelving type. Contrast with Peaking.
Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N)—In an audio system, the difference between the oper-
ating signal level and the residual noise floor expressed as a decibel ratio, commonly
used to measure a system’s noise performance.
Snapshot—See Mix scene.
ST OUT—The 01V stereo output.
System Exclusive—A type of MIDI message for exclusive use with a particular
device. See also Bulk Dump.
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)—The measure of distortion introduced by an
audio system relative to the audio signal expressed as a percentage. Compared to
third-harmonic distortion, which is the measure of a single harmonic, total harmonic
distortion is the sum of distortions produced at all harmonics.
Unity gain—A gain of one.
Wordclock—A clock signal used to synchronize the data processing circuits of all
devices connected in a digital audio system. The wordclock frequency is the same as the
sampling rate.
Index 297
01V—Owner’s Manual
Index
Symbols
+48 V phantom powering 41
Numerics
01V
benefits 4
cascading 214
dimensions 271
features 3
initializing 204
level diagram 257
preferences 203
rack mounting 259
sonic performance 5
03D parameter to control change
assignment table 277
–1/DEC & +1/INC buttons 31
15/16–2TR IN switch
2TR IN 77
about 15
input channels 40
2TR IN
about 21
using 77
2TR OUT
about 21
using 88
44.1 kHz sampling rate 209
A
A/D converter, definition 293
About
aux sends 94
bus outs 108
dynamics library 173
dynamics processors 162
edit buffer 185
effects 120
effects library 132
EQ 62
EQ library 67
input channels 40
interface 28
MIDI & the 01V 222
monitor & solo 76
omni outs 116
option I/O cards 216
scene memories 184
stereo output 88
wordclocks 206
AFL, definition 293
AFL/PFL
monitoring 78
solo 80
Aliasing, definition 293
AMP SIMULATE 147
Analog controls 15
Analog input specifications 268
Analog output specifications 268
Anti-aliasing, definition 293
Assigning
faders & on buttons 194
input channels 49
omni outs 116
option I/O digital outputs 219
oscillator 202
Attenuator 43
Auto navigate, wordclock source
209
AUTOPAN 144
AUX page 1 95, 96, 97, 99, 100
AUX page 2 102
Aux pan page 102
Aux pre/post page 95, 96, 97, 99,
100
Aux sends
about 94
block diagram 104
dynamics processors 164
effects returns 131
EQ 64
input channels 50
level setting 99
metering 83
monitoring 94
muting 100
omni outs 94
option I/O 94
pairing 101
panning 102
pre/post fader 97
specifications 265
stereo pair block diagram 105
using 95
viewing settings 98
B
Balancing the stereo output 90
Balancing, definition 293
Banks
internal parameters 194
MIDI bulk dump 232
user define 238
Benefits of a Digital Mixer 4
Block diagrams
aux sends 104
aux stereo pair 105
bus outs 112
bus outs stereo pair 113
complete 24
effects 159
input channels 60
monitoring 79
omni outs 118
option I/O 220
paired input channels 54
solo 82
stereo output 92
Books 291
Boosting the EQ 63
Bulk dump
definition 293
interval time 232
setup 226
using 232, 233
burst pink noise 202
Bus master page 109, 110
Bus outs
about 108
block diagram 112
bus to stereo 110
level setting 109
metering 83
monitoring 108
muting 109
omni outs 108
option I/O 108
pairing 111
specifications 265
stereo pair block diagram 113
Bus, definition 293
Bypassing the EQ 66
C
Calibrating the faders 204
Cans. See PHONES
Cascade delay 215
Cascade, definition 293
298 Index
01V—Owner’s Manual
Cascading the 01V 214
CH copy page 59
CH, definition 293
CH13-14 flip page 213
CHORUS 142
Clipping, definition 293
Coaxial
definition 293
Coaxial digital input. See Digital
stereo input
Coaxial digital output. See Digital
stereo output
Comp 167
Compander 171
Configuration, summary 4
Connectors
2TR IN 21
2TR OUT 21
DIGITAL STEREO IN 23
DIGITAL STEREO OUT 23
INPUT (BAL) 1–12 20
INPUT (BAL) 13–16 20
MIDI 23
MONITOR OUT 22
OMNI OUT 22
PHONES 21
STEREO OUT 23
TO HOST 23
Consumer format
definition 293
Contrast control 16
Control change
01V parameter assignment table
274
03D parameter assignment table
277
control change assignments 229
definition 293
echo 225
MIDI bulk dump 232
omni 225
on/off 225
page 229
parameter control 229
programmable mixer 01
parameter assignment
table 277
using 230
Control I/O specifications 270
Control page, option I/O 43, 47,
49, 58, 63, 95, 97, 123,
126
Controls
–1/DEC & +1/INC buttons 31
15/16–2TR IN switch 15
contrast 16
CURSOR buttons 31
ENTER button 31
fader mode buttons 17
faders 19
function buttons 17
GAIN control 15
MONITOR OUT LEVEL
control 15
MONITOR–2TR IN switch 15
ON buttons 18
PAD switch 15
PARAMETER wheel 31
PHONES LEVEL control 15
POWER switch 23
Return controls 19
SEL buttons 18
SELECTED CHANNEL 16
SOLO status indicator 19
Copying channel settings 59
Crossfading mix scenes 191
CURSOR buttons 31
Cutting the EQ 63
D
D switch, routing 49
D/A converter, definition 293
DEC button 31
De-emphasis
digital stereo input 213
option I/O input 216
Delay
cascade compensation 215
effects parameter 137
input channels 45
omni outs 117
stereo output 91
DELAY LCR 141
Delay page 45
DELAY page 1 42
DELAY page 2 45
DELAY page 3 45
DELAY page 4 91, 117
DELAY UNITS, preference 203
DELAY+ER 152
DELAY+REV 154
DELAY->ER 153
DELAY->REV 155
Depth, 01V dimensions 271
Device number, MMC 236
DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION,
preference 203
Digital input specifications 269
Digital mixer benefits 4
Digital output specifications 269
DIGITAL STEREO IN 23
Digital stereo input
connector 23
emphasis 213
specifications 264
using 213
DIGITAL STEREO OUT 23
Digital stereo output
connector 23
dither 212
specifications 266
stereo output 88
using 211
Dimensions 271
DIO, definition 293
Display
about 16
contrast 16
effects returns area 29
elements 30
faders 30
function area 28
memory area 29
messages 258
page area 29
parameter boxes 30
rotary controls 30
selected channel area 29
switches 30
DIST->DELAY 156
DISTORTION 146
Dither 212
Dither page 212
Dither, definition 293
DSP, definition 293
DUAL PITCH 145
Ducking 169
DYNA.FILTER 147
DYNA.FLANGE 147
DYNA.PHASER 148
Dynamic range, definition 293
Dynamics edit page 164, 165, 166
Dynamics library
about 173
MIDI bulk dump 232
number of programs 266
page 174, 175, 176
preset program list 163
recalling programs 175
Index 299
01V—Owner’s Manual
storing programs 174
summary 6
titling 176
DYNAMICS page 1 164, 165, 166
DYNAMICS page 2 174, 175, 176
Dynamics processors
about 162
aux sends 164
comp 167
compander 171
ducking 169
editing 166
expander 170
gate 168
input channels 164
library 173
parameters 177
stereo output 165
using 164
E
EARLY REF 138
ECHO 142
Edit buffer 185
definition 294
Edit indicator 185
Editing
dynamics processors 166
effects 136
EFF, definition 294
EFFECT page 1 123, 124, 136, 137,
157
EFFECT page 2 132, 133, 134, 135
EFFECT page 3 125
Effects
about 120
block diagram 159
edit page 123, 124, 136, 137,
157
editing 136
library 132
library page 132, 133, 134, 135
parameters 138
pre/post page 125
summary 6
using 123
Effects library
about 132
MIDI bulk dump 232
number of programs 266
preset program list 121
recalling programs 134
storing programs 133
titling programs 135
Effects returns
aux sends 131
EQ 64
level setting 131
metering 83
monitoring 131
muting 130
panning 47, 131
routing 49
specifications 264
viewing settings 130
Effects returns area, display 29
Effects sends
master level settings 128
metering 86
muting 129
pre/post fader 125
viewing settings 127
Emphasis
definition 294
digital stereo input 213
option I/O 216
ENTER button 31
EQ
about 62
adjusting 63
aux sends 64
bypassing 66
effects returns 64
input channels 63
library 67
library page 67, 68, 69, 70
page 63, 64, 65
resetting 66
specifications 267
stereo output 65
summary 5
EQ AUTO SCREEN, preference
203
EQ library
about 67
MIDI bulk dump 232
number of programs 266
preset program list 67
preset program parameters 71
recalling programs 69
storing programs 68
titling programs 70
EQ page 43
EQ page 1 43, 63, 64, 65
EQ page 2 67, 68, 69, 70
Error messages 258
Expander 170
F
F control 63
FAD, user define 238
Fade time
definition 294
mix scenes 191
Fader modes 32
Faders
about 19
calibrating 204
display 30
fader modes 35
grouping 55
mode buttons 17
nominal indicator 30
reassigning 194
stereo output 90
summary 5
FB gain parameter, input delay 45
Features 3
FLANGE 143
FREEZE 157
Freq, effects parameter 137
Function area, display 28
Function buttons 17
Further reading 291
G
G control 63
GAIN control
about 15
using 41
Gang, pan mode 48
Gate 168
GATE REVERB 139
General MIDI
definition 294
General specifications 261
GR, definition 294
Group page 55, 56
Grouping faders 55
Grouping mutes 56
GUI interface
about 28
summary 6
300 Index
01V—Owner’s Manual
H
Headphones. See PHONES
Height, 01V dimensions 271
HIGH button 63
HI-MID button 63
HOME page 1 83
HOME page 2 83
HOME page 3 84
HOME page 4 84
HOME page 5 85
Home page, Yamaha web site 291
HPF 62
HQ.PITCH 144
I
Implementation chart, MIDI 290
INC button 31
INC/DEC SCENE RECALL,
preference 203
Individual, pan mode 48
Initial settings, definition 294
Initializing
01V 204
internal parameter banks 194
parameter to control change
table 229
scene memory to program
change table 227
user defined MIDI controllers
238
INPUT (BAL) 1–12 20
INPUT (BAL) 13–16 20
Input channels
1 through 12 40
13 through 16 40
17 through 24 40
attenuator 43
aux sends 50
block diagram 60
copying settings 59
delay 45
dynamics processors 164
EQ 63
grouping faders 55
grouping mutes 56
level setting 46
metering 83
monitoring 50
muting 46
omni outs 50
option I/O 50
overview 40
pairing 52
panning 47
phase 42
routing 49
specifications 263
swapping inputs 51
swapping settings 59
viewing settings 57
Input jacks 20
Input meter page 83
Input swap page 51
Inputs and outputs 20
Internal parameter page 194
Interval time, MIDI bulk dump 232
Inv gang, pan mode 48
L
Latch, user define 238
LCD, definition 294
LED, definition 294
Level diagram 257
Level setting
aux sends 99
bus outs 109
effects returns 131
effects send masters 128
input channels 46
stereo output 90
Libraries
dynamics 173
effects 132
EQ 67
LIBRARY LIST ORDER, preference
204
Line inputs 20
Line-level signal, definition 294
Link port
about 222
selecting 224
using 224
Linking 01Vs 239
LISTEN
monitoring 78
solo 80
Local control 234
Locate points
MMC 236
LO-MID button 63
LOW button 63
Low-level signal, definition 294
LPF 62
LSB, definition 294
M
Mains lead 11
Memory area, display 29
MEMORY page 1 186, 187, 189,
190
MEMORY page 2 191
MEMORY page 3 190
MEMORY page 4 192
Messages, display 258
Metering
aux sends 83
bus outs 83
effects returns 83
effects sends 86
input channels 83
main stereo output meters 84
metering point 85
omni outs 84
option I/O 85
peak hold 84
stereo output 84
Metering point page 85
Mic inputs 20
MIDI
about 222
about the connectors
about 23
bulk dump 232
bulk page 232
bulk setup 226
control change page 229
control change setup 225
data format 280
definition 294
implementation chart 290
linking 01Vs 239
local control 234
local control page 234
MMC 236
parameter change setup 225
parameter control 229
ports 222
program change page 227
program change setup 225
receive channel 225
receive indicators 224
scene recall 227
setup 224
setup page 224
summary 7
system exclusive parameter
control 231
transmit channel 225
Index 301
01V—Owner’s Manual
user define page 238
user defined controllers 238
using ports 223
MIDI data format 280
MIDI Device Number, definition
294
MIDI page 1 224
MIDI page 2 227
MIDI page 3 229
MIDI page 4 232
MIDI page 5 234
Mix parameter, input delay 45
Mix scenes
definition 294
Mix scenes. See Scene memories
Mixdown solo mode 80
MMC 236
definition 294
MMC control page 236
MOD.DELAY 140
MOD.FILTER 146
Modulation, definition 294
MONI TRIM 78
MONITOR OUT
about 22
using 77
MONITOR OUT LEVEL control
about 15
using 77
Monitor setup page 78
MONITOR–2TR IN switch
about 15
using 77
Monitoring
about 76
AFL/PFL 78
aux sends 94
block diagram 79
bus outs 108
D/A converters 77
effects returns 131
input channels 50
MONITOR OUT 22
MONITOR–2TR IN switch 77
mono/stereo 78
setup 78
specifications 266
stereo output 88
using 78
MONO DELAY 139
Motorized faders 5
MSB, definition 295
MULTI FILTER 156
Muting
aux sends 100
bus outs 109
effects returns 130
effects send masters 129
grouping channels 56
input channels 46
stereo output 90
MY4-AD 4 Analog Input 216
MY4-DA Analog Output 216
MY8-AD 8 Analog Input 216
MY8-AE AES/EBU 216
MY8-AT ADAT 216
MY8-TD Tascam 216
N
Naming. See Titling
Noise gate, definition 295
Nominal fader indicator 30
Nominal Level, definition 295
Normal phase 42
Nyquist theorem, definition 295
O
Omni
definition 295
OMNI OUT 22
Omni out select page 116
Omni outs
about 116
assigning 116
aux sends 94
block diagram 118
bus outs 108
connectors 22
D/A converters 116
delay 117
input channels 50
meter page 84
metering 84
specifications 265
stereo output 88
ON buttons
about 18
aux sends 100
effects send masters 129
fader modes 34
input channels 46
master 90
reassigning 194
Operating level, definition 295
Option I/O
about the cards 216
assigning outputs 219
aux sends 94
block diagram 220
bus outs 108
card specs 217
control page 43, 63, 95, 97, 123,
126
input channels 50
input specifications 264
installing cards 218
metering 85
output specifications 266
select page 219
stereo output 88
summary 6
swapping inputs 51
OPTION I/O slot
about 23
available cards 216
installing cards 218
Option in meter page 85
Option out meter page 85
OPTION page 1 85
OPTION page 2 43, 47, 49, 58, 63,
95, 97, 123, 126
OPTION page 3 85
OPTION page 4 219
OPTION page 5 51
Oscillator 202
Oscillator page 202
Output delay page 91, 117
Oversampling, definition 295
P
PAD switch
about 15
using 41
Page area, display 29
Pages
aux pan 102
aux pre/post 95, 96, 97, 99, 100
bulk 232
bus master 109, 110
CH copy 59
CH13-14 flip 213
control change 229
control, option I/O 43, 47, 49,
58, 63, 95, 97, 123, 126
Delay 45
dither 212
dynamics edit 164, 165, 166
302 Index
01V—Owner’s Manual
dynamics library 174, 175, 176
effect pre/post 125
effects edit 123, 124, 136, 137,
157
effects library 132, 133, 134, 135
EQ 43, 63, 64, 65
EQ library 67, 68, 69, 70
fade time 191
group 55, 56
input meter 83
input swap 51
internal parameter 194
local control 234
memory 186, 187, 189, 190
memory sort 190
metering point 85
MIDI setup 224
MMC control 236
monitor setup 78
omni out meter 84
omni out select 116
option I/O out select 219
option in meter 85
option out meter 85
oscillator 202
output delay 91, 117
pair 52, 101, 111
panpot 47
phase 42
preferences 203
program change 227
recall safe 192
routing 49
RTN/output meter 83
solo setup 80
ST out meter 84
user define 238
view 57, 86, 89, 98, 127, 130
wordclock select 209
Pair page 52, 101, 111
Pairing
aux sends 101
aux sends block diagram 105
bus outs 111
input channels 52
input channels pair block
diagram 54
PAM, definition 295
PAN/ROUT page 1 47
PAN/ROUT page 2 49
PAN/ROUT page 3 109, 110
PAN/ROUT page 4 116, 213
Panning
bus to stereo 110
channel aux sends 102
effects returns 47, 131
input channels 47
modes 48
PAN/ROUT page 47
PANPOT AUTO SCREEN,
preference 203
Panpot page 47
Parameter boxes, display 30
Parameter change
echo 225
on/off 225
Parameter control
system exclusive 231
PARAMETER wheel 31
Parameters
Dynamics processors preset
programs 177
effects preset programs 138
EQ preset programs 71
PCM, definition 295
Peak hold 84
Peaking
definition 295
EQ 62
PEQ, definition 295
PFL, definition 295
PFL/AFL. See AFL/PFL
PHANTOM +48V ON–OFF
switches 22
Phantom powering 41
Phantom powering, definition 295
Phase 42
Phase page 42
PHASER 143
Phone inputs 20
PHONES jack
connector 21
using 77
PHONES LEVEL control
about 15
using 77
Pink noise
definition 295
pink noise 202
Ports
about 222
MIDI 23
selecting 224
TO HOST 23
using MIDI 223
using TO HOST 223
Post fader, definition 295
Power cord 11
POWER switch 23
Powering down the 01V 11
Powering up the 01V 11
Pre fader, definition 295
Pre/post
aux sends 97
effects sends 125
monitoring 78
solo 80
Preferences 203
Preferences pages 203
Preset programs
dynamics list 163
dynamics parameters 177
effects list 121
effects parameters 138
EQ list 67
EQ parameters 71
Pro Tools, system 250
Problem solving 253
Program change
definition 295
echo 225
MIDI bulk dump 232
omni 225
on/off 225
page 227
scene memory assignment table
273
scene memory assignments 227
scene recall 227
using 228
Programmable mixer 01 parameter
to control change
assignment table 277
Programs
dynamics list 163
dynamics parameters 177
effects list 121
effects parameters 138
EQ list 67
EQ parameters 71
Protecting scene memories 189
Q
Q
adjusting 63
definition 296
Quantization, definition 296
Index 303
01V—Owner’s Manual
R
Rack mounting 259
Rear panel 22
Reassigning faders & on buttons
194
RECALL CONFIRMATION,
preference 203
Recalling
dynamics programs 175
effects programs 134
EQ programs 69
scene memories 187
undoing mix scene recalls 189
Receive channel, MIDI 225
Recording solo mode 80
Releasing
aux send pairs 101
bus out pairs 111
input channel pairs 53
REMOTE page 1 194
REMOTE page 2 236
REMOTE page 3 238
Renumbering scene memories 190
Request
local control 234
MIDI bulk dump 232
Resetting the EQ 66
Return controls
about 19
fader modes 35
REV+CHORUS 148
REV+FLANGE 149
REV+SYMPHO 150
REV->CHORUS 149
REV->FLANGE 150
REV->PAN 151
REV->SYMPHO 151
REVERB HALL 138
REVERB PLATE 138
REVERB ROOM 138
REVERB STAGE 138
REVERSE GATE 139
Reverse phase 42
RING MOD 146
RK124, rack-mount kit 259
ROTARY 145
Rotary controls, display 30
Routing
bus to stereo 110
effects returns 49
input channels 49
page 49
RTN/output meter page 83
S
Safe channels, mix scenes 192
Sampling rate
definition 296
setting 209
Scene memories
about 184
definition 296
display area 185
edit buffer 185
edit indicator 185
fade time 191
fade time page 191
memory 00 185
memory page 186, 187, 189,
190
memory sort page 190
MIDI bulk dump 232
number of memories 266
program change assignment
table 273
protecting 189
recall safe page 192
recalling 187
recalling via MIDI 188
renumbering 190
safe channels 192
storing 186
summary 7
titling 190
undoing recalls 189
what’s stored 184
Security cover 259
SEL buttons
about 18
fader modes 32
SELECT CH MESSAGE, preference
203
Selected channel area, display 29
Selected channel controls
about 16
EQ controls 63
SETUP page 1 209
SETUP page 2 78, 80
SETUP page 3 55, 56
SETUP page 4 52, 101, 111
SETUP page 5 212
Shelving
definition 296
EQ 62
Signal to noise ratio, definition 296
Sine wave, oscillator 202
Snapshot, definition 296
Solo
about 76
AFL/PFL 80
block diagram 82
modes 80
setup 80
stereo output 88
using 81
SOLO buttons
about 18
fader modes 33
Solo setup page 80
SOLO status indicator 19
SOLO TRIM 80
Sonic performance 5
Specifications 280
analog inputs 268
analog outputs 268
aux sends 265
bus outs 265
control I/O 270
digital inputs 269
digital outputs 269
digital stereo input 264
digital stereo output 266
effects returns 264
EQ 267
general 261
input channels 263
monitor out 266
omni outs 265
option I/O inputs 264
option I/O outputs 266
stereo output 265
ST out meter page 84
STEREO DELAY 140
Stereo meters
about 16
using 84
STEREO OUT 23
Stereo output
2TR OUT 88
about 88
balancing 90
block diagram 92
connectors 23
D/A converters 88
delay 91
digital stereo output 88
dynamics processors 165
EQ 65
fader 90
level setting 90
metering 84
304 Index
01V—Owner’s Manual
monitoring 88
muting 90
omni outs 88
option I/O 88
solo 88
specifications 265
viewing settings 89
STORE CONFIRMATION,
preference 203
Storing
dynamics programs 174
effects programs 133
EQ programs 68
MIDI bulk dump 232
scene memories 186
SW, user define 238
Swapping channel settings 59
Swapping input channels 51
Switches, display 30
Switching off the 01V 11
Switching on the 01V 11
SYMPHONIC 143
System examples
ADAT-interface recorder 242
general 10
Pro Tools 250
Tascam-interface recorder 246
Two ADAT-interface recorders
244
Two Tascam-interface
recorders 248
System exclusive
definition 296
parameter control 231
T
Tamper proof cover 259
Tempo, effects parameter 137
THD, definition 296
Title edit dialog box 37
Titling
dialog box 37
dynamics programs 176
effects programs 135
EQ programs 70
scene memories 190
TO HOST
about 222
about the connector
about 23
using 223
Top panel 14
Transmit
local control 234
MIDI bulk dump 232
Transmit channel, MIDI 225
Transport control, MMC 236
TREMOLO 144
Troubleshooting 253
Turning off the 01V 11
Turning on the 01V 11
U
Undoing mix scene recalls 189
Unity gain, definition 296
Unlatch, user define 238
User define page 238
User defined MIDI controllers 238
UTILITY page 1 202
UTILITY page 2 203
V
VIEW page 1 57, 86, 89, 98, 127,
130
VIEW page 2 57, 86, 89, 98, 127,
130
VIEW page 3 59
Viewing settings
aux sends 98
effects returns 130
effects sends 127
input channels 57
stereo output 89
W
Web site 291
Width, 01V dimensions 271
Wordclock
about 206
definition 296
important information 11
setting 209
Wordclock select page 209
Wordlength 212
X
XLR inputs 20
Owner’s Manual
01 09 2000 AP Printed in Japan
YAMAHA CORPORATION
Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
P.O. Box 3, Hamamatsu, 430-8651, Japan

Navigation menu